The URL can be used to link to this page

Plans TIGARD APARTMENTS RECEIVED135th and Scholls Ferry Tigard, Oregon DEC 3 0 2015 U CITY OF TIGARD B . BUILDING DIVISION DANIEL C. PURGIEL4-4at j' • j - � ta va ROI?1AND,OREGON #3540 nary OFG = � N + Building#1 13465 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00361 Building#2 13375 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00362 Building#3 13295 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00363 Building#4 13205 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00364 Building#5 13145 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00365 Building#6 13351 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00366 City of Tigard . . r•v=d Plans. Building#7 13215 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00367 +4 Date Building#8 13435 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00368 Building#9 13327 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00369 O FICE COPY Building#10 13225 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00370 iJ l Community 13285 SW Scholls Ferry BUP2015-00371 Building LrS ARCHITECTS 720 NW Davis Suite 300 Portland, Oregon 97209 W503.221.1121 0503.221.2077 I Tigard Apartments Table of Contents: 00 0110 December 11, 2015 Page 1 DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 0110 Table of Contents AVAILABLE INFORMATION 00 3132 Geotechnical Data DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1100 Summary of Work 01 2500 Substitution Procedures Substitution Request Form 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 4115 Design-Build Requirements 01 4200 Definitions and Reference Standards 01 4500 Quality Control 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 017400 Cleaning DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 4500 Precast Architectural Concrete 03 5413 Gypsum Cement Underlayment DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 2200 Concrete Unit Masonry 04 7300 Manufactured Stone Masonry DIVISION 05 METALS 05 5000 Metal Fabrications 05 5210 Aluminum Railings DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry Ca pentry 06 1500 Wood Decking 061600 Sheathing 06 1733 Wood I-Joists 06 1753 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 06 1800 Glued-Laminated Construction 06 2000 Exterior Finish Carpentry 06 4000 Architectural Woodwork i LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Table of Contents: 00 0110 Page 2 DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 1 071300 Sheet Waterproofing 07 1400 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing i. 07 2100 Thermal Insulation 07 2617 Vapor Retarders under Concrete Slabs 07 2800 Air/Water Barriers 07 3113 Asphalt Shingles I 07 4113 Metal Roof Panels 07 4623 Wood Siding 07 4646 Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding I 07 6000 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 6500 Flexible Flashing 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping 07 8443 Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping 07 9200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 5 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 1400 Wood Doors 08 1613 Fiberglass Doors I 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels 08 3613 Sectional Doors 08 5313 Vinyl Windows 08 7100 Door Hardware 1 08 8000 Glazing 08 8300 Mirrors 08 9000 Louvers and Vents IDIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 2900 Gypsum Board 111 09 3000 Tiling 09 6500 Resilient Flooring 09 6800 Carpeting I , 09 8110 Acoustic Insulation and Sealant 09 9000 Painting 09 9625 Non-Sacrificial Anti-graffiti Coatings 1 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 111 10 2113 Metal Toilet Compartments 10 2117 Plastic Tub and Shower Enclosures 10 2813 Toilet Accessories 10 3100 Manufactured Fireplaces 11 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties 10 5500 Postal Specialties I DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 3100 Residential Appliances I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Table of Contents: 00 0110 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 1 12 2400 Window Shades 12 3530 Residential Casework 12 9313 Bicycle Racks 1 DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION—Design-Build IDIVISION 22 PLUMBING—Design-Build DIVISION 23 HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)—Design-Build 1, DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL—Design-Build DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS—Design-Build IDIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY—Design-Build IDIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 4613 Foundation Drainage iEND OF TABLE OF CONTENTS I I Ili I I I } I I ILRS Architects, Inc. I 1,. , Tigard Apartments Geotechnical Data: 00 3132 IIDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 1.1GEOTECHNICAL DATA IA. A copy of a geotechnical report,with respect to the building site is included herewith and is titled as follows: I "Geotechnical Report, SW Hawk's Beard Apartments, SW Scholls Ferry Road and SW 135th Avenue,Tigard, Oregon"dated March 13, 2015, and prepared by Terra Associates, Inc., 12525 Willows Road NE, Suite 101, Kirkland,Washington 98034. 11 B. This reports identifies properties of below grade conditions and recommendations for the design of foundation systems, but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. IC. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents. This document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. ID. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and I construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum accruing to the Owner. ItEND OF DOCUMENT I I 1' I I I I 1 ,_I LRS Architects, Inc. I s .. . ::,,i,'-',,. It, r GEOTECHNICAL REPORT SW Hawk's B ar e d Apartments SW Scholls Ferry Road and SW 135th Avenue Tigard, Oregon ,,,,,;-: H,z. .,,,,.1„, , , Project No, T-7184 ° 111 i Terra Associates, Inc. � H MM 1::: Prepared for:: Holland Development Vancouver, Washington w 13 2015 March ry I 4.3 Consultants in biotechnical En;irseeri� g.,Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences March 13,2015. 1 Project No.T-7184 1 Mr.Brenner Daniels Holland Development 1111 Main Street,Suite 700 Vancouver,Washington 98660 1 Subject: Geotechnical Report SW Hawk's°Beard Apartments SW Scholls Ferry,Road and SW 135th Avenue Tigard,Oregon Dear Mr.Daniels: As requested,we conducted a geotechnical engineering study for the subject project. The attached report presents our findings and recommendationsfor the geotechnical aspects of project design and construction. Our field exploration indicates thesite is underlain primarily by medium dense silt deposits. We observed localized,light groundwater seepage at"a depth of about 7.5 feet in one of the 12 test pits. In our opinion,there are no geotechnical conditions that would preclude thelanned development.prnent. Structures can be supported by conventional spread footings bearing on competentnative soils underlying the surface organic soils or on structural fill placed on the competent native soils. Floor slabs and pavements can be similarly supported. The native silt soils are very sensitive to moisture and will require careful control of moisture during construction to facilitate adequate compaction, and measures to protect finished subgrades from disturbance during periods of wet weather. Detailed recommendations,addressing these issues and other geotechnical design considerations are presented in the attached report. We trust the information presented is sufficient for your current needs. If you have any questions or require additional information,Please call ii Sincerely yours; TERRA ASSOCIATES,INC. .d,Y. Jolui1;:' Profjerk( 1 r 4di" i— j1 Theodo It. " '-? Principe °I);;.11' E S EXPIFIATION Off E: / 1Icr:; 12525 Willows Road NE,Suite 101,Kirkland,Washington 98034 Phone(425)821.7777 . Fax(49ci Pt/1.211/A I I TABLE K0RCONTENTS IPage- Nio' Ii.0 _-'--''-^'.- 2.0 copeo ............. ... ...... ...'... -r_`... + ...-__-'~_-~--�--__--.. . .---1 3.0 Site Conditions ` , 2 3.1 Surface - . . . . - ' . - �2 I 3.2 Sodo _-.+_�_+._,. ' .___~~~,. ^__^ ___ � � 2 33 Groundwater....................... .'.. ........__-___' ......_ ...............-,^._,_`~2 5,4 � I41) and . — ---..--__ - ---_'',-_'---�3 4L1 General . . � ' _ 3 42 Site Preparation and Grading__.__ , ^^ +,___ ' �3 I _.3 ^~ _,~.~~^, . . '' ' .- 5 4.4Foundations__..~..._.-'^._^~--_---_-^-- `^ -^ 5 4.5' Slab-on-Grade Floors --`-°'+°=`-~-`--`'`'',-'~,,+_'_.,,'-'-,.~-j6 I 4j�I��ooJ '----^-~^ - 6� � _' - - _'-_ '_ ~4� ,,'.+,_--.__-'+._+__,=_,_+,,_=^______�+,`____,�` 4.8 Utilities . � �7 4.9Pavozomn�_.~-.^~_^^'—_-----^__------` -r�_'-- 7 I 5.0 Additional Services--'--^-- --`--^--~- ... ^--'=~_-.... ~�....^.... ............. ~8 6.0 Limitations,,.-.-._----_~--.--.--_-~-,'_''~..-_--..-._.'...^^.—...0 II - g Vicinity Map ---^~^'--'^—'^-~'-^-^^^~-^''^^^'-^'+, Figure l , °'_-`�.='-°^ +^._'~+_-~_ -~. . 2 ~r Typical Wall Drainage Detail,-.--.-.-'_---,-^--'''----`-----..---'~-`-- Figure 3 IAppendicesw� Field Exploration and Laboratory Testing....... __-~- ... ,__ ... _..... ._ A � I I I I I I I I Geotechnical Report SW Hawk's Beard Apartments SW Scholls Ferry Road and SW 135th Avenue Tigard, Oregon 1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION The proposed project is a residential development. Site development and building plans are currently unavailable; however, it is our understanding that the buildings will be three-story, wood-frame structures with their main floors constructed at grade. Associated site improvements will include site utilities and paved access and parking areas. The recommendations contained in the following sections of this report are based on our understanding of the above design features. We should review design drawings as they become available to verify that our recounnendations have been properly interpreted and incorporated into project design and to amend or supplement our recommendations,if required. 2.0 SCOPE OF WORK We explored subsurface conditions at the site by observing soil conditions in 12 test pits excavated to maximum depths ranging from about 9 to 10 feet below existing surface grades using a track-mounted excavator. Using the results of our field study and laboratory testing, analyses were undertaken to develop geotechnical recommendations for project design and construction. Specifically,this report addresses the following: • Soil and groundwater conditions • Seismic design parameters per the current International Building Code(IBC) 1111 • Site preparation and grading • Excavations • Foundations • Lateral earth pressures for design of below-grade walls 111 • Slab-on-grade floors • Subsurface drainage • Utilities • Pavements It should be noted that recommendations outlined in this report regarding drainage are associated with soil strength, design earth pressures, erosion,and stability. Design and perfomiance issues with respect to moisture as it relates to the structure environment (i.e., humidity, mildew, mold) is beyond Terra Associates' purview. A building envelope specialist or contactor should be consulted to address these issues,as needed. I I March 13,2015 Project No.T-7184 11 3.0 SITE CONDITIONS 3.1 Surface Ill The site is an approximately 10.5-acre parcel located southeast of and adjacent to the:.intersection of SW Schc?lls Ferry Road and SW 135th Avenue in Tigard,Oregon. The approximate location of the site is shown on Figure 1. Site topography is relatively flat with a gentle grade down to the south and west. Site vegetation consists primarily of mature deciduous trees with grass and brush undergrowth. The trees at the site are planted in a grid Ipattern approximately ten feet on center. Two localized areas m the northeastern portion of the site have not been planted with trees and are vegetated only with grasses and brush. 3.2 Soils The soils observed in our test pits generally consist of about one inch of sod or forest duff and topsoil overlying Inative,brown,silt to silt with sand that is interpreted to be Pleistocene catastrophic flood deposits. The native silt deposits are generally medium dense, moist, and mottled in the upper seven feet, and become medium dense to dense and moist with localized wet zones below that depth. IThe Generalized geologic map of the Willamette lowland by M,W. Gannett and R.R. Caldwell(1998). shows the site soils consisting of alluvium and glacial-outburst flood sediments (Qs). The silt deposits observed in the test Ipits are generally consistent with glacial-outburst flood deposits. Detailed descriptions of the subsurface conditions observed in our site explorations are presented on the Test Pit Logs in Appendix A. The approximate test pit locations are shown on Figure 2. 3.3 Groundwater IWe observed light groundwater seepage approximately 7,5 feet below the ground surface in Test Pit TP-1. The seepage appeared temporarily as a stream squirting from,a localized point source on the side of the test pit before dying out after about ten seconds of flow. i3.4 Seismic Design Parameters I Based on the site soil conditions and our knowledge of the area geology,per Chapter 16 of the 2012 International Building Code(IBC), site class "D should be used in structural design. Based on this site class, in accordance with the 2012 IBC,the following parameters should be used in computing seismic forces: ISeismic Design Parameters(IBC 2012) Spectral response acceleration(Short Period),SMS 1.075 g ISpectral response acceleration(1 Second Period), SA, 0.668 g Five percent damped.2 second period, SDs 0.717 g IFive percent damped 1.0 second period, SD, 0,445 g Values determined using the United States Geological. Survey (USGS) Ground Motion Parameter Calculator accessed on March 9,2015 at the web site http://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmapslus/application.php 111 iPage No.2 March 13 2015 Project No.T-7184 4.0 DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1 General Based on our study, there are no geotechnical conditions that would preclude the planned development. The buildings associated with the project can be supported on conventional spread footings bearing on competent native soils underlying the surficial organic soils or on structural fill placed on a competent native soil subgrade. Floor slabs and pavements can be similarly supported. The site soils consist predominantly of silt and will require careful control of the soil moisture content to adequately compact as structural fill. As such,the ability to use soils from site excavationsas structural fill will depend on the natural soil moisture content,the prevailing weather conditions at the time of construction,and the ability of the contractor to properly moisture condition the soil. During the normally dry summer months, the 1 contractor should be prepared to dry soils that are wet of optimum by aeration. Alternatively, stabilizing the moisture in the native soil with cement or lime can be considered. Moisture conditioning of soils that are dry of optimum would require the addition of water to the soils and thoroughly blending the material prior to compaction. If grading activities will take place during the winter season, the contractor should be prepared to import clean granular material for use as structural fill and backfill. Undisturbed bearing surfaces composed of native soil or structural fill derived from the fine-grained native soils would provide suitable support for conventional spread footing foundations, floor slabs,and pavements; however, , the soils will be easily disturbed by normal construction activity,particularly when wet. if disturbed,the soil will not be suitable for support, and the affected material would need to be removed with the foundations lowered to obtain support on an undisturbed soil subgrade. Alternatively,the soils can be removed and grade restored with structural fill. To reduce the potential for subgrade disturbance, particularly during wet weather, conid:eratioi should be given to placing a six-inch layer of one- to two-inch sized crushed rock or a four-inch;layer of lean concrete on completed subgrades to serve as a working surface. Detailed recommendations regarding these issues and other geotechnical design considerations are provided in the following sections of this report. These recommendations should be incorporated into the final design drawings and construction specifications. 4.2 Site Preparation and Grading I To prepare the site for construction,all vegetation,organic surface soils,and other deleterious materials should be stripped and removed from the site. We expect surface stripping depths of about two to three inches will be required to remove the organic suurticial soils. Stripped vegetation debris should be removed from the site. Organic soils will not be suitable for use as structural fill, but may be used for limited depths in nonstructural areas or for landscaping purposes. I I Page No. 3 1 March 13, 2015 Project No.T-7184 111 Once clearing and stripping operations are complete, cut and fill operations can be initiated to establish desired grades. Prior to placing fill, all exposed bearing surfaces should be observed by a representative of Terra Associates to verify soil conditions are as expected and suitable for support of new fill. Our representative may request a proofroll using heavy rubber-tired equipment to determine if any isolated soft and yielding areas are present. If excessively yielding areas are observed, and they cannot be stabilized in place by compaction, the affected soils should be excavated and removed to firm bearing and grade restored with new structural fill. Beneath embankment fills and pavement subgrades, if the depth of excavation to remove unstable soils is 111 excessive, we recommend placing a geotextile fabric such as Mirafi 500X, or equivalent, beneath the fill. Our experience has shown that, in general, a minimum of 18 inches of a clean, granular structural fill placed and compacted over the geotextile fabric should establish a stable bearing surface. Our study indicates that the native soils consist predominantly of silt and will be difficult to compact as structural fill when too wet or too dry. Accordingly,the ability to use these native soils from,site excavations as structural Ifill will depend on their moisture content and the prevailing weather conditions when site grading activities take place. Native soils that are too wet to properly compact could be dried by aeration during dry weather conditions or mixed with an additive such as lime or Portland cement to reduce and stabilize the soil's moisture content. If soil amendment products are used,additional Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (i'F.SC)BMPs will need to be implemented to mitigate potential impacts to stormwater runoff associated with possible elevated pH levels. If grading activities are planned during the wet winter months,or if they extend into fall and winter, the owner should be prepared to import wet weather structural fill. For this purpose, we recommend importing a granular soil that meets the following grading requirements: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing 6 inches 100 No. 4 75 maximum No.200 5 maximum* *Based on the 3/4-inch fraction. Prior to use,Terra Associates,Inc. should examine and test all materials planned to be imported to the site for use as structural fill. Structural fill should be placed in uniform loose layers not exceeding 12 inches and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of thesoil's maximum dry density, as determined by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)Test Designation D-698 (Standard Proctor). The moisture content of the soil at the time of'compaction should be within two percent of its optimum, as determined by this ASTM standard. In nonstructural areas, the degree of compaction can be reduced to 90 percent. 1 I Page No.4 March 13,2015111 Project No.T-7184 4.3 Excavations 1 All excavations at the site associated with confined spaces, such as lower building level retaining walls, must be completed in accordance with local, state, and federal requirements. Based on regulations outlined by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the site soils would be classified as Type C soils. Accordingly, temporary excavation slopes in Type C soils should be graded to an inclination of 1.5:1 (Horizontal:Vertical) or flatter. All exposed slope faces should be covered with a durable reinforced plastic membrane during construction to prevent slope raveling and rutting during periods of precipitation. Properly designed and installed shoring trench boxes can be used tosupport utility trench excavations where required. Based on our field observations, groundwater seepage may be encountered in excavations extending below a. depth of approximately seven feet, especially during the winter and spring months. We expect that the volume of water and rate of flow of any seepage into site excavations will be relatively minor and would not be expected to adversely impact the stability of the excavation when completed,, as described above, We anticipate that conventional sump pumping procedures along with a system of collection trenches should be capable of maintaining a relatively dry excavation for construction purposes. This information is provided solely for the benefit of the owner and other design consultants, and should not be construed to implythat Terra Associates, Inc. assumes responsibility for job site safety. It is understood that job site safetyis the sole responsibility of the project contractor. 4.4 Foundations Structures may be supported on conventional spread footing foundations bearing on competent native soils or on $' structural fills placed above these native soils. Foundation subgrades should be prepared, as recommended in Section 4.2 of this report. Perimeter foundations exposed to the weather should bear at a minimum depth of 1.5 feet below final exterior grades for frost protection. Interior foundations can be constructed at any convenient depth below the floor slab. We recommend designing.foundations for a net allowable bearing capacity of 2,500 pounds per square foot(psf). For short term loads, such as wind and seismic, a one-third increase in this allowable capacity can be used in design. With.',the anticipated loads and this bearing stress applied, building settlements should be less than one inch total and one-half inch differential. For designing foundations to resist lateral loads, a base friction coefficient of .3 can be used. Passive earth pressure acting on the sides of the footings may also be considered. We recommend calculating this lateral resistance using an equivalent fluid weight of 300 pounds per cubic foot(pcf). We recommend not including the upper 12 inches of soil in this computation because they can be affected by weather or disturbed by future grading activity. This value assumes the foundations will be constructed neat against competent native soil or the excavations are backfilled with structural fill, as described in Section 4.2 of this report. The recommended passive and friction values include a safety factor of 1.5. Page No.5 I Mach 13,2015 Project No.T-7184 I4.5 Slab-on-Grade Floors Slab-on-grade floors may be supported on a subgrade prepared as recommended in Section 4.2 of this report. 111 Immediately below the floor slab, we recommend placing a four-inch thick capillary break layer composed of clean, coarse sand or fine gravel that has less than three percent passing the No. 200 sieve. This material will reduce the potential for upward capillary movement of water through theunderlying soil and subsequent wetting I of the floor slab. The capillary break layer will not prevent moisture intrusion through the slab caused by water vapor transmission. I Where moisture by vapor transmission is undesirable,such as covered floor areas, a common practice is to place a durable plastic membrane on the capillary break layer and then cover the membrane with a layer of clean sand or fine gravel to protect it from damage during construction, and aid in uniform curing of the concrete slab. It I should be noted that if the sand or gravel layer overlying the membrane is saturated prior to pouring the slab, it will be ineffective in assisting uniform curing of the slab and can actually serve as a water supply for moisture I seeping through the slab and affecting floor coverings. Therefore, in our opinion, covering the membrane with a layer of sand or wave] should be avoided if floor slab construction occurs during the wet winter months and the layer cannot be effectively drained. 1 4.6 Lateral Earth Pressures for Below-Grade Walls The magnitude of earth pressures developing on below-grade walls will depend on the quality and compaction of I the wall backfill. We recommend placing and compacting wall backfill as structural fill,as described in Section 4.2 of this report. To prevent overstressing the walls during backfilling,heavy construction machinery should not be operated within five feet of the wall. Wall backfill in this zone should be compacted with hand-operated Iequipment. To prevent hydrostatic pressure development, wall drainage must also be installed. A typical wall drainage detail,is shown on Figure 3. IWith wall backfill placed and compacted as recommended, and drainage properly installed, we recommend designing unrestrained walls for an active earth pressure equivalent to a fluid weighing 35 pounds per cubic foot I (pcf). For restrained walls, an additional uniform load of 100 psf should be added to the 35 pe£To account for typical traffic surcharge loading, the walls can be designed for an additional imaginary height of two feet (two- - foot soil surcharge), For evaluation of wall performance under seismic loading, a uniform pressure equivalent toI 8H psf, where H is the height of the below-grade portion of the wall should be applied in addition to the static lateral earth pressure. These values assume a horizontal backfill condition and that no other surcharge loading, sloping embankments, or adjacent buildings will act on the wall. If such conditions exist, then the imposed loading must be included in the wall design. Friction at the base of foundations and passive earth pressure will I provide resistance to these lateral loads. Values for these parameters are provided in Section 4.4 of this report. 4,7 Drainage I Sur ace f Final exterior grades should promote free and positive drainage away from the building areas. We recommend providing a positive drainage gradient away from the building perimeter. If a positive ;gradient cannot be provided provisions for collection and disposal of surface water adjacent to the structure should be made. 11 Page No. 6 I March 13,2015 Project No.T-7184 Surface water from developed areas must not be allowed to flow in an uncontrolled and concentrated manner over the crests of site slopes and embankments. Surface water should be directed away from the slope crests to a point of collection and controlled discharge. If site grades do not allow for directing surface water away from the slopes,then the water should be collected and tightlined to an approved point of controlled discharge. Subsurface We recommend installing a continuous drain along the outside lower edge of the perimeter building foundations. The drains can be laid to grade at an invert elevation equivalent to the bottom of footing grade. The drains can consist of four-inch diameter perforated PVC pipe that is enveloped in washed 1/2-to 3.4-inch gravel-sized drainage aggregate. The aggregate should extend six inches above and to the sides of the pipe. The foundation drains and roof downspouts should be tightlined separately to an approved point of controlled discharge. All drains should be provided with cleanouts at easily accessible locations. These cleanouts should be serviced at least once each year. 4.8 Utilities Utility pipes should be bedded and backfilled in accordance with American Public Works Association(APWA) or 111 local jurisdictional requirements. At minimum, trench backfill should be placed and compacted as structural fill, as described in Section 4.2 of this report. As noted,the native soils are moisture sensitive and will require careful control of moisture to facilitate proper compaction. If utility construction takes place during the winter or if it is not feasible to properly moisture condition the excavated soil at the time of construction, it may be necessary to import suitable wet weather fill for utility trench backfilling. 4.9 Pavements Pavement subgrades should be prepared as described in the Section 4.2 of this report. Regardless of the degree of relative compaction achieved,the subgrade must be firm and relatively unyielding before paving. The subgrade should be proofrolled with heavy rubber-tire construction equipment such as a loaded 10-yard dump truck to verify this condition. The pavement design section is dependent upon the supporting capability of the subgrade soils and the traffic conditions to which it will be subjected. For traffic consisting mainly of light passenger vehicles with only occasional heavy traffic, and with a stable subgrade prepared as recommended, we recommend the following pavement sections: • Two inches of hot mix asphalt concrete(1-11VIAC)over six inches of aggregate base(AB) • Four inches full depth HIVIAC over prepared subgrade The paving materials used should conform to the current Oregon Department of Transportation (ODOT) specifications for HMAC and AB. Page No. 7 I I March 13,2015 Project No.T-7184 I Long-term pavement performance will depend on surface drainage. A poorly-drained pavement section will be subject to premature failure as a result of surface water infiltrating into the subgrade soils and reducing their I supporting capability. For optimum pavement performance,we recommend surface drainage gradients of at least two percent. Some degree of longitudinal and transverse cracking of the pavement surface should be expected over time. Regular maintenance should be planned to seal cracks when they occur. I 5.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES IITerra Associates, Inc. should review the final designs and specifications in order to verify that earthwork and foundation recommendations have been properly interpreted and implemented in project design. We should also I provide geotechnical services during construction in order to observe compliance with our design concepts, specifications, and recommendations. This will allow for design changes if subsurface conditions differ from those anticipated prior to the start of construction. I 6.0 LIMITATIONS IIWe prepared this report in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. This report is the copyrighted property of Terra Associates, Inc. and is intended, for specific application to the SW Hawk's I Beard Apartments project in Tigard, Oregon. This report is for the exclusive use of Holland Development and their authorized representatives. No other warranty,expressed or implied, is made. g The analyses and recommendations presented in this report are based on data obtained from our on-site test pits. Variations in soil conditions can occur,the nature and extent of which may not become evident until construction. If variations appear evident,Terra Associates,Inc. should be requested to reevaluate the recommendations in this 111 report prior to proceeding with construction. I I I I I I liPage No. 8 I I n IAPPENDIX A FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING ISW Hawk's Beard Apartments Tigard,Oregon IOn March 3, 2015, we investigated subsurface conditions at the site by excavating 12 test pits to depths ranging from about 9 to 10 feet below existing surface grades using a track-mounted excavator. The test pit locations are shown on Figure 2. The test pit locations were approximately determined in the field by measuring and pacing from existing surface features, The Test Pit Logs are presented on Figures A-2 through A-13. An engineering geologist from our office maintained a log of each test pit as it was excavated, classified the soil Iconditions encountered, and obtained representative soil samples. All soil samples were visually classified in the field in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System. A copy of this classification is presented as IFigure A-1. Representative soil samples obtained from the test pits were placed in sealed plastic bags and taken to our I laboratory for further examination and testing. The moisture content of each sample was measured and is reported on the Test Pit Logs. Grain size analysis was performed on one of the soil samples. The test results are shown on Figure A-14. I I I I I I I I I Project No.T-7184 I MAJOR DIVISIONS LEI i tR TYPICAL DESCRIPTION111 SYMBOL _ Clean Gvv. Well-graded gravels,gravel-sand mixtures,lithe or no fines. Gravels(less GRAVELS than 5% w w More than 50% fines) GP Poorly-graded gravels;gravel-sand mixtures,little or no fines. 4 rt ,f,eiof coarse fraction to �, N is larger than No. GM. Silty:gravels,gravel-sand-silt mixtures,non-plastic fines. c, .5 5 4 sieve Gravels with zo�, fines .,,_ 1= GC Clayey gravels,gravel-sand-clay mixtures,plastic fines. II0 FS d Clean Sands SW Well-graded sands,sands with gravel,little or no fines, y Z SANDS (less than _cMore than 50% 5%fines); SP Poorly-graded sands,sands with gravel,little or no fines. v a — of coarse fraction 2 is smaller than SM Silty sands,sand-silt mixtures,non-plastic fines. No.4 sieve Sands with fines SC Clayey sands,sand-clay mixtures,plastic fines. I 'di ML Inorganic silts,rock flour,clayey silts with slight plasticity. Ce • Em g SILTS AND CLAYS Liquid Limit is less than 50% CL Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity.(Lean clay) • i o p 'to OL Organic silts and organic clays of low plasticity. ty E o 0 Q N MH Inorganic silts,elastic., ce LI cZ SILTS AND CLAYS is- ii 2 Liquid Limit is greater than 50% CH Inorganic clays of high plasticity.(Fat clay) m r ti • 111 - o OH Organic clays of high plasticity.. HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS PT Peat. I DEFINITION OF TERMS AND SYMBOLS co Standard Penetration 2"OUTSIDE DIAMETER SPILT SPOON SAMPLER ill Density Resistance in Blows/Foot Z T 2A"INSIDE DIAMETER RING SAMPLER OR 1 p Very Loose 0-4 SHELBY TUBE SAMPLER w Loose 4-10 Medium Dense 10-30 y WATER LEVEL(Date) ' vDense 30-50 Very Dense >50 Tr TORVANE READINGS,tsf Standard Penetration Pp PENETROMETER READING,tsf Consistency Resistance in Blows/Foot Lu DD DRY DENSITY,pounds per cubic foot w Very Soft 0-2 2 Soft 2-4 LL LIQUID LIMIT,percent O Medium Stiff 4-8 i V' Stiff 8-16 PI PLASTIC INDEX Very Stiff 16-32 Hard -• >32 N STANDARD PENETRATION,blows per foot t - :: Terra UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Isc VN,t Associ teS Inc SW HAWIIGA'S BEARD D OREGON APARTMENTS I Consultants in Geotechnical engineering Geology and Pro No.T-7184 Date MAR 2015 A-1 Environmental Earth Sciences I• FigureI 1 I LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 1 'FIGURE A-2 IPROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO: T-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS , LOCATION: Tgard,Oregon SURFACE CONDS:;Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A IDATE LOGGED: March 3.2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: 7.5 Feet DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A u. ci ! �. F2 I DESCRIPTION CQNSISTEIdCY! e q REMARKS y RELATIVE DENSITY t.: o N y v o 1 (9-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) a. Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 11 nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) 24.2 2- 3— Medium Dense 4- l 1 5- I ! 36,8 I . 7 I 8— Brown SILT with sand,moist(locally wet),low plasticity to nonplastic,scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace MediumDense of fine roots and root casts. (ML) to Dense 9— III 10- Test pit terminated at 10 feet. I Light temporary groundwater seepage from localized point 11 source at 7.5 feet. t2- 13— I 14- 15— -1,q:, �.u. Terra Associates,; Inc. NOTE This subsurface information pertains only to this lest pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being Indicative of other locations at the site: Geology and Environmental.Earth Sciences I 111 LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 2 FIGURE A-3 PROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO: T-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS LOCATION: Tigard.Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A DATE LOGGED: March 3,2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A a u. w CONSISTENCY/ x DESCRIPTION a REMARKS a RELATIVE DENSITY �- F fl y S (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,tow plasticity to 1 nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) 2 3 Medium Dense 4 1 5 6 1 7 8 Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic, scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense and root casts. (ML) to Dense 9 14 i Test pit terminated at 10 feet. No groundwater seepage. 11 12 1 13 14 15 , Terra Associates, Inc. NOTE: This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site, Geology and 111 Environmental Earth Sciences a LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 3 FIGURE A-4: PROJECT NAME SW Hawk's Beast Apartments PROJ.NO: T-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS LOCATION: Tigard.Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A DATE LOGGED: March 3,2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A LL_ ci Z _.i x DESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY/ a" a Gi RELATIVE DENSITY REMARKS 1a. {1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 1— nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) 2— I 3— Medium Dense 4— i � $3;8 I 5 { s— l 7— 8 Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic, scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense and root casts. (ML) to Dense 9— 10 e i Test pit terminated at 10 feet. No groundwater seepage: 11- 1 12- 13-- 14- 15 2-13_,15-- j Terra Associates, Inc. NOTE: This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences I • LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 4 FIGURER-5 PROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO: 1-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS I LOCATION: Tigard.Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A DATE LOGGED: March 3,2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: NIA DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A z x DESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY! REMARKS RELATIVE DENSITY t. $ w n N0 (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) a Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 1— nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) 2— I 3— Medium Dense 4 6-- 7 -7 8 Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticitylo nonplastic, I scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense and root casts. (ML) to Dense I 10 Test pit terminated at 10 feet. I No groundwater seepage. 11- 12— 11?— 13- 14- 15.— r Terra Associates, Inc. NOTE: This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences 1 LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 5 FIGURE A-6 IPROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO: T-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS LOCATION: Tigard.Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A IDATE LOGGED: March 3.2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A u: n. a- n. DESCRIPTION CQNSlSTENCYI o c REMARKS RELATIVE DENSITY st Y V : I (1-inch FOREST DUFF) a Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 1— nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) 2- 27,3 I3— Medium Dense 1 4- 5— 111 6— E 1 7 Brown SILT with sand,moist(locally wet),low plasticity to 8: nonplastic,scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace I of fine roots and root casts. ML { ) Medium Dense to Dense 9—1 1t?— Test pit terminated at 10 feet. 11— I No groundwater seepage. III 12— 13--1 I 14- 3 1 15— Terra Associates, Inc. I NOTE This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site_ Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences I LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 6 FIGURE A-7 PROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO: 1-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS LOCATION: Tigard.Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A DATE LOGGED: March 3.2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A z LL m CONSISTENCY/ 4 eel 1 DESCRIPTION a nom.. REMARKS a. ) RELATIVE DENSITY 111 etO coO (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 1— nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) i 2--- 3- Medium Dense 4-- 5- 7- 8— 5-7-8- Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic, scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense and root casts. (ML) to Dense 1D Test pit terminated at 10 feet. 11— No groundwater seepage. 12- 1 13-- 14-- 15— `.;-.',.•; 3-1415 Terra Associates, Inc. NOTE: This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnicaf Engineering not'be interpreted as being indicative of other locations:at the site Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences $ ll LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 7 FIGURE A_5 IIPROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO T-71&4 LOGGED BY: )CS LOCATION: Tigard.Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV:.N/A DATE LOGGED: March 3.2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER:_NIA DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A o rn a ' DESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY! aY i a 1a.— a RELATIVE DENSITY - REMARKS n w x U 1oa. (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 1 nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) I • 2 I 3 Medium Dense 4 11 r I 5 1 6 35.2 I 7— Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic, 111 8— , scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense and root casts. (ML) to Dense f 9— I 10— Test pit tterminated at 9.5 feet. No groundwater seepage. hi 11— i I 12—I 13- I1q— i 1 1 15 Terra Associates, Inc. NOTE This subsurface information pertains only to thistestpit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences I I LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 8 FIGURE A-9 PROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO: T-7184 _ LOGGED BY: JCS I LOCATION: Tigard.Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A DATE LOGGED: March 3,2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A _ DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A 111 12 u. ul z z i g DESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY/ REMARKS RELATIVE DENSITY w < Y V0 a. I (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to I1 nonpiastic,..scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) 2 3 1 Medium Dense 4 I 5=' ti I Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic, scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense I 8 and root casts. (ML) to Dense 9 { Test pit terminated at 9 feet. No groundwater seepage. 10-1 11— 1 12— ' 1 13— I 14— I 15— 1 Ir Terra Associates, Inc. NOTE: This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should- Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering I not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences i . ii LOG OF TEST PIT NO. g FIGURE A-10 IPROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROJ.NO: 'T-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS LOCATION: Tigard,Or-goo SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A IDATE LOGGED: March 3.2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A u. F- Z o- - i•- ^ x -' DESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY/ REMARKS I- g RELATIVE DENSITY n U. 1 a (1 inch SOD and TOPSOIL) a Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) 1 l , 1 2— I3 Medium Dense I 4— l I I I 5 6 3 1 7 8H Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic, � I scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense i and root casts. (ML) to Dense 1 I 9- I 10 1 Test pit terminated at 9.5 feet. ' No groundwaterseepage. 1 i 111 1'#— Terra Associates, Inc. i NOTE This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences I I I LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 10 FIGUREA-11 PROJECT NAME: SW Hawks Beard Apartments PROJ.NO T-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS I LOCATION: Tigard,Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A DATE LOGGED 'March 3,n15 - DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A DEPTH TO CAVING: N/A 111 I z i CONSISTENCY! S a DESCRIPTION a ! a REMARKS RELATIVE DENSITY r U 0 (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) a Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 1— nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots. (ML) I 2 3— 1 Medium Dense 4-- 1 11 V-i 7— Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic; 8— scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense111 and root casts. (ML) to Dense 9— 34:6 III 10— Test pit terminated at 9.5 feet. No groundwater seepage, 11 1 12— i 13— 1 14— 15— # Terra Associates, Inc. :.. NOTE This subsurface information pertains arsiy to this test pit location and should Consultants In Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being IndicatiWe of ether locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences I LOG OF TEST PIT NO. VI FIGURE A-12 PROJECT NAME: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments PROD.NO T-7184 LOGGED BY: JCS111 . LOCATION: Tigard,Oregon SURFACE CONDS; Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A IIIDATE LOGGED: March 3,2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: WA DEPTH TO.CAVING: N/A LL 2 VW tiel- a. DESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY/ �— w g i RELATIVE DENSITY 4' REMARKS o v `ti 3 O 1 (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) a. Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to I11 nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of fine roots: (ML) 2— I 3- 31.7 Medium Dense I 4- 5- 1 6_ 1 7 Brown SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to nonplastic, 8— scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots and root casts. (ML) Medium to Dense Dense 9 10— Test pit terminated at 9.5 feet. No groundwater seepage: I 11_, I 12- 13— I 14— i 15 Terra Associates; Inc. I NOTE This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences y I I LOG OF TEST PIT NO. 12 FIGURE A-13 , N-: - LOGGED BY: I PROJECT NAME: SW Hawks Beard Apartments PROJ._ O T 7184 O JCS LOCATION: Tigard,Oregon SURFACE CONDS: Flat APPROX.ELEV: N/A DATE LOGGED: March 3.2015 DEPTH TO GROUNDWATER: N/A DEPTH TO CAVING: LA .�r r. z: x -I ESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY! REMARKS r- A. RELATIVE DENSITY F o 1 (1-inch SOD and TOPSOIL) Brown SILT to SILT with sand,moist,low plasticity to 1 nonplastic,scattered mottling,trace of.fineroots. (ML) I 2 f 3 I Medium Dense 4 5 I 6- 7 I I — Brown SILT with sand,moist,tow plasticity to nonplastic, ( I 8 scattered dark brown stained fractures,trace of fine roots Medium Dense and root casts. (ML) to Dense 0— I 10 Test pit terminated at 9.5 feet., No groundwater seepage. 11 I 12 1 13 * I 14 15-1 a4. = Terra Associates, Inc. NOTE: This subsurface information pertains only to this test pit location and should Consultants in Geotechnical Engineering not be interpreted as being indicative of other locations at the site. Geology and Environmental Earth Sciences I Particle Size Distribution Report c 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - E 0 0 0 EZE 1 I 1 1 1 1 I I , 1 1 I 1 1 1 90 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 '� a 1 ! I ! I t I I 1 I 1 80 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 ,1 1 1 1 1 1 1 170 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 11 1 I I I 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 I i 1 1 1 1 I 1 l 1 1 I 3 I I 1 ! I I 1 1 1 1 I I a sa' I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 I I 1 1' z 1 1 1 1 L �1 1 1 1 - 1 V- ' 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 11 1 I1- 50 1 11 1 I ' 1 1 I 1 I _ 1 W 1 ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 v i I 1 1 1 I ' 1 1 i 1 1 o. 40 1 1 1. 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 ' 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I I i I l I 1 I I till 30 1 1 'I 1 1 1 1 I 1_. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1I '` 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 zo 1 11 .1 1 1 1 1 _ 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 11 1 1 1 1 1 I 1; 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1' 11 1 1 1 10 I 1 11 I 1 1 . I . 1 . 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I; I i 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 1 I "1 1 1 1 ( ! I I 1. 1 ,. 0 1 1` € 1 , 1 1 1 1 j L 1 1 1 1 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 I GRAIN SIZE mm. +3.. %Gravel %Sand ' Fines k Coarse 1 Fine Coarse Medium I Fine ---- Silt Clay I 0 0.0 0.0 00 0.2 ' 6.5 11.4 81.9 1 1 ILL I PL Dga; D8Q D.riO D3(} Q15 D1t) Cc Cis a i 0.1059 Material Description USCS AASHTO o SILT with sand ML I Project No. T-7184 Client: Rolland Development iRemarks: IProject: SW Hawk's Beard Apartments 0 Tested 3-4-15 Io Location:TP-5 Depth: 2' I Terra Associates, inc. IKirkland, WA Figure A-14 ITested By: FQ I Tigard Apartments Summary of Work: 01 1100 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Project Information. 2. Work Covered by Contract Documents. 3• Work of Other Contracts. I 4. Owner furnished products installed by Contractor. 5. Use of premises. 6. Specification formats and conventions. I1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification:Tigard Apartments. 1 1. Project Location: 135th and Scholls Ferry,Tigard, Oregon. B. Owner: Keller Holland Tigard Investors, LLC, 1111 Main Street, Suite 500, Vancouver, IWashington 98660. G. Architect: LRS Architects, Inc., 720 NW Davis, Suite 300, Portland, Oregon 97209. I 1. Contract Documents prepared for the Project by LRS Architects, Inc. are dated December 11, 2015. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of the Contract includes new construction as indicated in the Drawings and as specified in this Project Manual, including Modifications incorporated into the Contract Documents. I 1. Project consists of a Type V-A construction,wood framed, 3-story Apartment Building and Clubhouse, R-2,A and B occupancies, with fire sprinklers. IB. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS IA. Concurrent Work: i.� 1. Owner has or will award separate contract(s)for the following construction operations Sat Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract: a. Signage. Ib. Swimming pool. 2. Products furnished by Owner and installed by Owner are identified as OFOI (Owner Furnished, Owner Installed). I 3. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under other contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work of this Contract. 4. Provide access to site and coordinate work according to the General Conditions of Ithe Contract. B. If Work of other contractors in any way interferes with the Contractor's Work, notify party sufficiently in advance to give reasonable time to make necessary adjustments. . I LRS Architects, Inc. {. I Summary of Work:01 1100 Tigard Apartments Page 2 December 11, 2015 C. If the Contractor's Work in any way interferes with the work of other contractors, notify other workOother arrrangements to accommodate other contractors work as agreedossible and modify schedule to accommodate the other to party's and to by , or make Owner. D. Contractor recognizes that Owner is entitled, under the Contract Documents,to perform Work on site during the course of Contractor's performance,whether by Owner's forces, consultants, or separate contractors. 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 1 A. Products furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor are identified as OFCI (Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed),and include the following: I 1. Equipment, identified as OFCI. B. Work of this Contract includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment, and II mechanical and electrical connections. C. Owner Responsibilities: 1. To arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor. 2. To arrange and pay for delivery of Owner furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. To inspect delivered products for damage and arrange for replacement of Owner furnished items found to be damaged, defective, or missing. 4. To arrange for manufacturer's field services and delivery of manufacturer's warranty to Contractor. 5. To furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery dates for OFCI products. D. Contractor Responsibilities: I 1. To designate delivery dates of OFCI products in the Contractor's Construction Schedule, using Owner furnished earliest possible delivery dates for OFCI products. 2. To review shop drawings, product data, and samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or problems anticipated in use of product. 3. To be responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner furnished items at the site. I 4. To be responsible for protecting Owner furnished items from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements,and to repair or replace items damaged as result of Contractor's operations. 5. To install and otherwise incorporate Owner furnished items into the Work. I 1.6 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site,during construction period. 1. Contractor's use premises for construction operations is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other Contractors on portions of Project. B. Maintain clear access to project at all times for emergency vehicles, delivery of materials, and Owner and Owner's employees access. C. Contractor shall make arrangements with city and county agencies for use of public property for construction purposes and pay all fees required for such use. LRS Architects, Inc. i I Tigard Apartments Summary of Work: 01 1100 December 11, 2015 Page 3 D. Contractor is responsible for necessary cleaning and repair of adjacent streets resulting from Contractor's operations. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50 Division format and The Construction Specifications Institute's(CSI)"MasterFormat"2004 Edition numbering system. 1. Division 01 -General Requirements:Sections in this Division govern the execution of Work of all Specifications Sections. B. Specification Content:The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms,words, and phrases when used in particular situations, as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: a. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is I b. abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. c. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. d. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words as singular, where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. a. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be preformed by Contractor. b. Subjective or indicative language may be used for clarity to describe I responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. c. The words"shall,""shall be,"or"shall comply with,"depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) I END OF SECTION I 1 I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Substitution Procedures: 01 2500 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 111 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedures for the following: 1. Contractor's responsibilities concerning substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Contractor proposals for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents made during bidding and after award of Contract are considered to be requests for substitution. 1. The following are not considered to be requests for substitution: a. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by Owner or Architect. b. Contractor's determination of and compliance with regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor's responsibilities for substitution requests made after award of Contract are as follows: 1. Investigate proposed products and determine they are equal or superior in all respects to products specified. 2. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified. 3. Make changes in, and coordinate,the Work as may be required to incorporate and install accepted substitutions. I1.4 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES • A. Acceptability of different materials or products shall be determined by methods set forth in this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION I I I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I 11111 Advancement of Construction Technology SUBSTITUTION REQUEST LRS Architects, Inc. TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description IPROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description,specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of request including identifying applicable data portions. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents and proposed substitution required for its proper installation. Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct: I 1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty I4. requirements. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution. Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution. Submitted by: Name(printed or typed) General Contractorifafter ( award of Contract) Signature For use by LRS Firm Name Approved Approved as Noted Not Approved Received Too Late I Address By City, State, Zip Date Remarks Date Telephone Fax 2007 Edition If After Award of Contract: Reason for Substitution Request: List of Attachments: 1 Tigard Apartments Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and Iprocessing the following Contract modifications: 1. Requests for Interpretation. 2. Architect's Supplemental Instructions. I B. Related Documents and Sections: I 1. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures,for administrative procedures for handling request for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.2 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES IA. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner and Contractor to identify each person who is responsible for executing Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. - I1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Request for Interpretation (RFI): I 1. Written request submitted by Contractor to Architect on standard form requesting interpretation of Contract documents. 2. An RFI shall only be used as a vehicle for confirming or verifying an issue through an I interpretation of the Contract Documents; responses that result in change to Contract Documents and adjustment to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time must be documented in a Change Order. IB. Architect's Supplemental Instructions(ASI): 1. Architect's written order of instruction to Contractor, signed by Architect, that authorizes minor changes in Work. 1.4 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI): A. Submit RFIs numbered in sequential order, reviewed by Contractor with respect to IConstruction Documents,with the following information: . 1. Project name and address. 2. Architects name. 3. Contractors name. 4. Date of RFI. 5. Drawing and/or Specification reference. I 6. Signature of Contractor's reviewer. 7. Indicate"URGENT"on RFIs that may cause impact to the project schedule. B. Architect will receive RFIs only from the Contractor;Architect will not accept RFIs directly from Isubcontractors, suppliers, or other entities. C. Architect will receive only legible, properly prepared RFIs. I 1. Unreadable facsimile machine RFIs, illegibly written RFIs, or RFIs with incomplete information, will be returned promptly without action. I ILRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 December 11, 2015 Page 2 2. RFIs may be transmitted to Architect by facsimile machine. a. Architect will return response by same method received from Contractor. 5 3. Architect will review RFIs with respect to Contract Documents and return response within 7 calendar days. a. RFIs marked"URGENT"will take precedence, in order received, over outstanding RFIs and be answered by Architect as soon as possible. D. Contractor, in being fully familiar with Construction Documents,shall not be relieved of responsibility to coordinate the Work to prevent adverse impact to Project schedule when submitting RFIs to Architect for interpretation of Contract Documents. 1.5 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS (ASI) A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions may include supplementary or revised Drawings and/or Specifications to describe minor changes to Contract Documents. . B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions will be executed on form designated by Contractor. END OF SECTION I I 1 I 1 1 I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Payment Procedures: 01 2900 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL i1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and Iprocess Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 2600: Contract Modification Procedures,for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT IA. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. IB. Payment Application Times:The date for each progress payment date is as agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in that Agreement. IC. Payment Application Forms: Use payment application forms designated by Owner. D. Application Preparation: Complete every item of form. Notarize and execute by a person I authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor.Architect will return incomplete applications without action. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) IPART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) IEND OF SECTION I I I I I I . I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL i1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on IProject including, but not limited to,the following: 1. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. I 3. Project meetings. 4. Construction schedule. 5. Submittal schedule. 6. Field Engineering. I B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01 6000: Product Requirements,for coordinating selection of products. 3.' Section 01 7400: Cleaning,for coordinating progress and final cleaning. I1.2 GENERAL PROJECT COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Specification Sections to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.Coordinate construction operations, I included in different Sections,which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best results where I installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure I 3. maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service,and repair. Coordinate storage or staging areas for all trades. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved,outlining special I procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate Contractors if coordination of Itheir Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: I1. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities, activities of the Owner,and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative Iactivities include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Preparation of Contractor's construction Schedule. b. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. c. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. d. Delivery and processing of submittals. e. Progress meetings. f. Preinstallation conferences. I g. Startup and adjustment of systems. h. Project closeout activities. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 I December 11,2015 Page 2 D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy,water,and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into,the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. E. Coordination of Key Personnel:Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in I, attendance at Project site. 1. Identify individuals,their duties and responsibilities. 2. List addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. 3. Post copies of list in Project meeting room,and temporary field office. Keep list current at all times. I 1.3 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, III where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project specific information,drawn accurately to scale. Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing coordination drawings under provisions stated in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components for architectural, structural, civil, mechanical,and electrical systems. b. Indicated required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on Contract Documents and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 3. Informational Submittal:Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm work is being coordinated, but not for details of coordination. If the Architect determines that coordination drawings are not prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or otherwise deficient, Contractor shall change as directed and resubmit. 4. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepared as required in 01 3300"Submittal Procedures" for Informational Submittals. 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS I A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. I 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute agenda to all invited attendees. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Project Management and Coordination:01 3100 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions,and agreements achieved. Distribute I meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 72 hours after each meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: 1 1. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but not later than 15 days after execution of Agreement. Ia. Hold conference at Project site or other location agreeable to Owner and Architect. Ib. Conduct meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees:Authorized representatives of Owner,Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;suppliers; and other I 3. concerned parties deemed necessary. All participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. . 4. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the Ifollowing: a. Tentative construction schedule. I 1) Format. 2) Phasing. 3) Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. I b. Designation of key personnel and their duties. c. Routing of correspondence. d. Distribution of Contract Documents. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. I f. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs). g. Submittal procedures and mock ups. h. Procedures for testing and inspection. Ii. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Procedures for design build work. k. Procedures for substitutions. I. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. I m. Use of premises and Owner's Utilities. n. Work restrictions. o. Site access,traffic, and parking availability and rules. I p. Office,work, and storage areas. q. Security. r. Progress cleaning. s. Construction waste management and recycling. It. Closeout Procedures. 5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes. IC. Preinstallation Conferences: 1. Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. I 2. Attendees: Contractor and its superintendent, installer and representatives of manufacturer's and fabricator's involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or 1 will follow. Include code enforcement personnel if required by local codes. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 I December 11, 2015 Page 4 3. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 4. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Related Change Orders. c. Related Requests for Interpretation (RFI's). d. Submittals. e. Review of mockups. f. Possible conflicts or compatibility problems. g. Time schedules. h. Weather limitations. i. Manufacturer's written recommendations. j. Warranty requirements. k. Acceptability of substrates. I. Temporary Facilities and Controls. . m. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. n. Testing and inspecting requirements. o. Installation procedures. p. Coordination with other work. p. Required performance results. r. Protection of adjacent work. 5. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, disagreements, disagreements, and required corrective measures and actions. III 6. Do not proceed with installation if conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene conference at earliest feasible date. 7. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties who should have been present. D. Progress Meetings: I 1. Conduct progress meetings at Project site at regular scheduled intervals. a. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of payment request I 2. Attendees:Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of immediate future activities. a. Participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that affect progress, including topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review schedule for next period. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 5 c. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the Ifollowing: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. I 3) Status of submittals. 4) Progress cleaning. 5) Quality and Work standards. 6). Status of correction of deficient items. 7) Field observations. 8) Requests for interpretation (RFIs) status. 9) Status of Proposal Requests. 10) Status of Change Orders. 11) Project administration issues. 4. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes to Owner and I Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities concerned with current progress. 5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue Irevised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE I A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive,fully developed, horizontal bar-chart type Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days after date established for commencement of Work. I B. Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first working day of each week with a continuous vertical line. I 1. Include start-up,finish, duration, slack time, approval dates, material ordering, delivery dates, anticipated shutdowns, partial occupancy and Owner use, Completion Date and other such information required to allow Owner's monitoring of progress of project and identifying critical path of events required to meet Completion Date. I2. Use same breakdown of units of Work as indicated in Schedule of Values. C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to Architect, Owner, subcontractors,and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. ID. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. I 1. Bring significant deviations from Schedule immediately to Owner's and Architect's attention. SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE I1.6 A. Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, Ifabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontract, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1 I ILRS Architects, Inc. t Tigard Apartments Project Management and Coordination:01 3100 December 11, 2015 Page 6 1.7 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Engineering Services: I 1. Provide field engineering services as required for construction. 2. Locate and maintain an accurate benchmark on or near site that has been established by a Registered Surveyor. Relate subsequent elevations of finish grades and building elements directly to this benchmark. B. Existing Control Points: I 1. Protect control points prior to starting Work,and preserve permanent reference points during construction. 2. Make no changes or relocations of control points without prior written notice to Architect's Representative. 3. Report to Architects Representative when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. I C. Instrument Layout: 1. Use site benchmarks and existing elevation control points to establish lines and levels, located and laid out by survey instrumentation. 2. Locate water supply, storm and sanitary sewer lines. 3. Locate edge and level of paving, curbs,walks, and sloping landscape. 4. Locate building foundations, column locations, and floor levels. 5. Locate controlling lines and levels required for plumbing, mechanical and electrical Work within 5 feet of building perimeter. D. Corrections: 1 1. Record changes in elevations or location of Work on project record Documents. 2. Report errors in horizontal and vertical dimensions and grades prior to starting Work. I E. Verification and Coordination: 1. Verify dimensions of new and existing Work. 1 a. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawings, modify to accommodate. If field measurements differ significantly, notify Architect prior to commencing Work. I 2. Coordinate locations of openings through floors, roofs and walls with Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. F. Documentation: 1. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work when requested by Architect. END OF SECTION I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL i1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for Iperformance of Work, including Shop Drawings, Product Data,and Samples. B. Related Sections: I 1. 2. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures,for substitutions submittal requirements. Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures,for Applications for Payment and Schedule of Values submittal requirements. I 3. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination,for Coordination Drawings, Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittals Schedule, and distribution of meeting and conference minutes submittal requirements. 4. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for test and inspection reports submittal I 5. requirements. Sections with specific requirements for submittals indicated in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS IA. Action Submittals:Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive Iaction. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and I from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. I D. Portable Document Format(PDF):An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings may be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals under provisions stated in the General Conditions of Ithe Contract for Construction. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing,testing, delivery, other submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity. I 2. Submit all items required for each specification section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittals schedule. 3. Submit Action Submittals and Informational Submittals required by the same specification section as separate packages under separate transmittals. I 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. b. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with these provisions. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures:01 3300 December 11,2015 Page 2111 C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100, Project Management and Coordination,for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of 111 related construction activities. D. Processing Time:Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. I 1. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 2. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 3. Initial Review:Allow minimum 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. a. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 4. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same I manner as initial submittal. 5. Sequential Review:Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. 6. Resubmittal Review:Allow minimum 10 working days for review of each resubmittal. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: I 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS- 06 1000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point(e.g., LNHS-06 1000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval 1 markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. I c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of manufacturer. I g. Specification Section number and title. h. Drawing number and detail reference, as appropriate. i. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. i. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. j. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. k. Other necessary identification. F. Submit items pertaining to only one Specification Section in each submittal. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 1 December 11, 2015 • Page 3 G. Deviations: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letter head, record I relevant information, revisions other than those required by Architect,and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. I H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. I 2. Architect will return submittals,without review, received from sources other than Contractor or forwarded to Architect without transmittal. II. Resubmittals: 1. Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block of resubmittal. Clearly indicate extent of revision. I J. Distribution: I 1. Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers,subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others necessary as necessary for performance of construction activities. 2. Indicate submittal distribution on transmittal. I K. Use for Construction: Use only submittals with mark indicating Architect's final release. I L. Submittal Log: Maintain an accurate submittal log for duration of Work, showing current status of submittals at all times. Make log available to Owner and Architect for review upon request. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. Files must be under 5 MB. I a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. I2.2 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. I1. If information must be specifically prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not Product Data. B. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 1. Product Data, such as general product brochures containing information on other products that are not required or proposed for Work,which are not clearly marked to I indicate which products and options are applicable to Project will be returned by Architect without review or action. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 I December 11, 2015 Page 4 C. Include following information, as applicable: 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. I 2. Manufacturer's product specifications. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. I 4. Standard color charts. 5. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 6. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 7. Testing by recognized testing agency. I 8. Performance characteristics and capacities. 9. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 10. Wiring diagrams showing factory installed wiring. 11. Printed performance curves. 12. Operational range diagrams. 13. Mill reports. 14. Notation of coordination requirements. D. Colors and Patterns: Except where specific color and pattern is indicated in Contract 1 Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in specified products, submit minimum 2 color and pattern charts to Architect for selection. E. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. F. Submit the following format for each required submittal: 1. PDF electronic file. 1111 2.3 SHOP DRAWINGS Il A. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project specific information, drawn accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show pertinent aspects of item and its method of connection to Work. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. B. Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: I 1. Dimensions; Identify dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Identification of products. 3. Fabrication and installation drawings. 4. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring. 6. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. II 7. Templates and patterns. 8. Schedules. 9. Design calculations. 10. Compliance with specified standards. 11. Notation of coordination requirements. 12. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 13. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. I C. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings,at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches D. Submit the following format for each required submittal: 1. PDF electronic file. LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 1 December 11, 2015 Page 5 I2.4 SAMPLES A. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of those characteristics between Isubmittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. IB. Identification:Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: I 1. Generic description of Sample. 2. Product name and name of manufacturer. 3. Sample source. 4. Submittal number, and number and title of appropriate Specification Section. IC. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. fD. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. I E. Field Samples: Full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish Project standard. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or I otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor. F. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available. 1 1. Submit 2 color charts.Architect will return 1 color chart with options selected. G. Samples for Verification: Submit full size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from I same material to be used in the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. 1 1. Samples include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components. b. Small cuts or containers of materials. I c. Complete units of repetitively used materials. d. Swatches showing color,texture, and pattern. e. Color range sets. If. Components used for independent testing and inspection. 2. Number or Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples.Architect will retain 1 sample and return remainder of sets to Contractor. Ia. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. b. If variation in color, pattern, or texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets that show approximate limits of variations, or number of units indicated in individual Specification Sections. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 December 11, 2015 Page 6 2.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by Specification Sections. 1. Provide the following format: ' a. PDF electronic file. 2. Certificates and Certifications. a. Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an office or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports:Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4500, Quality Control. 111 4. Welding, Installer, Manufacturer, Product and Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. B. The following are Informational Submittals: 1. Test and Inspection Reports. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Qualification Data: 5. Welding Certificates. 6. Installer Certificates. 7. Manufacturer Certificates. 8. Product Certificates. 9. Material Certificates. 10. Material Test Reports. 11. Research/Evaluation Reports. 12. Compatibility Test Reports. 13. Field Test Reports. 14. Maintenance Data. 15. Design Data. 16. Manufacturer's Instructions. 17. Manufacturer's Field Reports 18. Material Safety Data Sheets. a. Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. b. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.6 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria:Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 IDecember 11,2015 Page 7 B. Delegated Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required I submittals, submit 3 paper copies of a certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional,for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed by a design professional. I 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW IA. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. I1. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying I that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION IA. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. IB. Action Submittals:Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, mark with an action stamp, and return to Contractor. C. Action Stamp:Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp, and mark stamp I appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When a submittal is marked"NO EXCEPTION TAKEN," I Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release:When a submittal is marked"MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED,"Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations I or corrections on submittal and requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal:When a submittal is marked"REVISE AND RESUBMIT," do not proceed with Work covered by submittal, including purchasing,fabrication, I delivery, or other activity. a. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to notations and resubmit. Repeat as necessary to obtain an action releasing submittal. I b. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked"REVISE AND RESUBMIT,"at Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. I4. Submittals for Record: a. Where a submittal is for record purposes or special processing or other activity,Architect will return submittal marked"RECORD ONLY." ID. Informational Submittals:Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, return it marked " RECORD ONLY,"or will reject and return it if it does not appear to comply with I requirements. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Submittal Procedures:01 3300 December 11, 2015 Page 8 E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable,will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. 1. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. ' F. Unsolicited Submittals:Architect may not review submittals not required by the Contract Documents. Such submittals may be returned to sender without action, or discarded. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Tigard Apartments Design-Build Requirements: 01 4115 November 2, 2015 • Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Certain components of the Work under this project are Design Build. It is the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors the complete responsibility for the design, calculations, submittals,fabrication,transportation, and installation of the Design Build portions or components as required in this Section. The Applicant is responsible for submitting to the City of Tigard all Design Build documents required for the separate approval for each Design Build item. There are no exceptions. Design Build components of this Work are defined as complete, operational systems, provided for their intended use. B. The Architect's or Engineer of Record's review of Design Build submittals shall be for design I intent and shasubcontractorllto not the lessenOwner nornor shiftto the the responsibilitydesign fromprofessional.theThe ApplicantOwner orshall thenot assigned responsible for paying for any delays, additional products, additional hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure by the Applicant or the subcontractor to coordinate their Work with the Work of other trades on the project or to provide the Design Build portion or component in a timely manner to meet the schedule of the project. C. City of Tigard Requirements: Follow the City of Tigard's requirements current at the time of submission. The Applicant is responsible for coordinating and submitting all material required by the City so that the City's review will not adversely affect the construction schedule. At or near the time of application,the Applicant shall meet with the City to identify Design Build components and how they are to be submitted and processed. D. Design Build Components of the Work: Design Build components known at this time: 1. Precast architectural concrete. 2.• Metal railings. 3. Miscellaneous metal fabrications. 4. Metal roof panels. ' 5. Wood I-Joists. 6. Wood Trusses. 7. Irrigation system. ' 8. 9. Carports Division 21: Fire Suppression 10. Division 22: Plumbing 11. Division 23: Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 12. Division 26: Electrical 13. Division 27: Communications 14. Division 28: Electronic Safety and Security E. Refer to systems descriptions in technical Sections of these Specifications for additional information on Design Build work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS • A. Applicant: Person applying for building permit for Delegated Design systems and person ' coordinating Delegated Design systems with basic building. Includes coordination of required submittals. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Design-Build Requirements: 01 4115 I November 2,2015 Page 2 B. Architect or Engineer of Record:Architect or Engineer registered in state that Project is located, engaged by the Owner to provide plans and computations, and establish design criteria for Design Build components and specifications required by the Building Official for principle Project systems. Includes staff,consultants,and consultants'staffs. C. Contractor: Entity engaged by the Owner to construct the Project. Includes employees, 1 subcontractors,suppliers, and their employees. D. Design Build Engineer: Professional Engineer registered in state that Project is located, I engaged by the Contractor to provide plans, computations, and specifications required by the Building Official for a designated builder-designed specialty system, in accordance with criteria set forth,in Contract Drawings and Specifications. E. Seal: Certification that plans,computations, and specifications were designed and prepared under the direct supervision of the Engineer whose name appears thereon. F. Review Stamp: Certification that the Architect or Engineer has reviewed plans, computations, 1 and specifications bearing the seal of the Design Build Engineer, verifying conformance with information given and design concept set forth in Contract Drawings and Specifications. I G. Approval Stamp: Certification that the Building Official has reviewed a submittal and finds it acceptable with respect to applicable code compliance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. I B. Design Build submittals are required to show complete criteria,design assumptions, details, calculations, submittals, instructions for fabrication, assembly, installation and interface with other trades, unless noted otherwise in the specific Specification Section. 1 C. Complete submittals shall be submitted with the Design Build Engineer's seal and calculations for that portion of Work. Submittals without required calculations,without the Design Build I Engineer's seal, and which have not been reviewed by the Contractor will not be reviewed by the Architect or Engineer of Record. 1.4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS I A. Some Design Build components are shown in the Contract Documents for design intent. The purpose is to have the Contractor responsible for providing, coordinating, and installing the I Design Build component. B. Design Build components attached to the structural frame or supplemental to the structural frame shall be designed for the anticipated loads as outlined in the Contract Documents. These Design Build components shall be coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. C. Load reactions at the interface between the Design Build components and the structural I , frame shall be clearly defined to allow for a review by the Architect or Engineer of Record. END OF SECTION 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General:Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. IB. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on the Contractor's applications and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. I C. "Reviewed": When used in lieu of"Approved"to convey Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of . the Contract. D. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including"requested," "authorized,""selected," "approved," "required,"and "permitted," have the same meaning as I "directed." E. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in the Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including I "shown,""noted,""scheduled,"and"specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." F. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances,statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that Icontrol performance of the Work. G. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. I H. "Install": Operations at the Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,working to dimension,finishing, curing, Iprotecting, cleaning,and similar operations. I. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I J. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor,to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. I K. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown in Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on Iwhich Project is to be built. M. "Testing Agencies": Independent entities engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required,to interpret results of Ithose inspections or tests. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS I A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if . bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 December 11, 2015 Page 2 I B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, i unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. I D. Conflicting Requirements: Comply with the most stringent requirement when compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels. 1. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal,to the Architect for decision before proceeding. E. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels:The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Standards and Regulations:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names,telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 800-872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) 202-272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities I Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations 866-512-1800 I Available from Government Printing Office 202-512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 800-872-2253 I Available from Access Board 202-272-0080 www.access-board.gov B. Industry Organizations:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other I Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. Names,telephone numbers,and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. M Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 703-358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers 216-241-7333 I www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council 202-737-0202 I www.aabchq.com I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 847-303-5664 Iwww.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and 202-624-5800 Transportation Officials Iwww.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and 919-549-8141 Colorists Iwww.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America 866-956-5888 . www.airbarrier.org ACI American Concrete Institute 248-848-3700 www.aci-int.org IAF&PA American Forest& Paper Association 800-878-8878 www.afandpa.org 202-463-2700 I AGA American Gas Association 202-824-7000 www.aga.org I AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) 703-548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 202-872-5955 Iwww.aham.org AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute, The 703-524-8800 www.ahrinet.org IAl Asphalt Institute 859-288-4960 www.ashpaltinstitute.org I AIA American Institute of Architects (The) 800-242-3837 www.aia.org 202-626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 800-644-2400 Iwww,aisc.org 312-670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 202-452-7100 Iwww.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 303-792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org IALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (see PLANET) I ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee, Incorporated 301-972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 847-394-0150 Iwww.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute 202-293-8020 I www.ansi.org ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 I December 11,2015 Page 4 APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association 253-565-6600 www.apawood.org APA EWS APA-The Engineered Wood Association, Engineered Wood Systems I (see APA-The Engineered Wood Association) APA Architectural Precast Association 239-454-6989 www.archprecast.org I ARI Air-Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute 703-524-8800 www.ari.org • ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association 202-207-0917 111 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 800-548-2723 ' www.asce.org 703-295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 800-527-4723 I Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 404-636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International 800-843-2763 I (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) 973-882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 440-835-3040 I www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International 610-832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) I www.astm.org AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry 703-534-8300 www.awci.org I AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 571-323-3636 www.awinet.org I AWPA American Wood Protection Association 205-733-4077 (formerly American Wood-Preservers'Association) www.awpa.com I AWS American Welding Society 800-443-9353 www.aws.org 305-443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association 800-926-7337 www.aws.org 303-794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 212-297-2122 I www.buildershardware.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council 610-527-3880 I www.carpetcushion.org CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association 630-584-1919 www.cisca.org I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 1 December 11, 2015 Page 5 I CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 423-892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 301-596-2583 Iwww.chainlinkinfo.org CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association 800-510-2772 Iwww.cppa-info.org 202-462-9607 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute(The) 800-882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com 706-278-3176 ICRRC Cool Roof Rating Council 886-465-2523 www.coolroofs.org 510-485-7175 I CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 847-517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International 866-797-4272 I (Formally: IAS- International Approval Services) 416-747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute(The) 800-689-2900 I www.csinet.org 703-684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau 604-820-7700 Iwww.cedarbureau.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute 703-222-2010 www.dhi.org IECA Electrical Components Association 703-907-8024 www.ec-central.org U EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc, 914-332-0040 www.ejma.org ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO 800-967-5352 I (formally: ITS-Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek-etisemko.com I FMG FM Global 401-275-3000 www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association 301-277-8686 Iwww.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America 785-271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com IGSI Geosynthetic Institute 610-522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org I HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 ' December 11,2015 Page 6 HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association 703-435-2900 www.hpva.orgI IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) 212-419-7900 www.ieee.org I IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 703-525-0320 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 315-646-2234 I www.igee.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) 613-233-1510 I www.igmaonline.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 74901 11 (available from ANSI) 202-293-8020 I www.iso.ch ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association 801-341-7360 I www.issfa.net 877-464-7732 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (see ETL SEMCO) I KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association 703-264-1690 www.kcma.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 888-480-9138 I www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association 312-644-6610 I www.metalframingmfg.org MIA Masonry Institute of America 800-221-4000 ww.masonyinstitiute.org 310-257-9000 I MPI The Master Painters Institute 888-674-8937 www.paintinfo.com 604-298-7578 I NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 630-942-6591 www.naamm.org NAIMA The North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 703-684-0084 I www.naima.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 703-713-1900 I www.ncma.org NCTA National Cable&Telecommunications Association 202-222-2300 I www.ncta.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 301-657-3110 www.necanet.org 111NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 703-841-3200 www.nema.org 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I — I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 December 11, 2015 Page 7 NFPA National Fire Protection Association 800-344-3555 Iwww.nfpa.org 617-770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 301-589-1776 www.nfrc.org ' NGA National Glass Association 703-442-4890 www.glass.org 866-342-5642 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 800 933 0318 www.natlhardwood.org 901-377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority 604 524 2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association 901-526-5016 Iwww.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 800-323-9545 www.nrca.net 847-299-9070 ' NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association 888-846-7622 www.nrmca.org 301-587-1400 NSSGA National Stone, Sand &Gravel Association 800 342-1415 www,nssga.org 703-525-8788 NWCB Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Seattle) 800-524-4215 ' Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Portland) 503-295-0333 NWFA National Wood Flooring Association 800-422-4556 Iwww.nwfa.org 636-519-9663 PCA Portland Cement Association 847-966-6200 www.cement.org 202-408-5494 IPLANET Professional Landcare Network 800-395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org 703-736-9666 RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections 800-644 2400 www.boltcouncil.org 312-670-2400 I RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 706 882 3833 www.rfci.com SDI Steel Door Institute 440-899-0010 Iwww.steeldoor.org SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council 315-646-2234 www.sgcc.org ISMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' 703-803-2980 National Association, Inc. ' www.smacna.org SSPC SSPC:The Society for Protective Coatings 877-281-7772 www.sspc.org 412-281-2331 I ' LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 ' December 11, 2015 Page 8 SWRI Sealant,Waterproofing,and Restoration Institute 816-472-7974 www.swrionline.org I TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. 864-646-8453 www.tileusa.com I TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. 703-683-1010 www.tpinstg.org UL Underwriter's Laboratory, Incorporated 877-854-3577 I www.ul.com 847-272-8800 . WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 800-283-1486 I www.wclib.org 503-639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association 212-297-2122 www.wcmanet.org I WI Woodwork Institute 916-372-9943 www.wicnet.org I WMMPA Wood Moulding&Millwork Producers Association 800-550-7889 www.wmmpa.com 530-661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association 800-725-0333 I www.wsrca.com 650-570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 503-224-3930 I www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. II Names,telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IBC International Building Code I ICC International Code Council, Inc. 888-422-7233 www.iccsafe.org I ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. 800-423-6587 www.ice-es.org 562-699-0543 OSSC State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code I D. Federal Government Agencies:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following I list. Names,telephone numbers,and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 800-638-2772 I www.cpsc.gov 301-504-6816 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 202-272-0167 I www.epa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development 202-708-1112 www.hud.gov I LRS Architects, Inc. I E I Tigard Apartments Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 December 11, 2015 Page 9 OSHA Occupational Safety&Health Administration 800-321-6742 www.osha.gov 202-693-1999 USPS United States Postal Service 202-268-2000 www.usps.com END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I� r I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Quality Control: 01 4500 1 December 11,2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and Iquality control services. 1. Quality assurance and control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by I governing authorities. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. a. Requirements do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by I Architect. 2. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements Ispecified or indicated. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 7329: Cutting and Patching,for requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete,for independent testing of concrete mix design and for concrete slab moisture vapor emissions. I 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner will contract separately for services of independent testing laboratory to perform I specified inspection and testing. 1. Unanticipated inspections and testing required by authorities having jurisdiction will be I paid for by the Owner, unless inspection or testing is required due to failure of the Contractor to perform work of the Contract Documents. B. Inspections and testing costs required by defective Work or improperly-timed notices, and the following shall be paid by Contractor: I 1. Moisture vapor emission testing for concrete slabs-on-grade by an independent testing agency as required for installation of finish floor materials. I C. Utilization of testing laboratory services shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. g 111 1.3 RETESTING A. Regardless of whether original tests were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting,for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the I Contract Documents. 1.4 ASSOCIATED SERVICES IA. Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. B. Provide auxiliary services as requested. rC. Notify agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. I LRS Architects,Inc. I Tigard Apartments Quality Control: 01 4500 December 11, 2015 Page 2 I D. Auxiliary services include, but are not limited to,following: 1. Providing access to Work. and tests. I 2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitateinspections E. Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum of delay. Ili F. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests. • 1. Except where indicated as responsibility of testing agency, Contractor is responsible for taking samples. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Inspection and Testing Agencies: 1. Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are prequalified as complying with American Council of Independent Laboratories'„Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification”and that specialize in types of inspections and tests to be performed. 2. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in State where Project is located. B. Duties of Testing Agency: I 1. Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performing its duties. 2. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests. 3. Agency shall notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities of deficiencies observed in Work during performance of its services. 4. Except as otherwise specified,testing laboratory shall secure, handle,and store samples and specimens for testing. C. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test to: 1. Architect. 2. Contractor. 3. Governmental agencies requiring submission of reports. 4. Other persons as directed by Architect. I PART 2 PRODUCTS- Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Comply with requirements of Section 1701 of Oregon Structural Specialty Code, latest edition, I based on International Building Code. B. Following Sections contain requirements for special inspections: 1. Section 04 2200: Concrete Unit Masonry 2. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications 3. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Quality Control: 01 4500 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS IA. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. $ 1. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe: I 1. Site conditions 2. Conditions of surfaces and installation I 3. Quality of workmanship 4. Start-up of equipment 5. Test, adjust, and balance of equipment applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. IC. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. ID. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review. 3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION IA. Upon completion of inspection,testing, and sample taking, repair damaged construction. 1. Restore substrates and finishes. 2. Comply with Section 01 7329, "Cutting and Patching." I B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. IC. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection and testing. I3.4 EVALUATION OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Satisfactory completion of Work will be judged on results of laboratory and site tests and inspections. 1 B Results of tests and inspections that indicate Work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents will be considered deficient. IIC. Contractor has responsibility to remove and replace deficient Work at Contractor's expense. 1 END OF SECTION I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Product Requirements: 01 6000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL B1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's . I selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; and manufacturer's standard warranties on products; special warranties;and comparable products. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures,for product substitutions procedures. I 2. Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures,for product submittal procedures. 3. Section 01 4200: Definitions and Reference Standards 1.2 DEFINITIONS IA. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work.The term "product" includes the terms"material,""equipment," "system,"and terms of similar intent. I 1. Named Products: Items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project I or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed. Products salvaged or recycled from other products are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through substitution I submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type,function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Refer to Section 01 2500 for product substitution procedures. IC. Basis of Design, or Standard of Design, Product Specification: Where the manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words"basis of design"or"standard of design," including make or model number or other designation,to establish the significant qualities related to type,function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. I1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit a complete list of major Iproducts proposed for use in the Project. 1. Include proprietary product names, manufacturer's name, and installing Subcontractor's name. IB. Refer to Section 01 3300 for product submittal procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same kind from a single source to the fullest extent possible. I ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Product Requirements: 01 6000 December 11, 2015 Page 2 B. Compatibility of Products: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project,select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods for other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products,Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 1 A. Deliver,store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, or other losses. 3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,storing, unpacking, protecting,and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents , and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products subject to damage by weather under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,ventilation, and weather protection requirements for storage. I 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitation on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty:Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document specifically endorsed by manufacturer to I Owner that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project specific information and properly executed. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Product Requirements: 01 6000 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 2. Specified Form:When specified forms are included in the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. t 1. Provide products complete with accessories,trim,finish fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Where products are accompanied by the term"as selected,"Architect will make selection. 3. Where products are accompanied by the term"match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 4. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term"or equal"or"or approved equal"or"or approved,"submit product for approval according I to requirements of Section 01 2500, "Substitution Procedures"to obtain approval of an unnamed product. B. Proprietary Specification Requirements:Where a single product or manufacturer is named, Iprovide the product that complies with requirements. No substitutions are permitted. C. Manufacturer/Source:Where a single manufacturer or source is named, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. I D. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. IE. Available Products:Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions of Section 01 2500 for consideration of an unnamed product. F. Available Manufacturers:Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions of Section 01 2500 for consideration of an unnamed product. ' G. Descriptive Specification Requirements:Where a product or assembly listing exact characteristics required, provide a product or assembly that provides those characteristics I and otherwise complies with requirements._ H. Performance Specification Requirements:Where compliance with performance requirements are specified, provide products that comply with those requirements and are recommended by Ithe manufacturer for the application indicated. I. Specified Standards, Codes, and Regulations:Where compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation is specified, provide a product that complies with that code, standard, Jor regulation. J. Basis of Design, or Standard of Design, Product:Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one I of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions of Section 01 2500 for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. II IILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Product Requirements: 01 6000 December 11, 2015 Page 4 1 K. Visual Matching Specification:Where Contract Documents require matching an established sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of Section 01 2500 for proposal of product. L. Visual Selection Specification: Where Contract Documents include the phrase"as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures,"or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other requirements. 1. Standard Range: Where Contract Documents include the phrase"standard range of colors, patterns,textures"or similar phase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 2. Full Range: Where Contract Documents include the phrase"full range of colors, patterns, textures"or similar phase,Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. M. Inappropriate Product Selections: If Contractor believes specified product, method, or system is inappropriate for use, Contractor shall notify the Architect before performing Work in question. 1. If notice of objection is not received prior to delivery to site, it will be assumed by Owner that Contractor agrees specified products, methods, and systems are appropriate for use in the Project. PART 3 EXECUTION 111 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. 1. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 2. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary from damage and deterioration. B. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturers' instructions, consult Architect for further instructions. END OF SECTION I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for cutting,fitting, and patching of Work required to: 111 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Remove and replace defective work. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination, for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities. 2. Section 01 4500: Quality Control,for cutting and patching operations related to I 3. inspection and testing. Refer to individual Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching. 4. Divisions 22, 23 and 26,for mechanical and electrical requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. I 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where cutting and patching involves structural elements, submit for approval a proposal describing procedures. Include the following information in the proposal: I 1. Describe extent of cutting and patching required, how it will be performed, and why it cannot be avoided. 2. Indicate changes to structural elements, and changes in appearance of visual I elements. Include structural calculations. 3. List products proposed for use and entities that will perform the Work. 4. Indicate dates that work will be performed, duration of the Work, and when work will be uncovered for Architect's observation. 5. List utilities that cutting and patching work will affect. I 6. Submit cost estimate and secure Architect's approval of cost estimate and type of reimbursement before proceeding with cutting and patching 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE III A. Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load carrying capacity of load deflection ratio. I 1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching structural elements. I B. Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as intended, cause increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. C. Do not cut and patch exposed elements of construction that in the Architect's opinion would Ireduce the visual aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. 1. Remove and replace ep ace construction cut and patched in a visually unacceptable manner. 1.4 WARRANTY , A. Cut and patch construction using methods and with materials in such a manner as to not void any warranties required or existing. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 December 11, 2015 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other sections. 1 B. Use new materials identical to existing materials. C. For exposed surfaces where identical materials are not available, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces as nearly as possible. D. Use materials whose installed performance is equal or better to that of existing materials. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION I A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling. B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new Work. I C. Discrepancies: If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify Architect and secure direction before proceeding further. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Provide temporary support of work to be cut, including shoring and bracing as required to maintain structural integrity of Work. B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 3.3 GENERAL PERFORMANCE I A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Where required, perform excavating and backfilling in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 31 Sections. C. Provide dust proof barriers where necessary to protect existing surfaces. I 3.4 CUTTING A. Perform cutting and demolition by methods that will provide the least damage to other 0 portions of Work. B. Prior to cutting existing work, locate concealed utilities to eliminate possibility of service interruption or damage. C. Cut through concrete or masonry with a carborundum masonry saw or diamond-core drill. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 D. When masonry construction must be pierced,furnish and install a steel pipe sleeve in Iopening and grout in place neatly. 1. Leaverout surface to match existingfinish. 9 2. Fabricate sleeve one inch in diameter larger than pipe or insulation. I 3. Pack between sleeve and pipe with waterproof sealant. 4. At penetrations of fire-resistant rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-resistant rated materials as require to maintain assembly of fire-resistant rating of penetrated element, or as required by Building I Code. 3.5 PATCHING A. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide a finished installation complying with tolerances and finishes specified for type of construction involved. I B. Where replacement of equipment and fixtures is required, restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air-conditioning, electrical, and similar systems to full operational condition. C. Refinish surfaces to match existing adjacent finish, patching with seams that are durable and Ias invisible as possible. 1. Where possible, inspect and test patched area to demonstrate integrity of seam. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. 3. For assembly, refinish entire unit. 4. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. ID. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with existing or new work is not possible, submit to Architect,for approval, recommendation for terminating surface along straight line at natural line of division. I1. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for providing smooth transition. I3.6 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching work is performed. IEND OF SECTION I I 1 I I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cleaning: 01 7400 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL i1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for maintaining Project buildings and site in a standard of Icleanliness during construction period. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I A. Provide personnel, equipment, and materials as needed to maintain specified standard of cleanliness. 2.2 COMPATIBILITY IA. Use only cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with surfaces being cleaned, as recommended by manufacturer of material. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING I A. General: Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris,waste material, and other items not required for construction of this Work. I1. Completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from job site and dispose of in a legal manner. 2. Provide adequate storage for items and waste to be removed from job site, observing requirements for fire and environmental protection. IB. Storage Areas: Maintain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, which does not impeding traffic or drainage. 1 I 1. Inspect arrangement of stored materials weekly. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements. C. Site and Structures: 1. Inspect site and structures weekly, and more often if necessary, and upgall scrap, debris, and waste material. pick Ia. Remove such items to place designated for their storage. Maintain site in a neat and orderly condition. I2. Sweep interior spaces clean as often as necessary to maintain a clean environment. a. Clean,for purpose of this subparagraph,shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cleaning: 01 7400 December 11,2015 Page 2 3. As required prior to installation of succeeding materials, clean structures or applicable portions thereof to degree of cleanliness recommended by manufacturer of succeeding material. 4. Following installation of finish floor materials, clean finish flooring daily at times while Work is being performed in space in that finish materials are installed to keep floor free from foreign material that may be injurious to finish. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. "Final Cleaning,"for purpose of this Section, and except as may be specifically provided elsewhere, shall be interpreted as meaning level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials. B. Prior to Substantial Completion, remove from Project site all tools,surplus materials, equipment,scrap, debris,and waste. C. Broom clean paved areas on site and public paved areas at approaches to site. I D. Exterior Surfaces: 1. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil,waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Hose down entire exterior surfaces of structure if necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness. E. Interior Surfaces: 1. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil,waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Remove paint droppings, spots,and stains. 3. Clean both sides of glass surfaces. 4. Polished surfaces:Apply polish recommended by manufacturer of material to be polished. END OF SECTION I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Concrete forming 2. Concrete reinforcing. 3. Concrete accessories. I 4. Concrete footings and foundation walls. 5. Floor slabs-on-grade. 6. Moisture Vapor Emission Control System. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control,for special inspection and independent testing I 2. requirements. Section 07 1400: Fluid Applied Waterproofing,for preparation requirements for concrete substrates to receive waterproofing. 3. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes. I1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Anchor bolts and holdown bolts to be embedded in concrete, supplied under provisions of I Section 05 5000: "Metal Fabrications." 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturers product information on concrete accessory materials, including I sealer, hardener, curing compound,and moisture vapor emission control system and their VOC content. a. Provide schedule of specific areas to receive each type of product specified I for interior slab-on-grade treatment, such as sealers, hardeners, and Moisture Vapor Emission Control System. Identify name of each product proposed for use. ,, b. Submit applicator qualifications required under"Quality Assurance"Article I with Curing Compound and Moisture Vapor Emission Control System data. B. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcing placement drawings prior to Ifabrication of reinforcing. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 315. 2. Identify and dimension each type of reinforcing bar. IC. Mix Design Data: Submit a mix design formula, with supporting test data per ACI,at least 10 days prior to delivery of concrete. ID. Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory and field test reports for concrete work. 1. Submit copies of inspection and independent testing reports required in Section 01 4500, "Quality Control." I E. Certificates: Submit letter from concrete supplier that concrete delivered meets specified requirements. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete:03 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 2 F. Batch Ticket: Provide a batch weight ticket with each truck for inspection agency. 1. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 Batch Ticket Information. I G. Reinforcement Test Reports: Submit two copies of mill test reports on grade 60 reinforcing prior to placing concrete. I H. Warranties: Special warranty specified in this Section for moisture vapor emission control system. 1'.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reinforcing Steel Standards: 1. CRSI"Manual of Standard Practice" 2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ASTM A615 and Supplement#1. 4. ASTM A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. B. Mix Design Qualifications: Employ testing laboratory or concrete supplier acceptable to Architect to perform materials evaluation,testing, and design of concrete mixes. C. Plant Certification: Ready Mix Plant to comply with NRMCA certification regulations. 1. Ready Mix Plant and Equipment: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94. D. Applicator of Curing Compound and Moisture Vapor Emission Control System: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with an applicator knowledgeable in application requirements to achieve specified moisture vapor emission control. 1. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation and who shall be knowledgeable in application requirements to achieve specified moisture vapor emission control. E. Test concrete slabs-on-grade for moisture vapor emissions prior to application of finish floor materials. 111 1. Contractor will engage an Independent Testing Laboratory in accordance with requirements of Section 01 4500. 1,5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre-installation conference within two weeks prior to commencing Work of this I section. B. Review installation procedures,testing procedures, and coordination required with related II Work, concrete design mixes,concrete admixtures, including placement of concrete on vapor retarder and application of Moisture Vapor Emission Control System. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled,tagged, and marked. 1. Tag to indicate bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on Shop Drawing placement diagrams. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete:03 3000 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 B. Store reinforcement in a manner to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS IA. Temperature and Weather Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete when temperature or weather will affect performance or appearance of concrete. 2. Minimum Ambient Air Temperature: 40 degrees F. 3. No precipitation expected within 8 hours for unprotected concrete surfaces. B. Substrate Requirements: I 1. Do not place concrete on muddy or frozen soil. 2. Remove water and ice from footing trenches. 1 3. Remove ice from formed surfaces. 4. Remove water and ice from underslab vapor retarder. PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Plywood, metal, or other acceptable panel-type materials to Iprovide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. 1. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on Drawings. I B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of Iconcrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. I C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. II 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than one inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. I2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: Intermediate grade steel conforming with"Specifications for Billet-Steel Concrete Reinforcing Bars",ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, unless specifically noted as Igrade 40. B. Reinforcing Accessories: I 1. Chairs for Support of Rebar: "Concrete Brick," Precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete, of greater strength that concrete; do not use steel devices over vapor retarder. 2. Reinforcing Tie Wire:ASTM A 82, 16 gauge, double annealed iron wire. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 4 1 C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain,fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS ' A. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type I or II. I 1. Fly Ash:ASTM C 618, Class F or Class C. B. Aggregates:re ates: ASTM C 33. I C. Water: ASTM C 94,clean,free of oils, acids,organic material. D. Admixtures: 1. Air-Entraining: ASTM C 260. 2. Chemical Admixture:ASTM C 494,Type A water reducing or Type D water reducing and retarding. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALSIII A. Curing Compound: Sodium or lithium silicate,for exposed concrete floor slabs where vapor emission and control system is not used. 1. Eucosil; Euclid Chemical. 2. Day-Chem Sil-Cure (J-13); Dayton Superior Corporation. 3. L&M Cure; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4. Sonosil; BASF Building Systems. 5. Sinak VC5; Sinak Corporation. B. Moisture Vapor Emission and Control System: Lithium based concrete curing treatment for concrete floor slabs that will be covered with an adhered floor finish. 1. Sinak Corporation (800-523-3147); Sinak VC5. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty for the floor covering system covering labor and materials necessary to repair, or replace if repairs cannot be made,the floor finish covering failure due to substrate originated moisture and/or moisture-born contaminates. C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment, (SC); Liquid Hardener, Sealer, and Dustproofer: For interior exposed concrete floor slabs. 1. Ashford Formula; Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc. 2. Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17); Dayton Superior Corporation. 3. Kure-N-Harden; BASF Building Systems. 4. Seal Hard; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. D. Nonmetallic Nonshrink Grout: 1. Standard: ASTM C 1107. 2. Acceptable Compounds: a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout. b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout. c. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928. d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout. e. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 5 IE. Bonding Agent: 1. Standards: ASTM C 932,ASTM C 881 and ASTM C 631. 2. Acceptable Agents: Ia. Tammsweld by Euclid Chemical Company. b. Weld-crete by Larsen. c. Thorobond by BASF Building Systems. F. Patching Compound: I1. Acceptable Compounds: Epolith Patcher or Sonopatch by Sonneborn. G. Aggregate Base Under Building Slabs-On-Grade: Self draining 1 inch to 1/4 inch clean crushed rock or gravel with no fines, unless otherwise indicated in Drawings. Ii H. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217 inch thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris I I. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete. 1. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co. 2. Conseal CS-231; Concrete Sealants Inc. 3. Hydrotite; Greenstreak. 4. Mirastop; Mirafi Moisture Protection, Div. of Royal Ten Cate (USA), Inc. I2.5 MIXING A. Proportioning: Comply with ACI 211.1 I1. Proportion concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Paragraph 4.2.3. B. Proportion Adjustments: 1 1. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, site conditions,weather, test results or other circumstances warrant. Ia. Submit proposed revised concrete mixes to Architect. C. Ready Mix Plant Mixing Procedures: Comply with ASTM C 94. I 1. Mix full load for 3 minutes at high speed upon arrival at site. 2. Mix additional 5 minutes after adding water. ID. Design Mix Requirements: 1. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1 inch. 2. Maximum Slump for Footings and Floor Slabs: 4 inches+ 1/2 to- 1 inch. 3. Maximum Slump for Walls: 3 inches + 1/2 to- 1 inch. 4. Entrained Air: 6 percent+or- 1-1/2 percent; use only for exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Minimum Compressive Strength:f'c= 3,000 psi in 28 days. I 6. Probability of Test Failing Below Specified Strength: 1 out of 5. 7. Maximum Pozzolan (Fly Ash) Content: 15 percent of weight of cementitious material. 8. High-Range,Water Reducing Admixture:ASTM C 494, Type F. Use for interior slabs- Ion-grade to achieve specified water/cement ratio. ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 December 11,2015 Page 6 9. Water/Cement Ratios: a. 0.42 for interior slabs-on-grade. I b. 0.50 for other concrete. 2.6 FABRICATION I A. Shop Fabrication of Steel Reinforcing: Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP- 1,ACI 301,ACI 315, and ACI 318. 1. Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 for bending dimension. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect,shore, brace,and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI 301. 1 B. Construct formwork so concrete structures are of size, shape,alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities,designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: I 1. Class A, 1/8 inch,for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch,for other concrete surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless otherwise I shown or indicated. F. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's instructions before placing reinforcement. G. Leave formwork for structural elements in place until concrete has achieved 28-day design • compressive strength. I H. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in Work and apply new form- release agent. 1. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by111 Architect. I. Anchor Bolts: III 1. Set anchor bolts for structural plates with anchor bolts secured to plywood or steel templates. 2. Set anchor bolts for equipment with anchor bolts secured to templates furnished by equipment manufacturer. J. Reglets: Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and where indicated or required to terminate materials at concrete face. I 3.2 AGGREGATE BASE A. Install aggregate base under building slabs-on-grade as indicated in Drawings. I 1. Grade aggregate base to drain to top of perimeter foundation wall footings. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 7 3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING STEEL iA. Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-1. B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce Ior destroy bond with concrete. C. Support reinforcing to prevent displacement with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and I D. hangers. Set wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. I E. Stagger reinforcing bar splices 36 inches minimum at alternate bars. F. Install welded wire fabric in long lengths, lapping edges at least one mesh plus two inches unless otherwise noted. IG. Lap continuous bars in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 12, Class B, unless otherwise noted. IH. Placement tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch plus or minus. I. Construct hooked reinforcing to comply with ACI 318, Section 7.1 to 7.3. I J. Notify Architect of items interfering such as conduit, pipes, inserts, sleeves, etc., and obtain written approval on procedure before placement of concrete. K. Minimum Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7, Paragraph I 7.7, unless otherwise noted. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT IA. Comply with ACI 301 and 304, placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. I B. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and tamping. C. Work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items and forms. 1 3.5 FINISHING A. Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Public View: I1. Provide smooth form finish for concrete. 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 5.3.3. I 3. Remove fins and projections. 4. Patch tie holes and defects. B. Concealed Concrete Surfaces to Receive Waterproofing: I1. Provide smooth form finish for concrete. 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 5.3.3. 3. Provide concrete surfaces that are free of honeycomb, loose particles, cracks, pits I (pinholes),fins and projections, penetrations, or foreign, including form release materials,detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. 4. Patch tie holes and defects. I ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 8 C. Floated Slab Finish: 1. Provide floated finish for slab surfaces to receive washed,troweled, and broomed I finish. 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 5.3.4.2.b. 3. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit float finishing. 4. Check surface plane with a 10 foot straightedge at two or more angles during or after first floating. 5. Level to flatness of 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 6. Refloat immediately to a uniform sandy texture. D. Troweled Slab Finish: 11 1. Provide troweled finish for interior slab surfaces exposed for walking,to receive resilient or carpet floor covering, or to receive ceramic tile or terrazzo flooring. 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 5.3.4.2.c. 3. Provide a floated finish as specified above. 4. Power trowel slab to smooth surface free of defects except minor trowel marks. 5. Eliminate trowel marks by hand troweling slab when surface is sufficiently hard. 6. Perform final hand troweling when trowel rings as trowel is moved over slab surface. 7. Trowel to flatness of 3/16 inch in 10 feet. 8. Grind slab surfaces or fill with underlayment to remove defects of sufficient magnitude to show through intended floor covering. - E. Broom Slab Finish: 1. Provide a broom finish for exterior walks, stair treads, slabs and ramps. 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 5.3.4.2.d. 3. Provide a floated finish as specified above. 4. Immediately after floating finish, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. F. Joint Finishing: 1. Tool radius exterior slab,walk, ramp,and curb edges. 2. Cut or form interior floor slab crack control joints. G. Horizontal Surface Finish Tolerances: Finish concrete horizontal surfaces as specified in ACI 302, paragraph 8.3. 1 1. For floors to receive resilient flooring and carpeting, provide concrete smooth, level, and without more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft.variation from level. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. I B. Construction Joints: Install at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs,joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 9 5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against Ihardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated, or approved. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal Ito at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: I a. Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. b. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Ic. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: a. Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive I or diamond-rimmed blades. b. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random Icontraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces,such as column pedestals,foundation walls, grade beams, Iand other locations,as indicated. 1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealers, specified in Section 07 9200,Joint I Sealants, are indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. IE. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. I 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 WATERSTOPS IA. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. I3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING I A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the following: 1. Cold Weather Protection:ACI 306R. I2. Hot Weather Protection:ACI 305R. B. Curing Compound:Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's instructions. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing Iperiod. 1. Use moisture vapor emission control system to cure concrete floor slabs to receive adhered floor coverings. ILAS Architects, Inc. s I Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 10III 3.9 INTERIOR FLOOR SLAB TREATMENT A. Moisture Vapor Emission Control System:Apply to interior concrete floor slabs to receive resilient flooring, carpeting,or other adhered floor coverings. 1. Apply two light, even coats, barely wetting surface with an airless or low pressure sprayer according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply second coat perpendicular to first coat to create cross hatched pattern. B. Liquid Hardener, Sealer,and Dustproofer:Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment to interior exposed concrete slabs where Vapor Emission Control System is not used. 1. Cure concrete a minimum of 7 days prior to application, or as required by manufacturer, unless product is applied to freshly placed concrete as a curing agent, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Do not place concrete or reinforcement in footing forms until Architect or his representative has examined compacted soil and aggregate materials within forms. I B. Do not place concrete until Architect or his representative has examined formwork, reinforcing steel, and condition of vapor retarder. 1. Notify Architect 24 hours prior to concrete placement for inspection of reinforcing. 2. Adjusting Reinforcing:Adjust location of reinforcing as required. C. Test Requirements: I 1. When special Inspection is required by Building Code, Owner will employ an Independent Testing Laboratory to evaluate concrete delivered to and placed at site. a. Notify Independent Testing Laboratory 24 hours prior to delivery and placement of concrete. 2. Test composite samples according to ASTM C 172. 1 3. Slump Test:Test at point of placement complying with ASTM C 143. a. Concrete for Floor Slabs: Perform one slump test for each truck load of ready mixed concrete. b. Other Concrete: Perform not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 111 4. Air Content Test: Perform one test for each set of composite sample complying with ASTM C 231. 5. Compressive Strength Tests: Make one set of 3 specimens for each day of structural concrete pouring or each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each class of concrete, a. Test one specimen in accordance with ASTM C 39 after curing 7 days,two III specimens after curing 28 days, unless first specimen tested at 28 days does not meet specified compressive strength, in which case retain one specimen for testing after 35 days or as directed by Architect. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Cast-In-Place Concrete:03 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 11 6. Batch Ticket: a. Receive a batch weight ticket from each truck; batch ticket to comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 for Batch Ticket Information. b. Verify water/cement ratio. 1) No water may be added if load is at specified ratio. 2) Reject truck if ratio does not conform. 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Surface Repairs for Exposed Concrete: 1. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat area to be patched with Bonding Agent. 2. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound. 3. Compact in place and screed as recommended by patching compound manufacturer. 4. Finish to match adjoining work. 5. Strike off excess mortar at surface. 6. If defects in color and texture of surface cannot be repaired, remove and replace Iconcrete. B. Surface Repairs for Concrete Surfaces to Receive Waterproofing Membrane: I 1. 2. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound. Fill cracks, pits (pinholes),and other voids detrimental to application of waterproofing system. 3. Remove loose particles,fins and projections, and foreign materials detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. 4. Patch tie holes and defects. C. Physical Barrier Protection: 1. Barricade area containing fresh concrete slabs, stairs, ramps and walks for 24 hours minimum. 2. Cover fresh concrete with plywood where exposed to public, pedestrian, and animal traffic. END OF SECTION I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Precast Architectural Concrete: 03 4500 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes architectural precast concrete caps and stair treads. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements 2. Section 03 3000: Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Section 04 7300: Manufactured Stone Masonry 4. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal I5. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS I A. Structural Performance: Precast architectural concrete units and connections shall withstand design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water- I absorption tests. C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of precast architectural concrete units, Iincluding the following: 1. Unit shapes, plans, elevations, sections, dimensions, and locations. I a. Show location of each unit on plan and elevation by same identification mark to be placed on panel. b. Show relationship of units to adjacent construction. I 2. Reinforcement,joint, and connection details. 3. Location, dimensional tolerances, and details of anchorage devices that are embedded in to, or attached to, structure or other construction. 4. Welded connections by AWS standard symbols. iD. Samples: For type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces with architectural finish. 1. Sample: 12 inches by 12 inches, of appropriate thickness,with sealer, representative I of the proposed face mix. E. Material Test Reports: For aggregates. IG. Material Certificates:for the following,from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. I 2. Reinforcing materials. 3. Admixtures. H. Welder certificates. , I I iLRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Precast Architectural Concrete: 03 4500 I December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications:A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast concrete I units to comply with performance requirements. 1. , Responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a professional engineer registered in the state in which Project is located. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and the design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook- Precast and Prestressed Concrete." C. Quality Control Standard: Comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." D. Comply with requirements contained in current edition of State Building Code. E. Welder Qualifications: Use welders certified by AWS in state in which Project is located for I structural welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. 1.5 SAMPLE PANELS I A. After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a sample unit for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural feature, finish,and texture. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material in same position as I - during storage. B. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil,to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion,warping or other physical damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to I other construction without delaying the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTSI 2.1 FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Olympian Precast, Inc. 2. Michaels Precast Concrete LLC. 3. Knife River Corporation. 4. NW Precast. B. Other Fabricators: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type I or III, gray, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fly Ash:ASTM C 618, Class C or F. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Precast Architectural Concrete: 03 4500 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 2. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of Isame type, brand,and mill source. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117,ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. 2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: 1 1. Steel:ASTM A 615, grade 60, deformed. 2. Low-Alloy(Weldable) Steel:ASTM A 706, deformed. 3. Galvanized Bars: Deformed,ASTM A 767, Class II zinc coated, hot dipped. I B. Welded Wire Fabric: I 1. 2. Plain Steel:ASTM A 185,fabricated from galvanized steel wire into sheets. Deformed Steel:ASTM A 497. J. Reinforcing for Precast Concrete Treads: Reinforce with galvanized, welded wire fabric,2 by I 2 inches by 0.062 inch diameter wire; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82, except for minimum wire size. 2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS IA. Carbon Steel: 1. Shapes and Plates:ASTM A 36. I 2. Headed Studs:ASTM A 108. B. Carbon Steel Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and item indicated for I galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot dip process according to ASTM A 123, after fabrication, and ASTM A 153, as applicable. 1. Galvanized Repair Paint: DOD-0-21035A, or SSPC-Paint 20. IC. Stainless Steel: 1. Plates:ASTM A 666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application. 2. Bolts and Nuts:ASTM F 593, alloy 304 or 316. 3. Headed Studs:ASTM A 276. 2.5 RECEIVERS FOR FLASHING I A. Stainless Steel: Formed, 28 gage. I2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement,ASTM C 150,Type I, and clean sand,ASTM C 144. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for Iplacement and hydration. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application. I I iLRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Precast Architectural Concrete: 03 4500 December 11, 2015 Page 4 2.7 CONCRETE MIXES A. Design mixes to achieve required strengths prepared by independent testing agency or qualified personnel at precast architectural concrete fabricator's plant. 1. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218. B. Normal Weight Concrete Face and Backup Mixes and Stair Treads: Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data method according to ACI 211.1, with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): Minimum of 5000 psi. 2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.45. 2. Air-Entraining Admixture:Add at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Mold Fabrication:Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete placement operations and temperature changes for prestressing operations. B. Furnish loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast architectural concrete units to supporting and adjacent structure. 1. Fabricate with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design - I requirements. C. Cast-in reglets,slots, holes,and other accessories to receive reglets,flashings, and other similar work as indicated. D. Reinforcement:Comply with recommendations in CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"and PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. I E. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. F. Place concrete in continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. 1. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 for measuring, mixing,transporting, and placing concrete. 2. Cure concrete according to requirements of PCI MNL 117. G. Discard precast concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken,spalled, stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are approved by Architect. H. Fabricate precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items. I. Unit Identification: I 1. Mark each precast concrete unit to correspond to identification mark on shop drawings for unit location. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Precast Architectural Concrete:03 4500 1 December 11, 2015 Page 5 2. Mark each precast concrete unit with date cast. I2.9 FINISHES A. Manufacture member faces free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects with corners, I including false joints, uniform, straight,and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of precast concrete units to match approved sample and as follows: 1. Smooth-Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of excessive air voids, sand streaks, I and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture. 2. Broom Finish at Stair Treads: Slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom. I2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing:Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 Irequirements. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance. I1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square and true within the allowable erection tolerances, maintaining horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width Ias erection progresses. 1. Allowable Erection Tolerances: Non-cumulative in accordance with PCI MNL 117, Appendix I. IC. Set non-load bearing units dry without mortar, attaining specified joint dimension with lead, steel, plastic or asbestos cement spacing shims. I D. Anchor precast concrete units in place, completing drypacked joints, grouting sleeves and pockets,and/or placing cast-in-place concrete joints as indicated in approved erection drawings. 1 3.3 REPAIR A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of precast concrete units to match color,texture, and Iuniformity of surrounding precast architectural concrete if permitted by Architect. 3.4 CLEANING IA. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt and stains. 1. Wash and rinse according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. I 2. Use cleaning materials or processes that will not change character of exposed concrete finishes. END OF SECTION ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Cement Underlayment: 03 5413 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes gypsum based, self-leveling cement underlayment for interior floors over Iwood substrate. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 4500:Quality Control, for testing and quality assurance. 2. Section 06 1600:Sheathing,for substrate. 3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. IB. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depth of gypsum underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. I C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certifying that products are compatible. D. Evidence that installer is approved by product manufacturer. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer shall be currently approved in writing by manufacturer of specified material,and is experienced in applications of gypsum cement underlayment products specified. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS IA. Comply with requirements of FM, UL or Warnock Hersey for gypsum cement underlayment as a component of a fire-resistant rated assembly. 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. I1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity,ventilation,and other conditions affecting gypsum cement underlayment performance. I B. Close area to traffic during gypsum cement underlayment application and for time period after application recommended by manufacturer. 1.7 COORDINATION IA. Coordinate application of gypsum cement underlayment with requirements of floor covering products, including adhesives,to assure compatibility of products I I ILRS Architects, Inc. t Tigard Apartments Gypsum Cement Underlayment:03 5413 December 11, 2015 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. Maxxon Corporation; Gyp-Crete 2000 Self-Leveling Floor Underlayment. 2. United States Gypsum Company; Levelrock Brand Floor Underlayment 2500. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 MATERIALS A. Underlayment: Gypsum cement based, self-leveling product that can be applied in uniform I thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Gypsum Cement: Manufacturer's proprietary formulation. I 2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2500 psi at 28 days when tested according to modified ASTM C 472. B. Aggregate:Well-graded,washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by gypsum cement underlayment manufacturer. 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. 111 D. Primer: Product of gypsum cement underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. E. Sealer: Provide sealer as suitable for specified floor finish as recommended by applied floor f finish manufacturer and gypsum cement underlayment manufacturer. F. Sound Deadening Mat: I 1. Maxxon Corporation: Acousti-Mat II. 2. United States Gypsum Company: Levelrock SRM-25 Sound Mat. 3. United States Gypsum Company: Levelrock SAM-N25 Sound Attenuation Mat. G. Reinforcement Mesh: Galvanized, diamond mesh metal lath, 3.4 lb/sq.yd., complying with ASTM C 847. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates for conditions affecting performance of gypsum cement underlayment including substrate moisture content, and the following: 1. Verify wood subfloor complies with APA maximum span/joist criteria with deflection limitation of L/360 for design loads. 2. If substrate is inadequate in any way to receive self-leveling gypsum cement underlayment to form a complete and sound system, do not proceed and notify Architect immediately in writing. 3. Protect work of others from damage; do not start installation until gypsum board finish on walls is in place. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Cement Underlayment: 03 5413 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 IB. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Preparation: Prepare and clean substrate according to gypsum cement underlayment manufacturer's instructions for substrate indicated. 1. Fill all deep depressions and cracks. I 2. Clean substrate of loose material, dust, oil, grease, paint water soluble material and other contaminants. 3. Fill substrate voids to prevent gypsum cement underlayment from leaking. IB. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair gypsum cement underlayment bond and remove sanding dust. IC. Adhesion Tests:After substrate preparation,test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. I3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply gypsum cement underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. I 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. I 2. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate for Ibonding of sound deadening mat to substrate. C. Install sound deadening mat according to manufacturer's written instructions. I1. Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate through the sound control mat. D. Apply recommended primer to sound deadening mat for bonding of gypsum cement underlayment to sound deadening mat. IE. Place reinforcement mesh loosely laid over sound deadening mat. Do not fasten or penetrate through mat. Overlap reinforcement mesh at seams. I F. Apply gypsum cement underlayment to form a uniform, level surface, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I 1. Thickness: Minimum 1-1/2 inch. 2. Tolerances: Finish level to within 1/8 inch per 10 ft. G. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 1. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. I I ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Gypsum Cement Underlayment: 03 5413 December 11, 2015 Page 4 3.4 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF APPLIED FLOOR FINISH A. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including ' areas that emit a"hollow'sound when tapped. 1. Patch cracks with a compound approved by gypsum cement underlayment 111 manufacturer. 2. Smooth patches to provide a finish surface acceptable for applied finish floor. B. Sealer: Seal floors with product recommended by manufacturer of hydraulic cement underlayment. 1. Verify with manufacturer of carpeting or resilient finish flooring that selected sealer with not inhibit installation of finish flooring. C. Do not install floor covering over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. I 3.5 CLEANING,ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces and repair where damaged. I B. Protect gypsum cement underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period until floor finishes are applied. END OF SECTION 1 I I 1 I 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Concrete Unit Masonry: 04 2200 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY Section load-bearing concrete unit masonry. IA. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 2. Section 09 9625: Non-Sacrificial Anti-Graffiti Coating,for applied coating. 3. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of unit masonry and accessory specified. IB. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Unit Masonry: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with IACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." C. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. I Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Concrete units. Include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls I within specified tolerance. 2. Cementitious materials.Include brand,type,and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. IC. Samples: Submit two concrete masonry units of each size,color, design and texture specified. I D. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Concrete units. Include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerance. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand,type, and name of manufacturer. I 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Use skilled masons trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with , requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. I B. Source Limitations for Masonry Materials: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend with the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through from one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry,from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Concrete Unit Masonry: 04 2200 December 11, 2015 Page 2 D. Prism Tests: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1314. 1. Prior to construction, submit Data of a minimum of 30 previous prism tests on 1 samples with similar mix designs for mortars, grout and unit members with an average strength of design f'm x 1.333 psi a. If 30 previous tests are not available,test prior to construction a minimum of 5 prisms ungrouted and 5 prisms grouted for 28 days to verify f'm. 2. During construction prepare and test 3 grouted prisms and 3 ungrouted prisms per every 5000 square feet of wall. E. Comply with Concrete Masonry Association TEK Information Series, and Masonry Standard ACI 530.1, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for reinforcement fabrication. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS , A. Comply with requirements of Chapter 21 of the Oregon Structural Specialty Code. 1. Comply with seismic design requirements of Oregon Structural Specialty Code Section 2106 for Seismic Design Category D. B. Structural masonry requires special inspection per State Building Code. , 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store unit masonry above ground on level platforms in a dry location. ' B. If not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides with waterproof sheeting to protect against wetting prior to use. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. , C. Protect from damage. D. Store cementitious materials above ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. 111 E. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. F. Store unit masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Protection of Unit Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. Work under cover during rainy weather. 1. Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining face of exposed masonry. Immediately , remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11,2015 Concrete Unit Masonry: 04 2200 Page 3 B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained Iin ACI 530.1, in State Building Code Section 2104.3, and the following: 1. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, unless using special procedures approved by Architect. I 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 3. Do not build on frozen substrates. 4. Remove and replace units masonry damaged by frost of by freezing conditions. I C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1. D. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in ambient air temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F in shade,with relative humidity less than 50 percent. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: IA. Concrete Unit Masonry Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1. Mutual Materials Co. I2. Willamette Graystone. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. I 2.2 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. Hollow concrete unit masonry conforming to ASTM C 90, Grade N, Type 1,and as follows: 1 1. Weight Classification: Medium weight. 2. Unit Compressive Strength:ASTM C 90; Minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 Days. I 3. Size: Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than 8 by 16 inch nominal face dimension, unless otherwise noted,with unit widths as shown. 4. Face Texture: Split face. 5. Color: Natural gray. IB. Provide accessory shapes including cap as indicated or otherwise required. I 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type I. Provide natural color. IB. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C 207; Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. ID. Aggregate for Mortar:ASTM C 144. E. Aggregate for Grout:ASTM C 404. IF. Water: Potable. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Concrete Unit Masonry:04 2200 I December 11, 2015 Page 4 2.4 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing; comply with requirements in Drawings. I 1. Bars: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 996, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated, using deformed bars for number 3 and larger. 2. Bending:ACI 318. B. Unit Masonry Joint Reinforcing, General:ASTM A 951 and IBC 2103.11; mill galvanized steel wire for interior walls and hot-dip galvanized steel wire for exterior walls. I 1. Wire Size for Side Rods, Cross Rods, and Veneer Ties: 0.148 inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated. I 2. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs,and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Unit Masonry Joint Reinforcing for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. I 2.5 UNIT MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying I with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805, or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406. B. Compressible Filler:ASTM D 1056,Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; Neoprene premolded filler I strips compressible up to 35 percent. C. Sealant:As specified in Section 07 9200; color as selected by Architect. I D. Non-Sacrificial Anti-Graffiti Coating:As specified in Section 09 9625. 2.6 MASONRY CLEANER I A. Proprietary acidic cleaner for new masonry; one of the following,or approved. 1. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.;202 New Masonry Detergent. I 2. EaCo Chem; NMD 80. 3. ProSoCo, Inc.; Sure Klean Custom Masonry Cleaner. 2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES I A. Mortar: 1. Type S, in accordance with ASTM C 270, BIA Technical Notes 8A, and IBC 2103.8, 1 Proportion Specification. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength f'm at 28 Days: 1,800 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C 270. I 3. Proportion Specifications or approved: a. 1 part portland cement to 1/4 part hydrated lime and 3 parts sand by volume. b. Accurately measure; shovel measurement not allowed. II c. For mineral oxide pigments, do not use more than 10 percent. 4. Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not less than 3 minutes, using only sufficient water to produce a mortar that is spreadable and of a workable consistency. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Concrete Unit Masonry: 04 2200 I December 11, 2015 Page 5 5. Retemper mortar with water as required to maintain high plasticity. Ia. Discard and do not use mortar that is unused after 2-1/2 hours following initial mixing. IB. Grout: 1. Fine or coarse grout in accordance with ASTM C 476 and IBC Table 2103.10. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength f'm at 28 Days: 2,000 psi. when tested in accordance I3. with ASTM C 1019. Provide"fine grout"or"coarse grout"as required by job conditions for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 4. Proportion Specifications or approved: I a. For"fine grout", one part portland cement to 2-1/4 parts minimum to 3 parts maximum of damp loose sand, with sufficient water to achieve fluid I b. consistency. Provide water-reducing admixture. For"coarse grout", one part portland cement to 3 parts maximum of damp loose sand to 2 parts coarse aggregate, with sufficient water to achieve fluid consistency. ' c. "Fluid consistency" is interpreted as meaning as fluid as possible for pouring in place without segregation. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify conditions comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades as required to assure proper and adequate provision in work of Ithose trades for interface with Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION IA. Install Work of this Section in accordance with construction documents and manufacturer's or referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. B. General: I1. Lay only dry masonry units. 2. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units. I 3. Set units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced and joints uniform. 4. Clean top surface of foundation free from dirt, debris, and laitance. 5. Accurately fit units to plumbing, ducts, openings, and other interfaces, neatly patching I holes. 6. Keep walls continually clean, preventing grout and mortar stains. 7. Provide control joints where shown, or where not shown,at 32 feet o.c. maximum where no change occurs in wall plane. Do not exceed isolated masonry panel's length I to height(aspect) ratio of 1-1/2 maximum. a. Install sealant at control joints. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Concrete Unit Masonry: 04 2200 I December 11,2015 Page 6 C. Bond: Unless otherwise shown, provide running bond with vertical joints located at center of masonry units in alternate course below and above. I D. Do not use chipped,cracked, or broken units. If such units are discovered in finished work, Architect will require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to Owner. I E. Laying up: 1. Place units in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints. Joints to be uniform, I approximately 3/8 inch wide. 2. Align vertical cells of hollow units to maintain a clear and unobstructed system of fluee. I 3. Where temporarily stop work, rack back each course;toothing not permitted. Hold racking to an absolute minimum. 4. At exterior walls, butter heads of both units where adjacent,to make wall watertight. 5. Units to be firm when in place. I 6. Loose or crooked units to be removed and replaced. F. Reinforcing: 1. Provide reinforcing as shown in Drawings,fully embedded in grout and not in mortar I or mortar joints. 2. Place vertical reinforcing in center of cells, unless otherwise noted. I 3. Refer to Drawings reinforcing requirements. 4. Do not place electrical boxes, conduit and plumbing in cells that contain reinforcing. 5. Provide required metal accessories to ensure adequate alignment of steel during grout filling operations. I G. Tooling: 1. Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface. I 2. Unless otherwise noted, provide joints of"concave" profile. 3. Tool joints to make weathertight. H. Pointing and Sealant: I 1. Pointing: Remove mortar fins and loose mortar. 2. Fill cracks and bee holes. 3. Provide 1/4 inch wide minimum by 3/4 inch deep continuous bead of sealant with I backer rod around openings in masonry, unless otherwise noted. 3.4 GROUTING A. Perform grouting in accordance with provisions of governing building code. 1. Grout only cells containing reinforcing or fastening devices, unless otherwise I indicated. Fill cells solid. 2. Install expansion and anchor bolts in a location that leaves a minimum 3 inch distance to edge of masonry unit and a minimum clearance of 1-1/2 inches to center of cross web. I 3. Keep cells clean and free of mortar droppings before pour. 4. Maximum grout pour height is 4 ft. ("low lift"), unless otherwise approved. 5. Consolidate grout at time of pour by puddling with a mechanical vibrator,filling cells I and then reconsolidating late by puddling before plasticity is lost. I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Tigard Apartments Concrete Unit Masonry: 04 2200 December 11, 2015 Page 7 3.5 CLEANING,ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Inspection and adjustment: Upon completion of Work of this Section, make a thorough inspection of installed masonry and verify that units have been installed in accordance with provisions of this Section, make necessary adjustments. B. Protect against dislodgement until mortar has set. ' C. Protect work of others from damage. D. Clean,without damaging,surfaces of masonry as required for proper application of specified finishes. Repair as necessary. 1 1. Mask to protect materials that could be damaged by cleaning agents. 2. Do not use muriatic or other acidic type cleaning solutions unless specifically approved. 3. Follow cleaning solution manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Manufactured Stone Fabrications: 04 7300 ' December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes manufactured stone fabrications for exterior application. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2200: Concrete Unit Masonry,for substrate. ' 2. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for building framing. 3. Section 06 1600: Sheathing,for wood sheathing substrate. 4. Section 07 2800:Air/Water Barriers,for air/water barrier. 5. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants 6. Section 09 9625: Non-Sacrificial Anti-Graffiti Coatings,for applied coating. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data,for each type of material and product specified. B. Manufacturer's installation instructions. ' C. Samples: Submit 2 samples, minimum 24 inches by 24 inches in size to show full range of color and size of manufactured stone fabrications. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Association Installation Guidelines and manufacturer's instructions. B. Applicator: Company experienced in installation of manufactured stone fabrications of type specified,with five years experience, under present name. 1.4 MOCKUP A. Erect one 4 foot by 4 foot panels at location on site where directed. ' B. Illustrate field pattern of manufactured stone fabrications,field cutting of units where required, and color and tooling of joints. ' C. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockup unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site, store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' B. Store mortar and other moisture-sensitive materials in protected enclosures; handle by methods that avoid exposure to moisture. ' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, ' and for 48 hours after completion of work. B. Protect materials from rain, moisture, and freezing temperatures prior to,during, and for 48 hours after completion of work. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Manufactured Stone Fabrications:04 7300 December 11,2015 Page 2 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide special manufacturer's 2 year warranty to cover labor and materials to replace ' defective materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: , 1. Eldorado Stone LLC. 2. Coronado Stone Products. 3. Owens Corning: Cultured Stone. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stone Type: ' 1. Basis-of-Design for Type and Color Match: Coronado Stone Products, Quick Stack, Antique Cream. B. Mortar: 1. Portland Cement,ASTM C 150, Type 1 or masonry cement (Type N),ASTM C 91. ' 2. Masonry sand. 3. Lime:ASTM C 207 4. Iron oxide pigments. C. Metal Lath: Provide one of the following products with an ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating: 1. 2.5 lb., self furring, expanded diamond mesh metal lath complying with ASTM C 847. , 2. Minimum 18 gauge woven wire mesh complying with ASTM C 1032. D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and the following: 1. Wood Studs: Length to achieve 1 inch penetration into studs. E. Rainscreen Drainage System: High density polyethylene sheet, dimpled and grooved to provide drainage and ventilation on both sides of sheet,with factory pre-installed polypropylene fabric mortar screen. 1. "Delta-Dry Stucco&Stone," manufactured by Cosella-Dorken Products, Inc. F. Air/Water Barrier: Specified in Section 07 2800, "Air/Water Barriers." , G. Zinc and Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Accessories: Fabricate the following from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,ASTM A 653, G60 zinc coating. 1. Foundation Weep Screed; Minimum 0.019 inch thickness with minimum 3-1/2 inch vertical attachment flange. H. Non-Sacrificial Anti-Graffiti Coating:As specified in Section 09 9625. ' 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Manufactured Stone Fabrications: 04 7300 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 2.3 MIXES IA. Mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 270,Type N. 1 B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Sheathed Surfaces: I1. Install air/water barrier over sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated in Section 07 2800, "Air/Water Barriers." 2. Install rainscreen drainage system over air/water barrier in accordance with Imanufacturer's instructions. . a. Install with stud side facing the air/water barrier. b. Tightly place side laps and end laps to the adjacent roll. Do not overlap or I c. interlock sheets. Install sheets without gaps, large wrinkles, creases, or tears. d. Secure to substrate at edges and in the field of the sheet using fasteners and I methods recommended by manufacturer. Fasteners must penetrate into solid backing or sheathing and where possible into studs. e. Do not seal or block rainscreen at top or bottom of installation. Leave a minimum 3/8 inch air gap open for ventilation and proper performance of the I f. wall system. Provide drop leg shielding of ventilation area to prevent rainwater intrusion due to wind. I 3. Apply metal lath,attach with galvanized nails or staples, 6 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on centers horizontally. 4. Wrap air/water barrier and metal lath a minimum of 16 inches around all outside and inside corners. . I3.2 APPLICATION General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products IA. and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Apply mortar 1/2 inch thick to lath or dampened concrete surfaces, covering a maximum of 10 I square feet at one time. 1. When mortar is thumbprint hard, scratch surface horizontally to create mortar scratch coat. I 2. 3. Dampen scratch coat before applying units. Apply mortar 1/2 inch thick to cover back of units. 4. Press units firmly into position in soft mortar bed, wiggle and apply slight pressure to unit to ensure firm bonding causing mortar to extrude slightly around edges of units. IC. Install pre-fitted manufactured stone fabrications textures, units tight against each other with no allowance for mortar joints. I1. Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths alternated. D. Do not install manufactured stone fabrications over movement joints. I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Manufactured Stone Fabrications: 04 7300 December 11, 2015 Page 4 E. Plan work to minimize job site cutting. 1. Perform cutting with proper tools to provide uniform edges;take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges. F. Remove excess mortar; do not allow mortar to set up on face of units. 1 1. Point and tool joints before mortar has set. 2. Clean and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Apply non-sacrificial anti graffiti coating to manufactured stone fabrications as specified in Section 09 9625. 1. Verify that proposed product is acceptable to manufacturer of manufactured stone fabrications for application on products specified in this Section. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Metal Fabrications:05 5000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section includes metal fabrications as follows, but not limited to: IA. 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops 2. Miscellaneous steel framing. 3. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. I4. Steel gates, gates frames and supports. B. Products Furnished, but not installed, under this section include the following: I1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and other items cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 1 C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements. 2. Section 01 4500: Quality Control,for independent testing and inspection procedures. I 3. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete,for steel items embedded in concrete. 4. Section 04 2200: Concrete Unit Masonry,for installing steel items embedded in CMU. 5. Section 09 9000: Painting,for metal finishes. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For grout, paint products, and each manufactured item specified. IB. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions, fabrication details, installation, anchorage, and templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. Indicate welds by American Welding Society symbols. 1 C. Welder certificates certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in"Quality Assurance"Article. D. Delegated Design Submittals: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: I1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." IB. Welder Qualifications: 1. Use welders certified by AWS and State in which project is located,for structural welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. IC. Comply with requirements/recommendations of American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications for design,fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings and AISC manual of steel construction. I I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Special inspection is required by State Building Code for structural welding and drilled epoxy I anchor bolts of this Section; Refer to Section 01 4500. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Deliver materials to job site with markings corresponding to markings shown on approved Shop Drawings. B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual location of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish 1 dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorage for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorage, including sleeves, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS-GENERAL I A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without pitting, seam marks, mill markings, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel plates, shapes and bars:ASTM A 36. B. Sheet steel:ASTM A 366. C. Gratings:ANSI A202.1. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls 1 1. Select fasteners of type, grade, and class suited for use intended. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head,ASTM A 307, Grade A;with hex nuts;and, where indicated,flat washers. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Fabrications:05 5000 111 December 11, 2015 Page 3 C. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head, annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts and,where indicated,flat washers;ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts.Alloy I Group 1 (A1). II ir D. Anchor Bolts:ASTM F 1554,Grade 36. II 1. Provide zinc coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is galvanized. I E. Expansion Anchors:Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. I 1. Provide Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5a. F. Cast-In-Place Anchors in Concrete:Anchors capable of sustaining,without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 1 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. G. Lag Bolts:ASME 818.2.1. IH. Machine Screws:ASME B18.6.3. I. Wood Screws: Flat head,ASME B18.6.1. IJ. Plain Washers: Round,ASME B18.22.1. K. Lock Washers: Helical spring type,ASME 818.21.1. 2.5 GROUT I A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:ASTM C 1107,factory packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C 1107. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout. b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout. c. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928. d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout. e. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout. 2.6 WELDING IA. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. I2.7 PRIMER A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Provide primers specified in Section 09 9000. IB. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint-20. IC. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 December 11,2015 Page 4 2.8 FABRICATION 1 A. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Use connections that maintain structural value of jointed pieces. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints,flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds wherever possible. 1. Use Phillips flat-headed countersink heads for exposed connections, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Located joints where least conspicuous. 3. Cut abutting members to fit with full bearing contact. 4. Form elbows and bends to uniform radii,free from buckles and twists, and with finished surfaces smooth. 111 5. Where exposed to weather,fabricate seams and other connections to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 6. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Provide 3/16 inch minimum fillet welds, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 4. Remove welding flux immediately. 5. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. G. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. 1. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates,and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. 3. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. H. Metal Gates and Supports: Provide metal gates and supports as indicated in Drawings. ■ 1. Galvanize gates and supports in exterior locations. 2.9 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from dimensions shown: I 1. Overall length with both ends finished: 1/32 inch. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 5 2. Overall length of member without finished ends: a. For members up to 30 ft. long: 1/16 inch b. For members over 30 ft. long: 1/8 inch iB. Twists, bends, and kinks are not allowed. 2.10" FINISHES 0 A. General: Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123 for steel and iron products,and ASTM A 153 for steel and iron hardware. I C. Shop prime uncoated steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Within 2 inches of surfaces to be field welded. ,Il D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated steel surfaces to comply with minimum I requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors: SSPC-SP-6"Commercial Blast Cleaning." I2. Interior: SSPC-SP-3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Shop Priming:Apply one coat primer with a uniform dry film thickness of minimum 2.0 mils. 1. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide State Building Code required tests and inspections. 1 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, "Quality Control." B. Shop-welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to AWS D1.1. I Inspection procedures. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. I D. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL IA. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;with edges and surfaces plumb, level, true, and free from rack; and measured from established I lines and levels. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 Page 6 December 11,2015 B. Field weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. sed C. Field Welding blended so nooroughness shows after finishing andf Exposed Connections: Finish contour welds contourof we ded surface matches that of adjacent surface. ti D. Do not weld,cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge drilled or punched holes with a burning torch. 11 F. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 1. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors. 2. Provide standard plate washers under bolt heads and nuts. 3. Do not thread bolts at shear plane. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' instructions and requirements indicated in Shop Drawings. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts.Tighten anchor bolts after bearing members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing place before packing with grout. 1. Pack nonshrink, nonmetallic grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. TouchupImmediately Painting: after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and I abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION I I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i I Tigard Apartments Aluminum Railings: 05 5210 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Proprietary aluminum exterior railing system. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements. I2. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications,for non-framing steel support fabrications. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS I A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable - design working stresses of materials based on the following: 1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of Igravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: 11 a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 1 2. Top Rail of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 lbf/ft. applied vertically downward. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. I3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. applied horizontally. Ic. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Product Data: For manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 1. Include Product Data for grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. IB. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of railings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. I 1. For installed railings indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the Engineer responsible for their preparation who is registered in State in which Project is located. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Aluminum Railings: 05 5210 December 11,2015 Page 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications:A firm experienced in producing railings similar to those indicated I for this Project. 1. Design and fabrication is responsibility of fabricator to meet all building codes applicable to Work of this Section. B. NAAMM Railing Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 521, "Pipe Railing Systems Manual," for railings, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. I C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum." I D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for railings for stairs required to be accessible for the physically disabled. II 1.5 STORAGE A. Store railings in a dry,well-ventilated,weathertight place. I 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicated measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 SCHEDULING 1 A. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Proprietary Aluminum Exterior Railing System: 1. Sapa Group; Series 200, modified as indicated in Drawings. i B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS 11 A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Aluminum:Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extruded Bar and Tube:ASTM B 221,alloy 6063-T5. 2. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube:ASTM B 429, alloy 6063-T6. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments . Aluminum Railings: 05 5210 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 3. Drawn Seamless Tube:ASTM B 210, alloy 6063-T832. I 4. Plate and Sheet:ASTM B 209,alloy 6061-T6. 5. Die and Hand Forgings:ASTM B 247, alloy 6061-T6. 6. Castings:ASTM B 26, alloy A356-T6. C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide formed or cast brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage, Iunless concealed anchorage is shown or indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS IA. Fasteners for Anchoring Aluminum Railings to Other Construction: 1. Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and I capable of withstanding design loads. 2. Use fasteners fabricated from Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. IB. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise I indicated. 2. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other Work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are standard fastening method for handrail and railing indicated I 4. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. I2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. II2.5 FABRICATION A. Assemble railings in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. I 1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. IB. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending. 1. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform I 2. curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain profile of member throughout entire bend without buckling,twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following: 1 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 111 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Aluminum Railings: 05 5210 December 11, 2015 Page 4 3. At exposed connections,finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. D. Mechanical Connections: Fabricate railings by connecting members with railing ii manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 2. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this is manufacturer's standard splicing method E. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,and anchors to connect railing members to other construction. F. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. G. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. I Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components,as indicated,to receive finish hardware, screws, and III similar items. I. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources. J. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner. K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch or less. M. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for I recommendations for applying and designating finishes to exposed aluminum surfaces. B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41/A44 (Architectural Class I, integrally colored coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color: Black. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine gypsum board assemblies, and other finish wall assemblies,where reinforced to receive anchors,to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Aluminum Railings:05 5210 December 11, 2015 Page 5 A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 1 B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails and railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured I from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. IC. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. I D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. E. Corrosion Protection:Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum alloys that will be contact with grout, concrete,wood, or dissimilar materials,with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS IA. Welded Connections: 1. Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. I 2. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication"Article whether welding is performed in shop or in field. • B. Nonwelded Connections: I1. Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. 2. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. 3. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to Imatch finish of handrails and railings. 3.4 ANCHORING RAILINGS IA. Anchor posts to floor type as required by conditions, bolted to supporting members. 1. Use fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. IB. Anchor rail ends to wall substrate as required sleeves or flanges connected to rail ends and anchored to supporting structure. IC. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Provide bracket with 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. I 2. Locate brackets as indicated, or at spacing required to support structural loads if not indicated. 3. For wood stud walls, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. I Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3.5 CLEANING I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Aluminum Railings: 05 5210 December 11, 2015 Page 6 A. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective 111 coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. ENDF 0 SECTION 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Rough Carpentry:06 1000 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes, but not limited to,the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber and timber. 1 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Nails, bolts,screws,framing anchors and other rough hardware required to perform Irough carpentry. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1500:Wood Decking,for exposed exterior wood decking. 2. Section 06 1600: Sheathing,for wood structural panels. 3. Section 06 1733:Wood I-Joists. 4. Section 061753: Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 5. Section 06 1800: Glued-Laminated Construction 6. Section 06 2000: Finish Carpentry,for blocking and nailer requirements for exterior exposed wood. I 7. Section 07 2800:Air/Water Barriers 8. Section 07 3113:Asphalt Shingles,for roof sheathing water-resistive barrier and underlayment. 9. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal,for flexible membrane flashing installed at framed openings. 10. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes related to wood framing. I 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. IB. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. C. Lumber grading, inspection, and treatment agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference Ithem, include the following: 1. ALSC:American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated. 2. APA:American Plywood Association. I 3. AWPB:The American Wood-Preservers'Association. 4. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 5. WCLIB:West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. I 6. WWPA:Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. 1. Indicate species and grade for each use and design values approved by the ALSC IBoard of Review. B. Wood data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer. Ii. Include certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. 2. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Rough Carpentry: 06 1000 December 11 2015 Page 2 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. C. Research or evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating compliance with State Building Code for the following: I 1. Metal framing anchors. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Power-actuated fasteners. 111 4. Engineered wood products. 5. Wood preservative treated wood. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers,trained and experienced in necessary crafts,familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. 1 B. Codes and standards: 1. In addition to complying with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by Architect,comply with the following: a. WWPA Product Use Manual,for selection and use of products. b. American Forest&Paper Association, National Design Specifications for Wood Construction,for conformance with structural lumber and fastenings. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code, based on IBC, Chapter 23. B. Special inspections are required as stated in State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code, # based on IBC Section 106 and Chapter 17. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Protection: 1. Stack lumber flat, shored up off ground surface on blocks or raised platform. 2. Cover wood and protect from weather exposure. 3. Space between each bundle to provide air circulation. 4. Identify framing lumber as to grades, and store each grade separately from other grades. 5. Do not overload, in place,floor or roof framing with temporarily stored materials. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades to interface with work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS A. Lumber Standard: Comply with American Softwood Lumber Standard, DOC PS 20. 1. Dressing Requirements: Smooth four sides, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. • LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Rough Carpentry: 06 1000 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 2. Dimension Lumber Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent at time of dressing. IB. Engineered Wood Products: 1. Provide engineered wood products that are acceptable to authorities having I jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Stress Design: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, which meet or exceed those indicated. I2.2 GRADE AND TREATMENT STAMPS A. Identify each piece of framing lumber by grade stamp of WCLIB or WWPA. I B. Stamp each preservative treated wood piece with AWPB treatment stamp or furnish certificate of inspection with each shipment. I1. For exposed lumber to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificate of treatment compliance. I2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Provide lumber complying with requirements of AWPA Standard U1, Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the I ground. Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium. I 2. For exposed wood to receive stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, contain colorants, or adversely affect finishes. a 3. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. li B. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for wood. IC. Treat the following wood items: 1. Nailers, blocking, curbs, equipment support bases, stripping, rainscreen furring strips and similar items in associated with roofing,flashing and waterproofing. I 2 Floor plates, sills, blocking,furring, stripping and similar items in contact with concrete. D. Where possible, precut material before treatment.Apply field treatment complying with AWPA I M4 to cut surfaces. 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS IA. Concealed Dimension Lumber: Provide species of grades indicated: 1. Studs and Plates, Non-Load Bearing: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA,WCLIB Stud Grade I 2. Studs and Plates, Load Bearing: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB No.2&BTR 3. Joists, Rafters and Other Framing: Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB No. 2 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Rough Carpentry: 06 1000 December 11, 2015 Page 4 ill 4. Beams, Stringers and Posts: Douglas Fir NLGA,WWPA,WCLIB No. 1 I 5. Bucks, Blocking, Bridging, Douglas Fir NLGA,WWPA,WCLIB Stripping and Miscellaneous: No. 2 6. Sills, Plates, Nailing Pressure Treated Blocks and Other Wood in Contact Douglas Fir NLGA,WWPA,WCLIB with Concrete: No. 2 7. Concealed Boards for Furring. Common No. 3 WWPA Standard WCLIB 8. Concealed Decking Douglas Fir Commercial Dex B. Concealed Timber Framing: Provide species of grades indicated: I 1. Beams, Stringers and Posts: Douglas Fir NLGA,WWPA,WCLIB No. 1 C. Concealed Engineered Wood Lumber: 1. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Structural composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456. 2. Parallel Strand Lumber(PSL): Structural composite of wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following, or approved: a. iLevel,a Weyerhaeuser business. b. LP Building Products. D. Exposed Framing Lumber: Provide species and of grades indicated according to the ALSC 1 National Grading Rule provisions of the inspection agency listed. 1. Douglas Fir, Select Structural;WWPA. I 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: I 1. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified for material and manufacture 2. Where in contact with preservative treated wood, provide fasteners as follows: a. Interior Locations: Hot-dip, zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153. b. Exterior Locations and where stainless steel framing anchors are used: Type 304 stainless steel. 1111 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Rough Carpentry: 06 1000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 5 B. Screws for fastening: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by screw I manufacturer for material being fastened,with corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. IC. Nails, Brads,and Staples:ASTM F 1667. D. Wood Screws:ASME B18.6.1. I E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated,flat washers. F. Power Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. G. Powder Activated Drive Pins: Hilti or Ramset. I H. Expansion Anchors:Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. 1 1. Provide Carbon steel components,zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Attachment to Concrete: Kwik-Bolt or sleeve Anchor by Hilti, Red Head Wedge I 3. Anchor by Phillips, Trubolt or Dynabolt by Ramset, Parabolt by U.S.M. Attachment to Masonry: Sleeve Anchor by Hilti, Red head. Sleeve anchor by Phillips. 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS I A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. 1 1. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 coating Idesignation. 1. Where in contact with preservative treated wood: Provide G185 coating, or approved. 1 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Construction Adhesive/Glue: Per Industry Standard APA AFG-01. I 1. Adhesive for Gluing to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. I B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets:Glass-fiber resilient insulation 1 inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch, width to suit width of sill members. 1. Damp Locations: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch, width to suit width of sill Imembers. C. Water Repellant Preservative: NWWDA tested and accepted formulation containing 3-indo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active Iingredient. D. Separation Membrane:ASTM D 226, Type II, No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt. 1 11 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Rough Carpentry: 06 1000 December 11, 2015 Page 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL I A. Set rough carpentry to required level and lines,with members plumb,true to line, cut, and fitted. I 1. Produce joints that are tight,true,and well nailed. 2. Do not shim framing components. B. Provide and locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Framing Standard: I 1. Comply with American Forest&Paper Association's (AF&PA) "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Use only wood for framing that has been tested by independent testing agency as meeting specified moisture content requirements. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I 1. Provide metal post caps and bases at posts and columns. E. Do not splice structural framing members between supports. F. Provide minimum 2 inch nominal thick blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,fixtures, specialty items,trim,toilet accessories, cabinets,toilet compartments, plumbing,fire protection, mechanical, electrical equipment, Owner furnished equipment and the like. G. Provide fire blocking in stud spaces,furred spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated I using fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 inch nominal thickness and as follows: 1. Fire block concealed spaces of walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling I line of top story. 2. Fire block furred spaces of walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. H. Selection of Lumber Pieces: I 1. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects do not interfere with placing bolts or nails for proper connections. 2. Cut out and discard pieces with defects that render a piece unable to serve its intended function. 3. Lumber may be rejected by Architect,whether or not it has been installed,for excessive warp,twist, bow, crook, mildew,fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting. 4. Hand select exposed framing members for appearance and function. I. Provide field treatment complying with AW PA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative treated I lumber. J Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Oregon Structural Specialty Code, IBC Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule." I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Rough Carpentry: 06 1000 December 11, 2015 Page 7 2. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. IK. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. I 2. Make tight connections between members. 3. Install fasteners without splitting wood. I L. Hang mechanical equipment, mechanical and sprinkler piping larger than 2 inch diameter, or other items producing hanger load over 50 lbs. by a system approved by Architect. 1. Provide additional framing for any hanger producing a load over 200 lbs.to transfer I loads to main structural beams or walls. M. Wood Furring: Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings, and at each Ifloor and ceiling surface. Shim as required for tolerance of finished work. 1. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1 by 2 nominal size at 16 inches o.c. I N. Temporary Support:Adequately brace structure for wind and earthquake forces until floor, roof and wall have been secured. O. Insulate preservative treated materials and incompatible metal surfaces with No. 30 felt I separation membrane, or by painting each surface of contact with bituminous coating. P. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if I any 3.2 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION I A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates, except single top plate may be used for non-load bearing partitions. 1. Walls: Install 2 by 4 nominal studs at maximum 16 inches on center, unless otherwise Iindicated. a. Providecontinouminimumorizontnominal blocking at midheightstdsor of partitionsovmore12 thanfe8 feet high using members of 2 inch nominal thickness of same width as wall. I B. Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs except that 2 studs may be used for interior non-load bearing partitions. I C Frame openings with multiple studs and headers of member thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not less than Ithe following for indicated opening width: a. Openings 4 feet and less:4 inch nominal depth header. b. Openings 4 to 6 feet: 6 inch nominal depth header. Ic. Openings 6 to 10 feet: 8 inch nominal depth header. d. Openings 10 to 12 feet: 10 inch nominal depth header. 1 ILRS Architects., Inc. I Tigard Apartments Rough Carpentry:06 1000 December 11, 2015 Page 8 2. For load bearing walls, provide double jamb studs for openings 5 feet and less in width, and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. 3.3 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not I less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal,or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, use"U"type metal joist hangers. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4 feet. C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than one-third depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. D. Provide solid blocking of 2 inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. I E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girder, or partitions not less than 4 inches, or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2 inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. F. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. G. Under non-load bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. 3.4 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Stringer Size:As indicated in Drawings. 2. Stringer Material: Solid lumber. 3. Stringer Spacing:At least 3 stringers for each 36 inch width of stair. 3.5 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK I A. Remove split and warped framing prior to installation of finish materials. B. Adjust framing to comply with location and deflection requirements of National Design I Specifications for Wood Construction. END OF SECTION 111 I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Decking: 06 1500 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Exposed exterior wood decking. IB. Related Sections:The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for exposed framing, and furring, blocking, and I 2. other carpentry work not exposed to view. Section 09 9000: Painting, priming and back priming of finish carpentry. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, process and factory fabricated product. I 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. For water-borne-treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar in I material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A Delivery and Storage: I 1. 2. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber. 3. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. I1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior wood decking only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's I recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. 1.6 COORDINATION IA. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related items of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior woodwork can be supported and a installed as indicated. 11 PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of the following, or approved: I1. Exterior Wood, Inc.; Elite Decking. I LRS Architects, Inc. • I Tigard Apartments Wood Decking:06 1500 December 11,2015 Page 2 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,"and with I applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of I inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber,furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. C. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. I 2. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Comply with requirements of AW PA Standard U1; Use Category UC3b. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Pressure-impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Do not use chemical formulations that require incising. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Kiln-dry material after treatment to levels required for untreated material. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 5. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent. I B. Fabricate wood decking to dimensions, profiles,and details indicated. 2.5 EXTERIOR WOOD DECKING A. Wood Decking: Provide finished lumber complying with the following: 1. Species: Douglas Fir;WCLIB, or WWPA; Grade B or better, in accordance with manufacturer's standard product, 2. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Solid lumber stock. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Wood Decking: Provide deck screws or casing nails of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 1. Hot-dip zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153 or Type 304 stainless steel. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Decking: 06 1500 December 11,2015 Page 3 B. Anchors: Select type and size required for each substrate for secure anchorage,and select one of the following materials. I 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, Class G185 coating designation 1 2. Stainless Steel:ASTM A 666,Type 304. 2.7 FINISHES IA. General: Paint as specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting,"for exterior wood. B. Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of Iexterior finish carpentry.Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. 1. Apply sealer or primer in shop or in the field. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of wood decking. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 PREPARATION IA. Before installation, condition wood decking to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL IA. Do not use wood decking materials that are unsound,warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces or sizes. B. Install wood decking plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. I 1. Scribe and cut wood decking to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink nails,fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. I 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. C. Preservative Treated Wood:Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes Iaccording to AW PA M4. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use Ifine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Finish: Finish according to specified requirements. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Decking: 06 1500 December 11, 2015 Page 4 3.4 WOOD DECKING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as indicated in Drawings. I B. Match color and grain pattern across joints for members with transparent finish. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged or defective wood decking where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace wood decking. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood decking on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure wood decking is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION111 I I I I I 1 1 I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sheathing: 06 1600 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. I3. Subflooring. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood framingand plywood backing panels. 2. Section 07 2800:Air/Water Barriers,for air and water-resistant barriers installed over exterior wall sheathing. 3. Section 07 6500: Flexible Flashing,for flexible membrane flashing installed at framed I 4. openings. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes related to sheathing. I 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory fabricated product. I 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture II content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. I 3. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. Indicate physical properties of treated materials. IB. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with Building Code: 1. Preservative treated plywood. I 2. Fire-retardant treated plywood. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Codes and Standards: 1. In addition to complying with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by IArchitect, comply with the following: a. United States Product Standards, Standard for Construction and industrial I Plywood, PS1 ANSI A199.1. b. APA Plywood Design Specification APA Y510. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire resistance ratings, provide I materials and construction identical to those assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sheathing: 06 1600 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air I circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Wood Structural Panels: Provide APA performance rated panels complying with grade, span I rating, and exposure durability classification indicated, and the following: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. I 2. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 3. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWOOD I A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Provide plywood complying with requirements of AWPA Standard U1, Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground. Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals:Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency. C. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. I D. Treat the following wood items: 1. Plywood used with roofing,flashing, and waterproofing. 2 Plywood in contact with concrete or masonry. 3. Where indicated in Drawings. 2.3 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD I A. General: Provide plywood complying with requirements of AWPA Standard U1. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. Il 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT)for roof sheathing and where indicated. a. Interior Type A: Flame spread less than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 B. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. 1. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for I untreated material. C. Identify plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency. I 1. For exposed lumber to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificate of treatment compliance. I LRS Architects, Inc. I 11 Tigard Apartments Sheathing: 06 1600 December 11, 2015 Page 3 D. Treat the following wood items: I1. Roof and wall sheathing within 48 inches of fire or party walls. 2. Where indicated in Drawings. I E. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or approved: I 1. 2. Chemical Specialties, Inc.; D-Blaze. Dricon Fire Retardant Treated Wood. 3. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.; Pyro-Guard. I2.4 WOOD SHEATHING A. Wall Sheathing: 1 1. Wall Sheathing: C-D plywood, square edges, Exposure 1, Structural I. a. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16 o.c. I b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. 2. Oriented Strand Board: Use only with written approval of Owner with same APA ratings and thicknesses as indicated for plywood. IB. Roof Sheathing: 1. Roof Sheathing: C-C plywood, square edges, Exterior, Structural I. Ia. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20 o.c. b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. I 2. Exposed Roof Sheathing at Open Eaves: B-C Plywood,APA Appearance Grade Exterior. I a. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20 o.c. b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 3. Oriented Strand Board: Use only with written approval of Owner with same APA ratings and thicknesses as indicated for plywood. C. Subflooring: 1. Plywood Subflooring: C-D, T &G, Exposure 1, Structural I; single floor panels. a. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16 o.c. b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. I2. Oriented Strand Board Subflooring: Use only with written approval of Owner with same APA ratings and thicknesses as indicated for plywood. I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sheathing: 06 1600 December 11, 2015 Page 4 2.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Weather-Resistant Gypsum Wall Sheathing: 1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing,ASTM C 1177,Type X; 5/8 inch thickness, unless otherwise noted. a. CertainTeed Corporation.: "GlasRoc." b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: "Dens-Glass Gold." c. National Gypsum: "Gold Bond BRAND e2XP Extended Exposure Gypsum Sheathing". d. Temple-Inland: "GreenGlass Exterior Sheathing". e. United States Gypsum Company: "Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing". 2. Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Wail Sheathing,ASTM C 1278, Type X; 5/8 inch thickness, unless otherwise noted. a. United States Gypsum Company: "Fiberock Sheathing with Aqua-Tough." 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Roof and Wall Sheathing: Hot-dip zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153 or Type 304 1 stainless steel. C. Nails, Brads, and Staples:ASTM F 1667. D. Wood Screws:ASME B18.6.1. E. Power Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. F. Screws for fastening Oriented Strand Board: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened,with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 111 A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. B. Air/Water Barriers:Specified in Section 07 2800. 1 C. Flexible Membrane Flashing: Specified in Section 07 6500. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify edge blocking is in place and located properly prior to installation of sheathing. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sheathing: 06 1600 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 5 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work;fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative Itreated plywood. C Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: I1. ICC Evaluation Report ESR-1539 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on International Building Code. 1 D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will I 2. be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. 3. Install fasteners without splitting wood. I E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through complete assembly. I F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. I G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing, including air/water barriers specified in Section 07 2800, so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 1 1. Do not exceed manufacturer's exposure warranty, as follows: a. Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Board: 12 months b. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing Board: 6 months. I3.3 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION I A. Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction"for types of structural use panels and applications indicated. B. Subflooring,Wall, and Roof Sheathing: 1. Place wood sheathing panels with face grain perpendicular to supports at roof and vertically at walls, continuously over at least two supports, except where otherwise indicated. Stagger end joints 4 feet at adjacent panels. I 2. Adjust layout to eliminate sheathing pieces less than one foot wide; Minimum 24 inches wide at shear walls. 3. Center joints over supports. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 4. Back panel edges with minimum 2 by 4 wood blocking, or with same framing material I used for support of wall and roof sheathing. 5. Where underside of roof sheathing is exposed at eaves, place with Appearance Grade B veneer grade face down. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sheathing:06 1600 December 11, 2015 Page 6 6. Fastening Wood Sheathing for Walls: a. Nail to wood framing. Use minimum 8d common nail. 1 b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. c. Space nails at minimum of 6 inches o.c.at panel edges, and 12 inches o.c. in panel field. 111 d. Refer to Drawings for special nailing requirements. 7. Fastening Wood Sheathing for Roofs: a. Nail to wood framing. Use minimum 8d common nail size for nailing 5/8 inch thick wood sheathing; use minimum 10d common nail size for nailing 3/4 inch thick wood sheathing. 111 1) Use ring shank nails for nailing sheathing at roof corners. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. c. Space nails at minimum of 6 inches on center at panel edges, and in panel field. d. Refer to Drawings for special nailing requirements. 8. Fastening Wood Subflooring: I a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. c. Space nails at minimum of 6 inches o.c. at panel edges,and 12 inches o.c. in panel field. d. Refer to Drawings for special nailing requirements. 3.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. I 1. Apply 48 inch wide sheathing vertically. 2. Nail or screw to wood framing. 3. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. 4. Install boards with a 3/8 inch gap where non-load bearing construction abuts structural elements. 5. Install boards with a 1/4 inch gap where they abut masonry to prevent wicking. 6. Back panel edges with minimum 2 by 4 wood blocking, or with same framing material used for support of wall sheathing. 7. Fastening Gypsum Sheathing: a. Wood Framing: Space fasteners 8 inches o.c. in panel field and 4 inches at I perimeter. b. Set fasteners back 3/8 inch from edges and ends of units. c. Screws: Use No. 6,Type S or S-12,wafer or bugle head, self-tapping and corrosion resistant, 1-1/4 inches long. 3.5 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace sheathing panels with edges split or damaged by fasteners. I END OF SECTION 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood I-Joists: 061733 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL III1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Prefabricated wood web I-joists for floor framing. 2. Bridging, bracing and anchorage. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements 2. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for engineered wood products and wood bracing IIII material. 3. Section 06 1600: Sheathing,for floor sheathing. 4. Structural Drawings: Notes 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading and inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them, Iinclude the following: 1. APA:American Plywood Association. 2. WCLIB:West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 1 3. WWPA:Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Provide joist configurations, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing. I B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of joists, loads and joist cambers, and framed openings, signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State where Project is located. I 1. Submit design calculations, signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State where Project is located. C. Manufacturer's certification that joists have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's Idesign and installation requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Manufacturer/Fabricator: Company specializing in the manufacture of the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience;fabricating plant approved by ICBG certified testing agency. IB. Design joists and associated components under direct supervision of a professional engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State where Project is located. I C. Joist manufacturer to inspect all "I"joists after they have been erected including sheathing, bridging, and blocking associated with joists. Manufacturer to submit certificate to Architect that the inspection was made and that the joists are in acceptable condition and meet with the manufacturer's design and installation requirements. I I ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Wood I-Joists:06 1733 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code requirements for loads, seismic, and other governing criteria. I 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under applicable provisions of Section 06 1000, 1 "Rough Carpentry." B. Protect structural components from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated in Drawings and Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of the following, or approved: 1. iLevel by Weyerhaeuser(TJA). 2. Red Built, LLC (Red-I). 3. LP Building Products (LPI). 2.2 FABRICATED UNITS A. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, l-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units with material requirements complying of and with structural capabilities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. 1. Provide I-joists manufactured without urea formaldehyde. 2. Web: Either of the following: I a. Plywood, complying with DOC PS 1, Exterior grade. b. Oriented Strand Board complying with DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 3. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400,factory marked with APA trademark 111 indicating nominal joist depth,joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. B. Rim Boards: Performance rated product complying with APA PRR-401. 1. Material: Structural composite lumber. 2. Thickness and Grade:As indicated in Structural Drawings. 3. Factory mark with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade,and compliance with APA standard. 4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard. C. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing as recommended by joist manufacturer, or as indicated. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood I-Joists: 06 1733 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 2.3 ACCESSORIES IA. Wood Blocking and Bridging: Materials as specified in Section 06 1000, "Rough Carpentry." 2.4 FABRICATION IA. Wood Chord and Wood Web Joists: Design and manufactured to standards set forth in NER-200 Report. IB. Brace members for support during transit. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units. 111 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of support items. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install engineered wood framing to comply with manufacturer's instructions with all Iaccessories required for a complete system. 1. Do not cut chord members of wood I-Joists. IB. Set structural members to required levels and lines,with members plumb. C. Install blocking at all bearing points, as indicated, and as required to support facing materials, Ifixtures, specialty items, and trim. D. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent I bridging and bracing, and sheathing material has been applied. Design and temporary bracing and shoring is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. E. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section. 1 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position. I 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Joist manufacturer to inspect joists after they have been erected, and sheathing, bridging, blocking, and the like are in place. B. Joist manufacturer to submit certificate to Architect certifying that the inspection was made I and that joists are in acceptable condition and meet the manufacturer's design and installation requirements. IEND OF SECTION I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses:06 1753 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop-fabricated wood trusses. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements. I 2. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood bracing material. 3. Section 06 1600: Sheathing,for roof sheathing. 4. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AF&PA:American Forest& Paper Association. IB. TPI:Truss Plate Institute, Inc. C. Lumber grading and inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them, Iinclude the following: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. WCLIB:West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. I3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS IA. Structural Performance: Provide metal plate connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 and load requirements indicated in Structural Drawings, whichever is more stringent. IB. Minimum Load Requirements for Roof Trusses: 1. Live load:As required by Building Code for geographical location where installed per I 2. Drawing. 11 PSF dead load top chord. 3. 9 PSF dead load bottom chord. 4. Allowable increase in wood member stresses for duration of loading: 15 percent I maximum. 5. Uplift as required by State Building Code. 6. Maximum Vertical Deflection: 1/360 span for combined dead and snow loading. IC. Provide additional framing as required to transfer loads to main structural beams or wall for any hanger or support attached to roof trusses producing a load over 200 lbs., unless otherwise approved. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners. 1. Where trusses are a component of a fire-resistant rated ceiling assembly, appropriate National Evaluation Service Committee Report of Council of American Building Officials,with following: Reference Report No., Manufacturer's name, plant number, Iindependent inspection agency and evaluation report number. I LRS Architects, Inc., 1 Tigard Apartments Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses: 06 1753 December 11, 2015 Page 2 B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under supervision of a professional engineer registered in State where units are to be erected.Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 111 1. Show location, pitch, span,camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 2. Indicate sized, stress grades,and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual II truss members due to design loads. 4. Indicate type, size, material,finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates 5. Show splice details and bearing details. 6. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Manufacturer's certification that trusses have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's design and installation requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector Plate Manufacturer: Manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. I 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a professional engineer. B. Fabricator: Shop that participates in a recognized quality assurance program that complies with quality control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency. C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of following publications: 1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB"Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction"and its"Supplement." I 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing& Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses for evidence of discoloration, corrosion, or other deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses: 06 1753 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 METAL CONNECTOR PLATE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers offering products that Imay be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Gang Nail Systems. I3. Truss Connectors of America. 2.2 MATERIALS IA. Dimension Lumber: 1. Provide lumber complying with DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of NLGA, WCLIB, or W W PA. I 2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 3. Provide dressed S4S lumber of 2 inch nominal minimum thickness. Ia. Provide minimum 2 by 6 inches nominal size for top and bottom chords. 4. Provide dry lumber, KD19,with moisture content less than 19 percent. 5. Machine stress-rated MSR lumber is acceptable, but not required. I 6. Provide architectural grade lumber for truss tails that are exposed. 7. Provide permanent wood bracing that complies with requirements for lumber in Section 06 1000, Rough Carpentry. IB. Metal Connector Plates: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet:ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), HSLAS Type A or B; G60 coating designation;and not less than 0.036 inch thick. I 2. Option - Electrolytic Zinc Coated Steel Sheet:ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, with minimum structural characteristics equivalent to ASTM A 653 specified. 3. Provide stainless steel at exterior locations;ASTM A 666, Type 304, not less than I0.035 inch thick. C. Fasteners: I 1. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated or required to comply with design loads. 2. Nails, Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 3. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel,ASME B18.6.1. I 4. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated,flat washers. 5. Power Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 6. Expansion Anchors:Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, I without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. I1. Carbon steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Provide stainless steel at exterior locations;ASTM F 593/594. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses: 06 1753 Page 4 I December 11,2015 D. Metal Truss Accessories: 1. Provide bearing hardware including hurricane clips, blocking, hangers, shear panels, I etc., as required for connection and support of trusses for a complete structural system. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations,thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configurations indicated. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. 2. Press-apply connector plates without splitting or fracturing wood. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and type of trusses required, I exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. C. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. 111 D. Install trusses plumb, square,true to line and securely fastened to supporting construction. E. Space trusses as indicated;adjust and align in location before permanently fastening. F. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs as indicated in the Drawings. G. Fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. H. Install solid blocking at ends and at bearing points: I 1. Provide solid blocking as required at concentrated loads. 2. Anchor blocking and stiffeners to maintain units rigid, straight and plumb. I I. At openings in roof wider than regular truss spacing,double trusses at each edge; provide double trusses elsewhere as shown: 1. Unless otherwise noted, nail double trusses together from both sides with 2 rows of nails on each side at top and bottom chords spaced 12 inches on center maximum staggered, and with one row on each side at web members spaced 12 inches on center maximum. J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses: 06 1753 December 11, 2015 Page 5 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Truss manufacturer to inspect trusses after they have been erected, and sheathing, bridging, blocking, and the like are in place. 1. Truss manufacturer to submit certificate to Architect certifying that the inspection was made and that trusses are in acceptable condition and meet the manufacturer's design and installation requirements. 3.3 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace defective and damaged trusses, stiffeners, and blocking. i END OF SECTION 1 I i 1 I I 1 I 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I ITigard Apartments Glued-Laminated Construction: 061800 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY • A. Section includes structural glued-laminated timber for framing. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber 2. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes I1.2 DEFINITIONS • A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives Iand with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including the following:, including handling, storing, installing, and finishing instructions; and data on lumber, adhesives,fabrication, and protection. I 1. Data on lumber, adhesives,fabrication, and protection. 2. Connectors. IB. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables. I3. Include large-scale details of connections. C. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified inspection and testing agency indicating that glued-laminated timbers comply with requirements of AITC A190.1. 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC I (American Institute of Timber Construction) or APA licensed firm. 1. Factory mark each unit with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark Ion surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply AITC A 190.1, "Structural Glue-Laminated Timber." I1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions of AITC 111, "Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber during Transit, Storage, and Erection." IB. Individually wrap members using plastic coated paper covering,with water resistant seams. , I I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. M°tl I Tigard Apartments Glued-Laminated Construction: 06 1800 December 11, 2015 Page 2 111 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER I A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I 1. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from a single species. 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. B. Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC A190.1,AITC 117, and the following species and combination symbol: 1. Simple Span Beams: Douglas fir-larch 24F-V4 WS. 2. Continuous or Cantilever Beams: Douglas fir-larch 24F-V8 WS. C. Species and Grades for Columns: Provide glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC I A190.1, AITC 117,and the following species and combination symbol: 1. Douglas fir-larch, 1. 1 D. Appearance Grade: Industrial grade complying with AITC 110. E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard,transparent, colorless wood sealer. I F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer. 2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS I A. Provide connection steel and hardware for joining timber members to each other and to their supports, exclusive of anchorage embedded in masonry, setting plates, and items field- welded to structural steel. 1. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars:ASTM A 36. 2. Round Steel Bars:ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet:ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Provide bolts,ASTM A 307,Grade A, 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated; nuts,ASTM A 563; and,where indicated,flat washers. C. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive, shop-applied primer, 2 mil dry film thickness. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. B. Camber: Fabricate members with camber indicated in Drawings. I C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. I D. Seal Coat:After fabricating, sanding,and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Glued-Laminated Construction: 06 1800 December 11, 2015 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb,with uniform, close-fitting joints. r1. Install steel connectors, anchors, and accessories as indicated. 2. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. B. Fit structural glued laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. 1 1. Predrill for fasteners using connectors as templates. 2. Machine sand exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks,finishing with No.120 grit sandpaper. 3. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. 1. Replace damaged structural timber if repairs are not approved by Architect 3.3 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they are no longer serve a ' useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting." Retain wrapping where it can serve as painting shield. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Exterior Finish Carpentry: 06 2000 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1 1. Exterior wood trim. 2. Exterior wood fascia. 3. Exterior wood stairwork. 1 4. Exterior wood trellis. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I1. Section 03 4500: Precast Architectural Concrete,for precast concrete stair treads. 2. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for exposed framing,and furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. I 3. Section 06 4000:Architectural Woodwork, interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 4. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants 5. Section 09 9000: Painting, priming and back priming of finish carpentry. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, process and factory fabricated product. 1 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. For water-borne-treated products include statement that moisture content of treated I materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A Delivery and Storage: I1. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. 2. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. II3. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. I1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related items 1 of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. I • LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Exterior Finish Carpentry:06 2000 December 11, 2015 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with I applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber,furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of I each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. C. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. I 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Comply with requirements of AWPA Standard U1; Use Category UC3b. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Pressure-impregnate woodwork with preservative chemicals I acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Do not use chemical formulations that require incising. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. I 4. Kiln-dry material after treatment to levels required for untreated material. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 5. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. I 6. Application:Wood fascia, stair stringers and trellises. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content:9 to 15 percent. I B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM I A. Lumber Trim: Provide finished lumber complying with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species: I 1. Species: Western red cedar,WCLIB or WWPA, Clear Vertical Grain. 2. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Solid lumber stock. I B. Back out or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide,flat members, except members with ends exposed in finished work. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Exterior Finish Carpentry: 06 2000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 2.5 EXTERIOR WOOD FASCIA IA. Lumber: Provide finished lumber complying with the following: 1. Species: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir;WCLIB, or WWPA; Grade B. I2. Lumber for Painted Finish: Solid lumber stock. B. Back out or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide,flat members, except members with ends exposed in finished work. I2.6 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIRWORK A. Wood Species for Stringers: Douglas Fir, plain sawn. 1. Finish: Opaque. I 2.7 EXTERIOR WOOD TRELLISES A. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Douglas Fir, plain sawn. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended I by manufacturer. 1. Stainless steel. I2. Hot-dip galvanized steel. B. Anchors: Select material,type, size,and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. IC. Flashing: Comply with requirements of Section 07 6000 for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. D. Sealant: Comply with requirements of Section 07 9200 for materials required for sealing exterior woodwork. I2.9 FINISHES A. General: Paint as specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting,"for exterior wood. I B. Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of exterior finish carpentry.Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. 1. Apply sealer or primer in shop or in the field. 1 I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Exterior Finish Carpentry:06 2000 , December 11, 2015 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other I conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Before installation, condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. I B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements for surface preparation and application in Section 09 9000, "Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL I A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound,warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. I 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level,true,and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed I shims where required for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink nails,fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32 inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 inch maximum I offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running trim. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of finish carpentry components. I 5. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of finish carpentry components. C. Preservative Treated Wood:Where cut or drilled in field,treat cut ends and drilled holes I according to AWPA M4. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Match color and grain pattern across joints for members with transparent finish. I F. Finish: Finish according to specified requirements. 3.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION I A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. I 1. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. 2. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints,with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Exterior Finish Carpentry: 06 2000 I December 11, 2015 Page 5 3. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. I 4. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. 5. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints,where necessary for alignment. IB. Match color and grain pattern across joints for members with transparent finish. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 1 3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD FASCIA INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. • I 1. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. I 2. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. 3. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. I3.6 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIRWORK INSTALLATION A. Cut carriages and anchor to support framing. IB. Anchor concrete precast treads to carriages as indicated in Drawings. C. Install treads not to exceed 1/8 inch from indicated position, and 1/16 inch out of position in I respect to adjacent treads. 3.7 EXTERIOR WOOD TRELLIS INSTALLATION IA. Install as indicated in Drawings. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING I A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. I B. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.9 PROTECTION I A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. I ENDF O SECTION I 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork:06 4000 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL • 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following for interior architectural woodwork: I 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic laminate countertops. I 3. Solid surfacing material countertops,fireplace mantel and hearth. 4. Flush wood paneling. 5. Interior frames and jambs. 6. Exterior frames and jambs. 1 7. Finishing of woodwork. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood furring, blocking,shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. I 2. Section 06 2000: Exterior Finish Carpentry,for exterior woodwork exposed to view not specified in this Section. 3. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants 4. Section 08 1400:Wood Doors. I 5. Section 09 9000: Painting,for wood finishes. 6. Section 12 3530: Residential Casework,for cabinetry. 7. Division 22: Plumbing,for plumbing work incorporated in casework. I 8. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning,for HVAC work incorporated in casework. 9. Division 26: Electrical,for electrical work incorporated in casework. I1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork Iinstallation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified including cabinet hardware and accessories, and installation instructions. IB. Shop Drawings: 1. Show location of each item with dimensioned plans and elevations, indicating I materials, component profiles, assembly methods,joint details,fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes. 2 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing and electrical work incorporated in woodwork. I 3. Show locations and sizes,of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 1 I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 I December 11, 2015 Page 2 C. Samples: I 1. Lumber to receive Transparent Finish:Two 5 by 24 inch long for each species and cut,finished on one side and 1 edge. 2. Plastic Laminate Clad Panel Products:Two 8 by 10 inch size samples for each color, I texture and pattern of plastic laminate and melamine material specified. 3. Solid surfacing materials:Two 6 by 6 inch samples. 4. Wood Veneer Faced Panel Products:Two 8 by 10 inch size samples with transparent finish for each species and cut. I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Quality Standard: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute's (AWI) and Woodwork Institute's(WI)"Architectural Woodwork Standards" (AWS)for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,finishes, installation, and other requirements. I B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: 1. Firm experienced in producing casework for projects of similar size, quality and I complexity. 2. Engage a firm qualified to assume single-source responsibility for fabricating, finishing,and installing Work of this Section in accordance with the referenced I standard. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage, and damage by project construction operations. I 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,wet work is complete, and HVAC I system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. IIB. Maintain temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F in areas where architectural woodwork is installed. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicated measurements in Shop Drawings. Il B. Field verify measurements of other construction that woodwork is intended to fit to prior to fabrication of woodwork. Where measurements cannot be made prior to Shop Drawings, provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual I dimensions correspond to established woodwork dimensions shown in Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION I A Coordinate work of this Section with plumbing and electrical rough-in, and other finish work. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing,furring, blocking, reinforcements, and other related I units of work specified in other Sections for supporting and installing architectural woodwork items. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS-GENERAL I A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWS quality standard for each type of woodwork and grade specified. I2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20;average moisture content of 6 percent; Douglas Fir or Hemlock species. IB. Hardwood Lumber:AHA A135.4. I C. Particleboard:ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 or Grade M-2 Exterior Glue, 45 pcf density, of grade to suit application; sanded faces.. 1. Roseburg Forest Products: Roseburg SkyBlend. I2. SierraPine: Encore RM. D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1; core materials Douglas Fir or Hemlock species. I E. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1; Grade A face veneer made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. I 2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATES A. Plastic Laminate (PL-1): High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) complying with NEMA I LD3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard; manufacturer, color, pattern,and surface texture as scheduled. B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2,with I surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL,for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10; color as selected: 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ia. RMP; Roseburg Melamine Products. b. Panolam Industries. KorTron;Willamette Industries. IC. C. Backing Sheet: NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, undecorated plastic laminate. ID. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement, PVA, Resorcinol, or approved. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. I E. Joint Sealant for Plastic Laminate: Clean translucent mildew-resistant silicone by Dow, General Electric, or approved. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 11December 11, 2015 Page 4 2.4 SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL I A. Solid Surfacing Material (GS-1):Quartz aggregate, resin,and color pigments formed into flat slabs,thickness as noted in the Finish Legend on the Drawings. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding the following values per ASTM E 84. I 1. Flame Spread: 15. 2. Smoke Developed: 30. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. I B. Bolts, Nuts,Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Select type, size and finish to suit application. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners:Threaded steel. I 2.6 HARDWARE A. Pre-manufactured Metal Supports for Countertops: I 1. Manufacturer: Federal Brace (877-353-8899), or approved. 2. Product: Freedom Hidden Countertop Brackets. 111 3. Material:304 stainless steel. 4. Size to accommodate countertop depth. 5. Thickness as recommended by manufacturer for countertop depth. ' 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims,and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less II than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material,type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. I 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. I 2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.8 FABRICATION, GENERAL I A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom Grade woodwork complying with requirements of referenced AWS Quality Standard. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, in shop to greatest extent possible I -before delivery to Project site. 1. Dissemble only as necessary for shipment and installation. ' C. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. I D. Shop cut and locate openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items, using templates or roughing-in diagrams. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork:06 4000 December 11,2015 Page 5 I2.9 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWS Section 6, "Interior& Exterior Millwork." IB. Wood Species for Opaque Finish:Any closed grain hardwood or western white pine. C. Groove backs of flat trim members, and kerf backs of other wide,flat members, except for Imembers with exposed ends in finished work. 2.10 DOOR FRAMES AND JAMBS I A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWS Section 6, "Interior&Exterior Millwork." B. Interior Door Frames and Jambs: I1. Wood Species for Opaque Finish:Any closed grain hardwood. C. Exterior Door Frames and Jambs: I2. Wood Species for Opaque Finish:Any closed grain hardwood. D. Do not use plan sawn lumber with exposed,flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. IE. Fire-Rated Interior Door Frames and Jambs: Provide fire-rated wood frames for wood doors that are constructed and labeled in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-rated and smoke control doors. I 1. Fire Rating:As indicated. I F. Available Manufacturers for Fire-Rated Door Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division. 2. Sierra Pacific Industries. 3. Skagit Architectural Millwork, Inc. I4. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2.11 COUNTERTOPS IA. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWS Section 11, "Countertops." B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL), complying with the following: I1. HPDL Grade: HGS, General purpose type, 1.2 mm nominal thickness. a. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP, 1.0 mm nominal thickness. I2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation as noted in the Finish Legend on the Drawings. I 3. Apply plastic laminate cladding in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cutouts. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork:06 4000 I December 11,2015 Page 6 4. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. I 5. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. 6. Edges: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 7. Core Material: Particleboard. I a. For countertops with sinks and lavatories: 1) Use Grade M-2-Exterior Glue particleboard. I 2) Seal raw-edge of particleboard adjacent to sinks and lavatories with water-resistant sealer. 8. Overall Thickness of Countertop Panel: Not less than 3/4 inch. I 9. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet,Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. C. Type of Top: Solid surfacing, complying with the following: I 1. Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2. Fabricate tops one piece with shop applied backsplashes and edges. I 3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for fabrication, adhesives, sealers, and finishing. 4.- Drill holes for plumbing fittings and toilet accessories in the shop. I 5. Colors, Patterns,and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend on the Drawings. 2.12 FLUSH WOOD PANELING AND WAINSCOTS I A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWS Section 8, "Wall Surfacing" and related wood doors. B. Wood Species and Cut:As indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. I C. Wood Paneling for Transparent Finish: I 1. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 2. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves:Architectural end match. 3. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Running match I 4. Panel Matching Method: No matching is required between panels. Select and arrange panels for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels. 5. Vertical Panel Matching Method: Continuous match. I C. Panel Core Construction: Hardwood veneer-core plywood. D. Exposed Panel Edges: Inset solid-wood or wood-veneer matching faces. I E. Panel Reveals: To be selected. 2.13 FIREPLACE MANTEL AND HEARTHS I 1. Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for fabrication, adhesives, sealers, I and finishing for wall applications. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend on the Drawings. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 I December 11, 2015 Page 7 I2.14 SHOP FINISHING A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements for AWS Section 5, "Finishing." I B. General: Shop finish transparent finished architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. 1. To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork in the fabrication shop. 1 2. Touch up, clean, and polish after installation at Project site. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding,filling I countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. D. Backpriming:Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed I surfaces of woodwork.Apply two coats to back of paneling and end-grain surfaces. 1. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, or thermoset decorative panels. I E. Transparent Finish: I 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish System 3: Post-Catalyzed Lacquer. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. Ia. Wash Coat for Stained Finish:Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. b. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grained woods. I b. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods:After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.Apply vinyl washcoat sealer after staining and before filling. 1 4. Sheen: Satin 31-45 gloss units. F. Opaque Finish: Specified in Section 09 9000, Painting. I PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition architectural woodwork to prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with AWS Sections for the same grade specified for type of architectural woodwork I involved, and as specified in this Section B. Install architectural woodwork plumb, level, and straight. I1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 Tigard Apartments Page 8 December 11, 2015 C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces,and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates as required for proper support and attachment. E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations and fill flush with adjacent surfaces matching final finish. F. Standing and Running Trim: 1 Install with minimum of joints possible. 2. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. 3. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 4. Wood Base: Fill gaps between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth,and finish same as wood base. G. Plastic Laminate Countertop: I 1. Anchorage: Secure countertops to grounds,furring and solid blocking with countersunk fasteners and blind nailing as required. a. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. I 2. Seal space between backsplash and wall with sealant. H. Solid Surfacing Countertops: a 1. Secure tops to base units. 111 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with adhesive. I. Solid Surfacing Mantel and Hearth: I 1. Secure mantel facing to wall with manufacturer recommended adhesives or fasteners. 2. Secure hearths with recommended adhesives or fasteners. J. Door Frames and Jambs: I 1. Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. 2. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. 3. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. a. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. K. Paneling: I 1. Anchor paneling to substrate with concealed panel hangar clips, or by blind nailing on backup strips, or similar trim and framing. 2. Install paneling not to exceed 1/16 inch in 96 inches vertical sup or bow, or 1/8 inch in 96 inches horizontal variation from true plane. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Architectural Woodwork:06 4000 I December 11, 2015 Page 9 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING IA. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Touch up shop applied finishes and repair and restore damaged or soiled areas to eliminate I functional and visual defects. 1. Where it is not possible to repair defects, replace woodwork. IEND OF SECTION I I I • I I I I I I I I 1 I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sheet Waterproofing: 07 1300 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sheet membrane waterproofing for the following applications: I 1. Below grade wall waterproofing at walls adjacent to habitable spaces. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete,for substratere aration. 2. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants p p I1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water under hydrostatic pressure and I complies with requirements as demonstrated by testing by an independent testing agency of manufacturer's sheet membrane. 1.3 SUBMITTALS rA. Product Data,for specified products, including installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's recommended details of flashing and treatment of I penetrations through waterproofing; indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interfaced with other materials. , • C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit written documentation of applicator's qualifications including II evidence that applicator is licensed or approved by the manufacturer and listing five successfully completed projects similar in scope and complexity to work of this Section with current phone numbers of Architect and Owner contacts for verification. I1. Submit documentation of designated project foreman's training certification by manufacturer. I1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual and the requirements of these specifications. IB. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withi years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. minimum five I1. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation and who shall have certification of training by waterproofing system manufacturer. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencement of work to receive waterproofing, schedule meeting at mutually agreed upon time to include Owner,Architect, Contractor, Contractor's project foreman for waterproofing, manufacturer's representative, and other II interested parties to review methods and procedures to be used to achieve end results. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 0 A. Comply with Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Sheet Waterproofing: 07 1300 Tigard Apartments Page 2 December 11,2015 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original packaging,and maintain packaging, seals and labels intact and legible until time of use. B. Store off ground and protected from damage, including that resulting from exposure to direct sunlight. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS tem A. Do not install waterproofing whenerature is below 25 degrees F. I p B. Do not install waterproofing in standing water,during wet or damp weather, or on wet,damp or frost covered substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failure to resist penetration of water. B. For warranty repair work, include removal and replacement of materials concealing waterproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Inc.: a. CCW MiraDRI 860 for temperatures above to 40 degrees F. b. CCW MiraDRI 861 for temperatures down to 25 degrees F. 2. Cetco (Colloid Environmental Technologies Company): a. Envirosheet for temperatures above to 40 degrees F. I b. Envirosheet LT for temperatures down to 25 degrees F. 3. W.R. Grace&Co.; Bituthene 4000 System. 1 B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS I' A. Sheet Waterproofing: 1. Material: Self-adhering sheet of rubberized asphalt, minimum 56 mils thick. 1 2. Reinforcing film: Cross-laminated, polyethylene film, 4 mils thick. 3. Total sheet thickness:60 mils minimum. (Drainage Composite):Drainage Mat Draina a Com osite): 1 1. Cetco (Colloid Environmental Technologies Company):Aquadrain 15X. 2. W.R. Grace&Co.—Conn.: Hydroduct 220. 3. Polyguard Products, Inc: Polyguard Flow 15-P. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Sheet Waterproofing: 07 1300 Page 3 C. Surface Conditioner:As required or recommended by membrane manufacturer, Imanufacturer's standard product for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions are ready to receive work of this Section before starting work. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify substrate surfaces are smooth,free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full I contact bond of waterproofing materials. ID. Verify items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.2 PREPARATION IA. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified under provisions of Section 03 3000, "Cast-In-Place Concrete." 111 C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. 1. Do not proceed with installation over concrete until after minimum curing period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant materials using depth to width ratio as recommended by Isealant manufacturer. 3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Detailing: Detail in accordance with manufacturers standard guideline details. Complete I detailing before installing the membrane over field of the substrate. B. If required, apply surface conditioner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Allow I sufficient time for surface conditioner to thoroughly dry prior to membrane application. C. Membrane Application:Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ID. Terminate membranes in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions. E. Seal watertight items projecting through waterproofing surface in accordance with Imanufacturer's instructions. 3.4 DRAINAGE COMPOSITE APPLICATION I A. Protect membrane from damage by adhering drainage composite over waterproofing surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Scribe and cut boards around projections and interruptions. IB. Continue drainage composite over foundation wall footings to footing foundation drain for discharge of water in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sheet Waterproofing: 07 1300 December 11, 2015 Page 4 11 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during construction period. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction. Remove from the project site refuse and debris created by this work,and dispose of in a legal manner. I END OF SECTION I . I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: 071400 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL II` 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes complete polyurethane waterproofing membrane system for horizontal Iapplications. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Section 06 1600: Sheathing, for substrate. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data,for specified products, including installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's recommended details of flashing and treatment of • I penetrations through waterproofing; indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interfaced with other materials. C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit written documentation of applicator's qualifications including I evidence that applicator is licensed or approved by the manufacturer and listing five successfully completed projects similar in scope and complexity to work of this Section with current phone numbers of Architect and Owner contacts for verification. III1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual and the requirements of Ithese specifications. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. I1. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation. I C. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencement of work to receive waterproofing, schedule meeting at mutually agreed upon time to include Owner,Architect, Contractor, Contractor's project foreman for waterproofing, manufacturer's representative, and other interested parties to review methods and procedures to be used to achieve end results. 111 1.4 WARRANTY I A. Provide minimum ten year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failure to resist penetration of water. B. For warranty repair work, include removal and replacement of materials concealing Iwaterproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product: 111 1. Poly-Tuff Systems, International, Inc.: Terra-Shield WC 100. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. I IIILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: 07 1400 December 11,2015 Page 2 2.2 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Waterproofing Membrane: 1. Material:ASTM C 836; Coal-tar free plyurethane designed for concealed building components subject to hydrostatic head. 2. Total Cured Film Thickness: 110 mils (55 mils per layer). 3. Elongation: ASTM D 412; 500 percent minimum. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS III A. Primer:Type as recommended by waterproofing membrane manufacturer. B. Joint Backing: Closed-cell, polyurethane rod as recommended by membrane manufacturer. I ' C. Reinforcing Mesh:Woven fiberglass scrim cloth. D. Elastomeric Sheet Flashing: 1/16 inch thick by 12 inch wide uncured neoprene sheeting. I E. Joint Treatment:Type as recommended by membrane manufacturer for application specified. F. Protection Board:Type as recommended by waterproofing membrane manufacturer. 1 G. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required,for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contactor and approved by the membrane system manufacturer as compatible. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter,dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits (pinholes), projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. I C. Verify items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. I D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant materials using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Detailing: Detail in accordance with manufacturers standard guideline details. Complete detailing before installing the membrane over field of the substrate. I B. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Allow sufficient time for primer to thoroughly dry prior to membrane application. LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Fluid Applied Waterproofing: 07 1400 4 I December 11,2015 Page 3 IC. Membrane Application:Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install horizontal waterproofing system with 2 layers of"Terra-Shield WC 100"with a total dry-film thickness of 110 mils. D. Terminate membranes in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions, and as detailed. I E. Seal watertight items projecting through waterproofing surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION BOARD APPLICATION A. Protect membrane from damage by adhering a protection board or slip sheet over waterproofing surface if required by membrane manufacturer. 1 3.5 WATERPROOFING SCHEDULE A. Horizontal Applications: 1 1. Where indicated, over occupied spaces at breezeways. 1 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I 1 iLRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 December 11,2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Board insulation. 1 2. Blanket insulation. 3. Loose-fill insulation. I4. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete,for concrete construction to receive board insulation. 2. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wall framing to receive blanket insulation. 3. Section 09 8110:Acoustic Insulation and Sealant,for acoustic insulation. I 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS I A. Provide with materials of this Section a continuity of thermal and vapor barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: For each type of building insulation and vapor retarder specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Engage a company using workers who are trained and necessary experienced in p cr afts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Isection. B. Surface Burning Characteristics:As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of Iapplicable testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. IB. Store inside and in a dry location. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing,sto ing, and protecting during installation. D. Do not expose plastic insulation to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of , installation and concealment. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS IA. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified in PART 2 Articles I LRS Architects, Inc. , I I Tigard Apartments Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 December 11, 2015 Page 2 B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS 11 A. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation:ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below,with maximum flame spread 25 and smoke development 450: 1 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Chemical Company: STYROFOAM Brand Square Edge (SE). 111 b. Owens Corning: Formular 250. 2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu.ft. 3. Compressive strength: Minimum 25 psi. 4. Water absorption:ASTM C 272, maximum 0.3 percent by volume. 2.3 BLANKET INSULATION MATERIALS I A. Faced Blanket Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: I a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: a. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. 3. ASTM C 665,Type II, Class C, Category I. I 4. Type: Glass-fiber. 5. Vapor Retarder: Kraft,with 1.0 maximum permeability. 6. Provide min. 1 inch wide flange along edges for attachment to framing 7. Thickness:As required to achieve insulation-only R-Value indicated in the Drawings. B. Loose-Fill Insulation: 1. ASTM C 764,Type I,for pneumatic application. 2. Type: Glass-fiber. 3. Thickness:As required to achieve insulation-only R-Value indicated in the Drawings. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder facings. B. Fasteners and Adhesives:As recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members. 1. Acceptable Option: "Raft-R-Mate" by Owens Corning, or approved. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements of Sections in which Isubstrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 111 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing Ilprojections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in Work of this Section. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and 11 application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain,and snow. III C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelope entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with Iplacement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation Iencapsulates piping. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDERSLAB INSULATION IP A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive at perimeter of foundation in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation in units according to manufacturer's instructions I with end joints staggered and tightly abutted. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION IA. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, or if no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. IB. Install vapor retarding faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of assembly. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of Il insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 2. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane to form a continuous barrier. IC. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members as follows: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that completely fill cavities formed by framing members. 111 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 December 11, 2015 Page 4 111 2. Place insulation cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. 4. Place insulation between pipes in wall and exterior side of assembly. Leave no gaps or voids. 5. Maintain 3 inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 6. For wood framed construction, install insulation blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapled flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of I adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. D. Place loose-fill insulation where indicated, pneumatically,to a density of 0.333 lbs./sq.ft.to I comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal application to uniform thickness without excessive compaction. E. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Install between roof framing members according to manufacturer's instructions to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS 1 A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. 1. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. 2. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber insulation. 1 B. Wood Framing: Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end and bottom edges; at perimeter wall openings; and at lap joints. It C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. a D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. II Cover with vapor retarder taper or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION I A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage, both from weather exposure or construction operations. I B. Repair damaged insulation and vapor retarders. END OF SECTION I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Vapor Retarders under Concrete Slabs:07 2617 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion under concrete floor slabs-on I grade. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete,for concrete placed over vapor retarder. 2. Civil Drawings:for aggregate base substrate for vapor retarder. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type product specified. II1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre-installation conference in coordination with pre-installation conference for Iplacement of concrete floor slabs within two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work for placement of concrete and concrete slab steel reinforcement on vapor retarder. $ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS I A. Vapor Retarder under Concrete Slab-on-Grade: Provide vapor retarder complying with requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class A or B, minimum 15 mil thickness, complying with the Ifollowing requirements: 1. Maximum Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perms. 2. Minimum Tensile Strength: a. Class A: 45.0 Ibf/in. b. Class B:30.0 Ibf/in. I3. Minimum Puncture Resistance: a. Class A: 2200 grams. Ib. Class B: 1700 grams. 4. Manufacturers with Acceptable Products: 111 a. Floor Seal Technology, Inc. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group. c. Grace Construction Products. d. Reef Industries, Inc. 111 e. Stego Industries, LLC. f. W.R. Meadows, Inc. C. Vapor Retarder Tape: High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive, by manufacturer of vapor retarder, 4 inches width. I IIILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Vapor Retarders under Concrete Slabs: 07 2617 December 11,2015 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify substrate materials are dry and clean. Remove loose or foreign matter that might impair adhesion. B. Coordinate with work of other sections for location and treatment of penetrations through vapor retarder, and placement of concrete and concrete reinforcement over vapor retarder. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Slab-on-Grade: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarder according to requirements and recommendations of ASTM E 1643 without grandular fill, and manufacturers written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with recommended pressure sensitive tape. 2. Turn vapor retarder up over end of concrete slab-on-grade and seal to foundation wall. 3. Seal pipe penetrations with pipe boot made from vapor retarder and tape according to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Protect vapor retarder from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and utilities. 5. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged areas 6 inches and taping all four sides with pressure sensitive tape. B. Note: Vapor retarder may be identified as"vapor barrier"in drawings. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Air/Water Barriers: 07 2800 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes air/water barriers (AWB) and accessories for wall applications, and defines Ithe requirements for their installation. 1. The terms air/water barrier,AWB, air barrier,weather barrier, weather resistive Ibarrier, and WRB may be used interchangeably. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 7300: Manufactured Stone Masonry,for finish material application over I air/water barrier. 2. Section 06 1600: Sheathing,for substrate to receive air/water barrier. 3. Section 07 4646: Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding,for finish materials and furring installed over air/water barrier. 4. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal,for metal flashing installed at wall I openings in coordination with installation of air/water barrier. 5. Section 07 6500: Flexible Membrane Flashings,for flexible membrane flashings installed at wall openings and transitions in coordination with installation of air/water barrier. 6. Section 07 9200: Sealants,for sealants installed at openings and penetrations in Iair/water barrier,and between air/water barrier and cladding materials. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION IA. Air/Water Barrier System: 1. Air/Water Barrier: Mechanically attached sheet air/water barrier to be installed behind the wall cladding as the primary means of resisting air movement through the building I envelope and the secondary means of resisting rainwater penetration, as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior. 2. Accessories: IIa. Accessory materials include the following: 1) Sealing Tapes. 2) Flexible Membrane Flashings (FMF): specified in Section 07 6500. 3) Metal Flashings:specified in Section 07 6000. 4) Sealants: specified in Section 07 9200. Ib. Accessory materials are used to seal and bridge the following air leakage pathways and gaps in the air/water barrier. I 1) Connection of the wall air/water barrier to the roof air/water barrier. 2) Connection of the wall air/water barrier to the foundation air/water barrier. 3) Connection to seismic and expansion joints. 4) Terminations at windows, doors, and similar openings. 5) Terminations at piping, conduit, duct and similar items. 6) Penetrations at masonry ties, screws, bolts and other fasteners. I7) Other air/water leakage pathways in the building envelope. I LRS Architects, Inc. . I Tigard Apartments Air/Water Barriers: 07 2800 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each material in the air/water barrier system submit material manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, temperature and other limitations of installation conditions,technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Include statement from air/water barrier material manufacturer indicating that accessory materials proposed to be used,are approved for use (or chemically compatible) with air/water barrier products. 2. Include statement from the primary air/water barrier material manufacturer that the materials used in their air/water assembly,which will be used to adhere the air/water barrier to the underlying substrate, are chemically compatible to the substrate material. B. Samples: for each material specified, including accessories C. Evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating compliance with P P State Building Code for air/water barriers. D. Warranties as specified in this section. 1 E. Manufacturer's field inspection report. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE 1 A. Convene a pre-installation conference within two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section. 1. Attendees:Contractor,Architect, Installer, Owner's Representative, and air/water barrier manufacturer's designated representative. Include installers of other construction connecting to air/water barrier, such as roofing,waterproofing,joint sealants,flexible membrane flashings,sheet metal flashings, windows, and doors. B. Review related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of air/water barrier assembly materials and components, installer's training requirements, equipment,facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, weather conditions, integration, protection and repairs,and mockup requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: I 1. Installer with 5 years' experience installing commercial air/water barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Tigard Apartments Air/Water Barriers:07 2800 December 11, 2015 Page 3 B. Exterior Wall Assembly Mockup: Build mockup to set quality standards for materials and Iexecution. 1. Build mockup of exterior wall assembly, 150 sq.ft., incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, base of wall, connection to roof,window, door frame I and sill, insulation,ties and other penetrations,to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air/water barriers,and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier assembly. Ia. Specific requirements for windows and doors as applicable to this mockup are specified in Division 08. b. Coordinate construction of mockup to allow observation by Architect, I Envelope Consultant, and/or Owner's testing agency before external insulation and cladding are installed. c. Coordinate with the air/water barrier manufacturer's technical representative to verify installation is in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and meets warranty requirements. The manufacturer shall provide a report of their observations in writing to the Architect. d. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, Ireconstruct mockups and apply air/water barrier until mockup is approved. 2. Utilize mockup for window testing as required in Section 08 5313, in Field Quality Control Article. I 3. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockup unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements,approved mockups may become part of the I completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING IA. Deliver air/water barrier materials and accessories in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 111 B. Store air/water barrier materials as recommended by manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS IA. Temperature: Install mechanically attached sheet air/water barriers within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. I B. Field Conditions: Do not install air/water barrier in snow, rain, or other condition not recommended by manufacturer. C. Compatibility: Do not allow mechanically attached sheet air/water barriers to come in contact I with chemically incompatible materials. D. Ultraviolet Exposure: Do not expose air/water barrier materials to ultraviolet(UV) light longer Ithan recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Sequence the installation of the air/water barrier to ensure shingle lapping with adjacent and existing envelope components as detailed in the drawings. 0I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Air/Water Barriers: 07 2800 December 11, 2015 Page 4 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warrant material to be free of defects and replace any found to be defective at no cost to the $ Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 AIR/WATER BARRIER (AWB) A. Mechanically Attached Air/Water Barrier(AWB): non-woven, non-perforated, non-absorbing, I vapor permeable membrane, ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder;with flame spread and smoke developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized, meeting requirements of IBC Section 1404.2 as an alternate air/water barrier. 1. Basis of Design: Fortifiber Building Systems Group:Weathersmart Commercial, non- woven and related accessories. 11 2. Other Acceptable Systems: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. DuPont Weatherization Systems, Tyvek Commercial Wrap and related accessories b. VaproShield: WrapShield,Water Resistive Vapor Permeable Air Barrier Membrane and related accessories. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General:Air/water barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints,construction material 111 changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and without air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Comply with the following performance requirements: I 1. Air/Water Barrier Material Performance: a. Membrane Air Permeance: Provide air barrier materials which have an air permeance not to exceed 0.004 cfm per square foot(0.02 liters per square meter) per second under a pressure differential of 1.57 psf(75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. b. Vapor Permeance: Not less than 14 perms per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). c. Membrane Water Penetration Resistance: Not less than 60 minute rating per AATCC-127 (hydrostatic head). d. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. e. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285. f. Surface Burning Characteristics: Materials with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively,when tested according to ASTM-E-84; Class A. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments I December 11, 2015 Air/Water Barriers: 07 2800 Page 5 2. Assembly Performance: Provide a continuous air/water barrier in the form of an assembly that has an air leakage not to exceed 0.04 cfm per square foot (0.2 Liters per square meter) per second under a pressure differential of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) when tested in the laboratory in accordance with ASTM E 2357. I a. Provide assembly to accommodate movement of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required. b. Provide appropriate accessory materials at expansion/control joints, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. c. Provide air/water barrier assembly capable of withstanding combined design wind,fan and stack pressures, both positive and negative on the envelope without damage or displacement, and transfer the load to the structure. IC. Join air/water barrier assembly in an airtight and flexible manner to the air/water barrier components of adjacent assemblies, allowing for the relative movement of assemblies due to the thermal and moisture variations, creep, and anticipated seismic movement. 111 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sealing Tapes: 1. Sealing Tape: Fortifiber Sheathing Tape, DuPont Tyvek Tape, Vapro Tape or other sealing tape approved by manufacturer of mechanically attached sheet. IB. Sealants: Specified in Section 07 9200. C. Fasteners: II1. Fastening to Wood Studs through Wood Sheathing: 1" staple with 2 inch diameter plastic cap for embedment into stud through sheathing. 2. Fastening to Metal Studs through Wood Sheathing: 2 inch plastic caps and 1-3/4 I inch galvanized screw for embedment into stud through sheathing. 3. Fastening to Wood or Metal Studs through Gypsum Sheathing: 2 inch plastic caps and 1-3/4 inch galvanized screw for embedment into stud through sheathing. D. Flexible Membrane Flashings (FMF): Specified in Section 07 6500. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION Verify substrate conditions are in accordance with air/water barrier manufacturer's IA. recommended tolerances prior to installation of air/water barrier and accessories. B. Coordinate installation of air/water barrier with flexible membrane flashing installed at wall I openings and penetrations. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill holes in sheathing as recommended by manufacturer of air/water barrier. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Air/Water Barriers: 07 2800 Tigard Apartments Page 6 December 11, 2015 3.3 INSTALLATION It A. Air/Water Barrier: Install mechanically attached sheet air/water barrier to provide continuityII throughout the building envelope. 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions directly over wall sheathing. 2. Run horizontally, shingle fashion, starting at base of wall. 3. Overlap at corners of building by a minimum of 12 inches. 4. Lap 6 inches horizontally and 12 inches vertically. 5. Install with cap fasteners. 5. Seal seams, edges,fasteners,and penetrations with tape. 6. Extend into jambs and sills of openings and seal terminations with tape. 7. Detail remaining terminations and penetrations with accessory materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for air leakage and ensuring lapping of the material for proper shingling and drainage of bulk water. 8. Coordinate installation of air/water barrier with flexible membrane flashing specified in Section 07 6500. I 9. Repair tears in air/water barrier by applying tape in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. To patch holes greater than 1 inch, install piece of air/water barrier material properly weather lapped, and apply sealing tape. • 3.4 FIELD QUALIY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Review: 1. Manufacturer Field Inspection: Coordinate with the air/water barrier manufacturer's technical representative to conduct periodic in-progress inspections to verify installation is in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and meets all warranty requirements. The manufacturer shall provide a report of their observations in writing to the Architect. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air/water barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air/water barrier from exposure to ultraviolet (UV) light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air/water barrier exposed to these conditions for more than 150 days. 2. Protect air/water barrier products from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air/water barrier manufacturer. B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of air/water barrier. I END OF SECTION I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I • Tigard Apartments Asphalt Shingles: 07 3113 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Composition fiberglass-reinforced asphalt shingles. 2. Felt underlayment. 3. Waterproof composite underlayment. 1 4. Roof Vents. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 06 1600: Sheathing,for roof sheathing. 2. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal,for metal flashing requirements. 3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 111 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including installation instructions and Irecommendations of shingle manufacturer, and data that materials comply with requirements. B. Samples: 1. Submit full range of samples for color and texture selection. 2. After selection, submit 2 full-size shingles for verification of each color/style/texture selected. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE - I A. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL for Class and Rating indicated for each shingle type required. Y B. Installer Qualifications:A firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by shingle roofing I system manufacturer to install roofing system specified. C. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. I 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING IA. Store materials in a dry,well-ventilated,weathertight location. Store rolled goods on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job-site storage and protection. IB. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. IC. Do not overload buildings structural system by stacking bundles in concentrated locations. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with shingle work only when existing and forcasted weather conditions permit shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Asphalt Shingles: 07 3113 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTY A. Roofing Installers Special Warranty:Warrant Work of this Section for weather tightness for 2 I. years after date of Substantial Completion, and agree to repair and/or replace without cost to Owner water leaks and resulting damage to building materials and/or building contents as may occur under normal usage within Warranty Period. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: 1. Material Warranty Period:30 years covering defective materials. 2. Wind Speed Warranty Period:Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by winds speeds up to 95 mph for 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Algae Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are labeled and packaged with II protective covering for storage. 1. Shingles: 100 sq.ft. of each type in unbroken bundles. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Fiberglass Reinforced Shingles: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in work include, but are not limited to,following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. GAF Materials Corporation; GAF-ELK. 3. Malarkey Roofing Company 4. Owens-Corning. 5. Pabco Roofing Products. 2.2 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES I A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles:ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, fiberglass reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. 1. Provide shingles with a Class A fire-test-response classification that comply with 1 requirements of ASTM D 3018,Type I. 2. Provide shingles thatpass wind-resistance-test requirements of ASTM D 3161. 3. Butt Edge: Straight. 4. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 6. Color and Blends: Match Malarkey Roofing Company, EZ Ridge, Storm Grey. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt Underlayment:ASTM D 226,Type II, No. 30, nonperforated, asphalt saturated organic felt, minimum 36 inches wide, approximate weight 36 lbs./square. 1. Acceptable Option: "Shingle-Mate" by GAF/Elk Corporation. I IRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Asphalt Shingles: 07 3113 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 B. Waterproof Composite Underlayment:ASTM D 1970, Polyethylene faced, minimum 0.040 I inch thick, slip-resisting, polyolefin film laminated to SBS modified asphalt adhesive, self- adhering with release paper backing; cold applied. 1. Acceptable Products: Ia. Vycor Ice&Water Shield, by W. R. Grace &Co. b. Stormguard, by GAF/Elk Corporation. c. WeatherLock Flex Flexible Self-Sealing Ice&Water Barrier, by Owens- Corning. 2.4 ROOF VENTS a A. Ridge Vent: Corrugated high density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent; by the following, or approved. Ii. VentSure 4 Foot Strip Ridge Vent, by Owens Corning. B. Sloping Roof Vent: Standard metal orlastic roof oof vent for sloping roof application. I2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement:ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. IB. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667. 1. Aluminum,stainless steel, or hot-dip galvanized 11 or 12 gage, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks, minimum 3/8 inch diameter head, and 11 of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. C. Staples: Not allowed, as recommended by ARMA—Asphalt Roofing Manuf.Assoc, D. Felt Underlayment Nails:Aluminum, stainless steel,ee, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1 inch minimum diameter. I2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Comply with requirements of Section 07 6000,"Flashing and Sheet Metal." IB. Fabricate sheet metal flashing to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual:that apply to design, dimensions, metal,and other characteristics of item. I C. Metal Drip Edge: As specified in Section 07 6000, and the following: I 1. Brake-formed to provide 3 inches roof deck flange, and 1-1/2 inch fascia flange with 3/8 inch drip at lower edge. 2. Furnish in 8 foot or 10 foot lengths. ID. Metal Step Flashing: As specified in Section 07 6000, and the following: 1. Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 4 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. ID. Metal Eave and Valley Flashing: As specified in Section 07 6000. E. Vent Pipe Flashings:As specified in Section 07 6000. III LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Asphalt Shingles: 07 3113 December 11,2015 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas,and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound,dry, and completely secured in position. 2. Verify that provision has been made for gutters,flashing,vents,and all other interface items attaching to or penetrating through Work of this Section. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to shingle work. 1. Cover knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with roofing nails. I B. Coordinate installation of shingles with flashing and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. 1. Do not install shingle roofing until vent stacks and other penetrations through roofing I have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with construction documents, and manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly into position for a completely weathertight installation. 111 B. Waterproof Composite Underlayment: 1. Install waterproof composite underlayment at eaves, rakes, ridges,and valleys in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Weather lap plies and end joints as recommended. Stagger end joints of each consecutive ply. 2. Extend eave and rake protection membrane minimum 24 inches beyond interior face of wall at perimeter of roof. 3. Install protection membrane extending 24 inches on each side of valleys. C. Felt Underlayment: 1. Install felt commencing at eave and laid parallel to eave. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. 2. Secure underlayment at 12 inches o.c. at all laps and 24 inches o.c. down to longitudinal centerline of each ply. 3. Interlace all piles at valley sections crossing for full coverage. 4. Seal Continuously around penetrations through roof with plastic cement. 5. Underlayment membrane must form a weatherproof barrier capable of shedding any moisture to which it may be exposed, allowing it to escape at eave. D. Shingles: 1. Install starter strip of roll roofing or inverted shingles with tabs removed;fasten shingles in pattern,weather exposure and number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Asphalt Shingles: 07 3113 I December 11, 2015 Page 5 2. Use horizontal and vertical chalk lines to ensure straight coursing. I 3. Comply with installation details and recommendations of shingle manufacturer and NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. • E. Flashing and Edge Protection: 1 1. Install metal flashing,vent flashing and edge protection as indicated and in compliance with details and recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. Ia. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. I2. Place eave edge,valley, hip, and rake edge metal flashing tight with fascia material. Weather lap joints 4 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure deck flange with nails spaced 12 inches o.c., staggered. a. Install metal flashing over waterproof composite membrane underlayment in valleys. I3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not permit unnecessary walking on finished roof; require all personnel to wear rubber- soled shoes when walking on finished roof. I END OF SECTION I I I I I 1 I I I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Roof Panels: 07 4113 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes preformed,field assembled, nonstructural metal roof panels, and associated Iintegral flashing. B. Related Sections: I 1. 2. Section 01 4115: Design-Build Requirements. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood battens, blocking and nailers. 3. Section 06 1600: Sheathing,for roof sheathing. I 4. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal 5. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants,for field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section. I1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight system. IB. Steel Sheet Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without metallic coatings or painted finishes. 1 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: Provide an attachment schedule signed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Oregon and supporting calculations for UL 580, Class 90 wind uplift rating. D. Wind Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panels that comply with UL 580 for Class 90. I1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data,for each type of specified product, on metal types,finishes, and characteristics, including installation instructions. I B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details,fastening methods, flashing, terminations, and installation details. I C. Samples: Two samples for each exposed finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements. IB. Field formed panels are not allowed. C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in metal roof panel installations 4 with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. I1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide twenty year warranty. Include coverage for structural I failure, degradation of metal finish, perforation, rupture, or leak due to corrosion. Warranty to cover entire system, including framing,flashing, counterflashing, gutters, and accessories. I , LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Roof Panels:07 4113 December 11, 2015 Page 2 B. Contractor's Warranty: Provide two year warranty from date of Substantial Completion. Include coverage for water tightness and integrity of seals. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF PANELS I A. Manufacturer:Taylor Metal Products, Inc. 1. Product: "Easy Lock Standing Seam" 2. Configuration: Integral self-locking standing seam, 1-1/8 inch high, 12 inches on center. ii. 3. Surface:Accent Ribs. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers with comparable products are the following: 1. AEP Span. C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel:ASTM A 924/A 792 Grade 40, 0.0209 inch (24 gage) thickness. 1. Protective Coating:ASTM A 653, G90 galvanized coating. 111 2. Finish: "DuraTech 5000" Polyvinylidene Fluoride; 70 percent Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000resins, minimum 0.2 mil thick corrosion-resistant primer, and 0.8 mil thick PVF2 finish coat for a total of 1.0 mil dry film thickness. 111 a. Color: Match AEP Span,Zinc Grey. 2.3 ACCESSORIES I A. Fasteners:Zinc coated and prefinished to match sheet metal where exposed to view;with soft neoprene washers,as recommended by panel manufacturer. I B. Underlayment:ASTM D 226,Type II, No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt, unless otherwise recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. C. Self-Adhering, High Temperature, Polyethylene-Faced Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, 0.030 inch thick composite waterproofing sheet with polyolefin film laminated to rubberized asphalt. 1. Product:Vycor Ultra, by W. R. Grace&Co.,or approved. D. Sealant: One-part polyurethane type, low modulus,Type II,Class A, as manufactured by Tremco,Sonneborn, Contech, General Electric, Pecora, or approved. E. Bedding Compound: Butyl type, 1 x 1/8 inch,as manufactured by Tremco, Chemco, or approved. I F. Anchors: Per manufacture's recommendations and as required to meet UL 580, Class 90 wind uplift rating. G. Flashing: Material, gage and finish to match panels. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard ApartmentsI Metal Roof Panels: 07 4113 December 11, 2015 Page 3 H. Snow Guards: Pad-style , metal snow guard. 1 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:Alpine SnoGuards, Berger Building Products, TRA Snow and Sun, Inc., or approved. 2. Material:Aluminum . 1 3. Finish and Color: Powder coat, color to match roof panel. 2.4 SHOP FABRICATION IA. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form panels in full length of sloped roof length,where possible. IC. Fabricate each metal flashing section in 10 foot runs. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendation in I SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Vet-fly roof deck is dry,free of snow or ice, clean and smooth,free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped. B. Verify field dimensions are as indicated in shop drawings prior to fabrication. IC. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set,reglets are in place, and nailing strips located. 1 1. Ensure penetrations are located in metal pan and not seam. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements of Section 07 6000. 3.3 INSTALLATION -GENERAL IA. Apply underlayment in single layer from eave to ridge, laid perpendicular to slope;weather lap edges 4 inches and nail in place. Minimize nail quantity; ensure that nail heads do not contact metal roof panels. IB. Apply self-adhering, high temperature, polyethylene-faced sheet underlayment at valleys, minimum 34 inches wide, and at other locations indicated or recommended by roof panel manufacturer. 1 1. Apply self-adhering, high temperature, polyethylene-faced sheet underlayment to entire roof deck for low pitch roofs with 3:12 slope or less. IC. Install metal roofing in accordance with roofing manufacture's instructions. D. Use bedding compound for joints between metal and bitumen or metal and felts. II E. Secure flashing in place using concealed fasteners. Connect units with specified joints and sealant. Fasten to surfaces at 6 inches o.c. minimum, with approved fasteners. F. Insulate dissimilar metal and incompatible surfaces with No. 30 felt, or as approved. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Roof Panels: 07 4113 , December 11, 2015 Page 4 G. Seal metal joints watertight. I 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves. B. Fully engage interlocking seams. C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches in direction of drainage. I 3.5 SNOW GUARD INSTALLATION I A. Mechanically anchor pad-style snow guard to metal roof panels with manufacturers required fasteners and per recommended instructions. 3.6 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Touch-up damaged paint. B. Sweep clean panels,flashing and gutters. END OF SECTION 1, I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Siding: 07 4623 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 111 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1 1. Cedar lap siding. B. Related Sections: II 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for building framing. 2. Section 06 1600: Sheathing I 3. Section 06 2000: Exterior Finish Carpentry,for wood trim. 4. Section 07 2800:Air/Water Barriers 5. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal. 6. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants 1 7. Section 09 9000: Painting,for field-applied finish. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data,for each type of product specified, including manufacturer's specifications and recommended details for installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS IA. Field Measurements:Verify that field measurements are as indicated in Shop Drawings. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to I manufacturer"written instructions. 1.5 COORDINATION IA. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,"for I lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. I B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, , include the following: 1. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 111 2. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Siding:07 4623 December 11, 2015 Page 2 C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade,species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber,furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of is each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade111 compliance issued by inspection agency. 2.2 SIDING A. Lumber Siding: Kiln-dried wood lumber for siding. 1. Species:Vertical Grain Western Red Cedar,WWPA Shiplap—1/2 Lap. 2. Size: 3/4 by 5-1/2 inches, 5 inch nominal exposure. 3. Lengths:96 inches standard with up to 10 percent of shorter lengths for offsetting end panels. 4. Butt Edge: Even. 11 5. Corners: Standing and running trim lumber as shown in Drawings and specified in Section 06 2000. 2.3 ACCESSORIES I A. Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as recommended by siding manufacture for building configurations. I B. Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 07 6000 at window and door heads and where indicated. 1. Horizontal Joint Flashing for Siding: Preformed galvanized steel or aluminum Z-shaped flashing. 2. Finish:Same color as siding. C. Air/Water Barrier: Specified in Section 07 2800. D. Joint Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9200. 1 E. Adhesives: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel, or top quality hot-dip galvanized nails, in sufficient length to 111 penetrate minimum 1 inch into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by siding manufacturer. 1. Countersink nails and fill voids where face nailing is unavoidable. 2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch or 3 screw threads into substrate. 2.4 FINISHING A. Apply sealer and transparent finish specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting." 1. Apply sealer in shop or in the field. d I I LRS Architects, Inc. I • Tigard Apartments Wood Siding: 07 4623 December 11, 2015 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that structure and surfaces to receive siding are straight, plumb,true, solid, rigid, dry, and otherwise properly prepared to receive Work of this Section. B. Verify air/water barrier has been installed over entire substrate to receive siding as specified in Section 07 2800,and is without damage. C. Repair damaged air/water barrier 9 e and other unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of siding work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with requirements for surface preparation and application in Section 09 9000, "Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions over air/water barrier on wall sheathing. B. Do not use siding materials that are unsound,warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. C. Install siding plumb, level,true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. 1. Locate joints over solid bearing. 2. Scribe and cut siding to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Countersink nails,fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. 5. Coordinate siding with standing and running trim. 6. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim. D. Lumber Siding: 1. Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. 2. Install first course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch below started strip and subsequent courses lapped 1 inch over course below. 3. Nail at each stud. 4. Leave 1/8 inch gap at trim and apply sealant. 5. Butt joints only at stud locations, nailing top and bottom on each side and staggering joints in subsequent courses. I3.4 FINISH A. Apply topcoat finish as specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting." 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Siding: 07 4623 December 11,2015 Page 4 B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 1 1 1 • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following fiber-cement products: I1. Lap siding. 2. Panel siding. 3. Shingle siding. I 4. Soffit board. 5. Exterior trim. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for building framing and wood rainscreen furring strips. I 2. Section 06 1600: Sheathing 3. Section 06 2000: Exterior Finish Carpentry,for wood fascia board. 4. Section 07 2800:Air/Water Barriers 5. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal. I 6. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 7. Section 09 9000: Painting,for field-applied finish. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data, for each type of product specified, including manufacturer's specifications and recommended details and methods for installation. p I B. Samples: 12 inches by width of unit, or 12 by 12 inch for panel products, of each type and texture specified. IC. Manufacturer's field inspection report. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Store products stacked on edge, or laid flat on a smooth, level surface. IB. Store off ground, undercover and protected from damage. 1. If products become wet, allow to dry thoroughly before installing. I1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to Imanufacturer"written instructions. 1.6 COORDINATION IA. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. I • 111 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646 December 11,2015 Page 2 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 30 year, transferable, warranty. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1. James Hardie Building Products. 2. Altura Fiber Cement Siding Products. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. Fiber Cement Siding:ASTM C 1186,Type A, Grade II, non-asbestos fiber-cement flat sheets. B. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: 1. Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 2. Minimum surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, meeting requirements of IBC for Class I: a. Flame Spread: 0 b. Fuel Contributed: 0 c. Smoke Density: 5 C. Thermal Resistance: 1. 5/16 inch thickness: R=0.15. 2. 1/4 inch thickness: R =0.13. D. Lap Siding: 1. Basis-of-Design:James Hardie Building Products, "Hardiplank" Lap Siding complying with the following: a. Thickness: 5/16 inch. b. Weight: 2.3 lbs/sq.ft. c. Width: 6-1/4 inch (5 inch exposure) and 9-1/4 inch (8 inch exposure), as indicated in Drawings. d. Length: 12 feet. e. Texture: "Smooth." E. Panel Siding: 111 1. Basis-of-Design:James Hardie Building Products, "Hardipanel"Vertical Siding complying with the following: a. Thickness: 5/16 inch. b. Weight: 2.3 lbs/sq.ft. c. Size: 4 by 8. d. Texture: "Smooth." I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 F. Shingle Panel Siding: I1. Basis-of-Design:James Hardie Building Products, HardieShingle Straight Edge panels, complying with the following: I a. Thickness: 1/4 inch. b. Weight: 1.9 lbs/sq.ft. c. Sheet Size: Straight Edge; 48 inch width by 16 inch height(7 inch exposure). IG. Soffit Board: 1. Basis-of-Design:James Hardie Building Products,"Hardisoffit" horizontal soffit board Icomplying with the following: a. Type: Nonvented. b. Thickness: 1/4 inch. c. Weight: 1.9 lbs/sq.ft. d. Size:48 inches by 8 feet. e. Texture: "Smooth." IH. Exterior Trim: 1. Basis-of-Design:James Hardie Building Products, "Harditrim 5/4 Smooth"complying with the following: Ia. Thickness: 5/4 (nominal). b. Weight: 5.65 lbs./sq.ft. c. Length: 12 feet. c. Nominal Width (Actual):As indicated in Drawings. d. Texture: "Smooth." I2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Flashing: I 1. Provide metal flashing complying with Section 07 6000 at window and door heads and where indicated. 2. Plank Joint Flashing: Manufactured by Tamlyn or approved. I a. Material: 3105-type aluminum sheet. b. Size:As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Finish: Same color as siding. I B. Air/Water Barrier: Specified in Section 07 2800. C. Joint Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9200. D. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended and approved by siding manufacturer for 90 MPH wind speed, exposure category B, as described in Tables 4 in ICC IEvaluation Service Report No. ESR-2290, and as follows: 1. Use only hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel nails. Use only stainless steel fasteners where exposed to weather. 1 2. Do not use electro-galvanized nails. E. Insect Screening: Cosella Dorken Products, Inc., Delta Bug Screen, monofilament matrix. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646 December 11,2015 Page 4 F. Rainscreen Furring Strips: Provide preservative-treated wood furring strips as specified in Section 06 1000, "Rough Carpentry." I G. Reveals at Panel Siding: 1. Manufacturer: Easytrim Reveals, Inc., or approved. I a. Material: Extruded Aluminum;6063 alloy in T-5 temper. b. Type: 1) EZ-1 Outside Square Corner. 2) EZ-2 Outside Rounded Corner. 3) EZ-3 Inside Corner. 4) EZ-4 Trim (horizontal perimeter trim/above wall penetration trim). 5) EZ-5 Horizontal Trim (horizontal main body wall area trim). 6) EZ-6, EZ-7 Vertical Back Plate and Vertical Top Cap (Panel to Panel). III 7) EZ-8 General J Trim. 8) EZ-9 Soffit J Trim (caps the top edge of horizontal panel at the soffit line terminating point). 9) EZ-10B-Trim (horizontal perimeter trim for overhangs and material/product type changes). 10) EZ-6, EZ-11 Vertical Back Plate and Vertical Top Cap (panel to plank/lap). 2.4 FACTORY PRIME FINISH A. Factory seal and prime,front and back of each unit,with manufacturer's acrylic factory sealing and priming system, compatible with finish paint specified in Section 09 9000. 1. James Hardie Building Products: "PrimePlus." B. For fiber-cement products not available factory primed,front and back,field prime as I specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting." PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that Surfaces to receive siding are straight, plumb,true,solid, rigid, dry,and otherwise properly prepared. II B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work. III C. Verify air/water barrier has been installed over entire substrate to receive siding as specified in Section 07 2800, and is without damage. D. Repair damaged weather barrier and other unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of siding I work. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions over wood rainscreen furring strips and weather barrier on wall sheathing. B. Fasten to solid backing in accordance with Table 4 in ICC Evaluation Service Report No. ESR-2290 for specified wind resistance. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Tigard Apartments Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646 1 December 11, 2015 Page 5 C. Install straight, plumb, level, parallel,true, and secure as appropriate. 1 D. Fit joints neatly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Accurately scribe to adjacent surface irregularities. IF. Fit accurately and neatly around any projections through siding. G. Install fiber-cement products so that they are not in ground contact or subjected to standing I water. H. Lap Siding and Shingle Plank Siding: I1. Blind nail horizontal planks to each wood stud at 16 inches on center. 2. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch from plank edges. 3. Overlap planks a minimum of 1-1/4 inches. I4. Space planks horizontally with a 1/8 inch maximum gap. a. Install joint flashing behind butt joints in accordance with,manufacturer's recommendations. 1 b. Overlap lower course by 1 inch. 5. Drive fasteners perpendicular to siding and framing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 6. Install to maximum variation in alignment of 1/8 inch in 10 linear feet. I. Panel Siding: I1. Install blocking behind all joints where joints do not occur at stud framing. 2. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch from panel edges, and no closer than 2 inches from panel corners. 11 3. Space fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for stud spacing and 90 MPH wind speed;6 inches at edges and 12 inches in field for studs at 16 inches OC. 4. Space panels with maximum gap recommended by manufacturer, horizontally and vertically. I 5. Drive fasteners perpendicular to siding and framing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Cover joints with aluminum reveals in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I a. Provide physical barrier between preservative-treated wood and aluminum reveal trims as recommended by manufacturer. I7. Install metal"Z"flashing at horizontal butt joints. 8. Install to maximum variation in alignment of 1/8 inch in 10 linear feet. IJ. Exterior Trim: 1. Install as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind speed. I3.3 FINISH A. For fiber-cement products that have not been factory primed,field prime front and back of each unit as specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting." IB. Field finish as specified in Section 09 9000, "Painting." I ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding: 07 4646 December 11, 2015 Page 6 3.4 FIELD QUALIY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Review: I 1. Manufacturer Field Inspection: Coordinate with the fiber-cement siding manufacturer's technical representative to conduct periodic in-progress inspections to verify installation is in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and meets all warranty requirements. The manufacturer shall provide a report of their observations in writing to the Architect and Contractor. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION t I I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A, Section includes flashing and sheet metal and trim including, but not limited to,the following: 1 1. Roof drainage systems. 2. Exposed trim. 3. Metal flashing. 1 4. Reglets. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 04 2200: Concrete Unit Masonry,for flashing associated with masonry work. 2. Section 04 7300: Manufactured Stone Masonry,for flashing associated with masonry work. I 3. Section 07 3113:Asphalt Shingles,for flashing associated with shingles. 4. Section 07 4113: Metal Roof Panels,for flashing associated with metal roof work. 5. Section 07 4646: Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding,for flashing associated with siding work. I 6. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants,for sealants. 7. Section 09 9000: Painting,for field painting. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. I B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal and trim, including plans and elevations. Include the following: I 1. Material,thickness,weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams,and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening,joining, supporting, and anchoring, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. IC. Samples: For each type of prefinished item with specified or selected color. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Installer Qualifications:An experienced installer who has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1 B. Fabrication Sheet Metal Manual."Standard: Comply with applicable recommendations of SMACNA's"Architecture! IC. Metal Seam Mockup: Build mockup to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of metal seams specified in paragraph 2.5.D. I b. Coordinate construction of mockup to allow observation by Architect and Envelope Consultant. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS IA. Coordination: Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. I ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 December 11, 2015 Page 2 B. Field Measurements: Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. 1.5 WARRANTY I A. Warrant Work of this Section to be watertight for 2 years following date of Substantial Completion. 'I 1. Warranty to cover repair of water leaks and resulting damage to building construction as may occur under normal usage within warranty period. 2. Include in warranty replacement of damaged materials that cannot be adequately repaired, as determined by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,thermally induced movement,and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation,or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 2.2 SHEET METALS I A. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: Sheet steel metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 111 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet:ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation, structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet:ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40, structural quality 3. Exposed Finish:Two-coat fluoropolymer finish,AAMA 620, containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. a. Color and Gloss:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. b. Resin Manufacturers: 1) Ausimont USA, Inc. (Hylar 5000). 2) Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500). 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet:ASTM A 240,Type 304, dead soft,fully annealed,with No. 2D (dull, cold rolled)finish. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 C. Aluminum Sheet:ASTM B 209,Alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,with temper suitable for forming and structural performance required. 1. Exposed Finish:Two-coat fluoropolymer finish,AAMA 620, containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating I to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS IA. Felts:ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), asphalt saturated organic felt, nonperforated. onperforated. B. High Temperature Poly-faced Flashing (FMF-4): Specified in Section 07 6500. I 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and type of fasteners,solder, welding rods, protective coatings, I separators, sealants,and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet meta,) or manufactured item, unless otherwise indicated. IB. Fasteners:Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal, or manufactured item: I 1. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling 9 scr ews, Basketed,with hex washer head.I a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. IC. Solder for Stainless Steel:ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. I D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, and nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. I E. Elastomeric Sealant:ASTM 920, elastomeric silicone type specified in Section 07 9200, or approved. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. I G. Reglets: Type and profile indicated,formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterfiashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated. I1. Material: Stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated: 2. Manufacturer: Fry Reglet Corporation, Hohmann &Barnard, Inc., Sandell Manufacturing, or approved. IH. Roofing Cement:ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. I. Roof Vent Pipe Flashing: Composite Material: Prepainted galvanized steel base with I thermoplastic elastomer collar. 1. Product: Oatey, No-Calk or approved. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 Page 4 December 11, 2015 1 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of I SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. i 1. Provide upturned folded end dams at flashing terminations. B. Comply with details shown and as required to fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance when installed. 1. Fabricate in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. I C. Form exposed sheet metal Work in longest lengths practicable,without excessive oil canning, buckling,and tool marks, and true to line and levels indicated. 1. Hem exposed edges,folded back minimum 1/2 inch. 2. Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drip. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams from one of the following types. For non-aluminum materials,tin edges to be seamed,form seams, and solder. 1. Standing Seams: 3/4 inch,double lock. 2. Lap Seams: 4 inch finish width with two beads of sealant. 111 3. Solder-Lap Seams: 1 inch finish width; sweat full with solder. 4. S-Lock Seams: Form 1-1/4 inch wide'S' shaped seam on one edge of flashing sheet for concealed fastening. 5. Cover Plate Seams: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by Architect for application. E. Expansion Provisions: Form,fabricate and install sheet metal to provide for expansion and contraction in the finished Work. 1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 2. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof,form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,filled with mastic sealant concealed within joints. F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. I G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. 1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. I H. Fabricate cleats and other attachment devices from same material and thickness as sheet metal component being anchored. I 111 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 December 11, 2015 Page 5 2.6 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS ' A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with other accessories as required. Fabricate seamless, one-piece gutters with integral hood. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size I recommended by cited sheet metal standard, but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. 1. Manufacturer: "LeafGuard"Covered Gutter System by Englert, or approved. 2. Gutter Profile:As indicated in Drawings. 2. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Prepainted Aluminum: 0.032 inch uncoated thickness. (20 gage). 3. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Prepainted Aluminum: 0.040 inch uncoated thickness (18 gage). B. Downspouts: Fabricate downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. 1. Prepainted Aluminum:0.024 inch uncoated thickness. C. Exposed Trim: Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). D. Base Flashing: Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). E. Counterflashing: Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). F. Valley Flashing: Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick (26 gage). G. Drip Edges: Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). H. Eave Flashing: Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). I. Roof Vent Pipe Flashing: Composite Material: Prepainted galvanized steel base with thermoplastic elastomer collar. 1. Product: Oatey, No-Calk or approved. 2.7 FINISH A. Provide prepainted, metallic coated steel and aluminum sheet where indicated. B. Field apply paint finish as specified in Section 09 9000 for items not prepainted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, securely anchored, and are ready to receive Work of this Section. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. i I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flashing and Sheet Metal:07 6000 December 11, 2015 Page 6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General:Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Use fasteners, solder,welding rods, protective coatings,separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 2. Install Work in according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. B. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 1. Conceal fasteners where possible. I 2. Install with exposed edges folded back to form hems. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim true to lines and levels indicated. Provide neat 111 seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds, and sealant. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to result in watertight performance. 1. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet I metal. E. Expansion Provisions: I 1. Space movement joints at maximum 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 2. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof,form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,filled with mastic sealant concealed within joints. I F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. I 1. Do not solder prepainted, metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Stainless Steel Soldering: Pretin edges using solder recommended for stainless steel and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux residue from metal after soldering. 3. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 1. Fill joint with sealant, minimum 1/4 inch diameter bead, and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 2. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. I H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with specified seams. Tin edges to be seamed,form seams, and solder. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 I December 11, 2015 Page 7 I. Metal Protection:Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,and I protect against galvanic action painting contact surfaces with bituminous mastic coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat uncoated aluminum, stainless steel, and lead flashing and trim in contact with I 2. wood,ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. Underlayment: Install course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet where metal flashing is installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates. IJ. Install reglets to receive counterflashing where shown or indicated. 1. Where reglets are shown in concrete or masonry,furnish reglets for installation under Sections 03 3000, 04 2200, or 04 7300. I K. Counterflashings: Coordinate with installation of base flashing. I 1. Lap-seam vertical joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. 2. Miter, lap-seam, and close corner joints with solder. 3. Overlap base flashing 4 inches minimum. 4. Install bottom edge spring-tight against base flashing. 1 5. Provide where roof intersects vertical surfaces, and where indicated. L. Cleats: I 1. 2. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor cleats with 2 fasteners to prevent cleat rotation. 3. Bend tabs over fastener head. IM. Roof Vent Pipe Flashing: 1. Place correct size flashing over vent stack with angle facing down slope of roof. I 2. Use corrosions resistant fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 3. Secure top of flashing to roof at each corner and at spacing recommended by manufacturer. 4. Lap bottom edge of flashing over roof shingles. I3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and I weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. 1. Neutralize flux as work progresses with 5 percent to 10 percent washing soda solution, and thoroughly rinse. I C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicate in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials I and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. 2. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. I D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim damaged or that has deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flexible Flashing: 07 6500 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes flexible membrane flashing used to seal and bridge air leakage pathways Iand gaps in the air/water barrier and at other locations indicated in Drawings. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 07 2800:Air/Water Barriers,for coordination of installation with air/water barrier system. 2. Section 07 3113:Asphalt Shingles,for self-adhering underlayment associated with I 3. roofing. Section 07 4113: Metal Roof Panels,for self-adhering underlayment associated with roofing. 4. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet metal, for metal flashing. I5. Section 07 9200: Sealants,for coordination of installation with sealant. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include installation instructions, instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, temperature and other limitations of installation conditions, technical data and tested physical and performance properties. I1. Provide confirmation in writing from manufacturer that flexible flashing is compatible with adjacent materials at transitions, including roofing and below grade waterproofing. IB. Samples: for each material specified. IC. Manufacturer's field inspection report. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications:An experienced installer who has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Mockup: Specified in Section 07 2800, "Air/Water Barriers." I C. Coordinate with the air/water barrier manufacturer's technical representative to verify installation is in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and meets all wrranty Irequirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I A. Deliver flexible membrane flashings in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store flexible membrane flashing materials as recommended by manufacturer. 1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Conditions: Do not install flexible membrane flashings in snow, rain, or other condition I not recommended by manufacturer. B. Compatibility: Do not allow flexible membrane flashing to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flexible Flashing: 07 6500 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.6 SEQUENCING I A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of flexible membrane flashing with adjoining construction to provide a leak-proof,airtight, secure,and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE FLASHING A. Flexible Membrane Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt or butyl compound, bonded to a polyethylene or polyolefin or aluminum foil film to produce an overall thickness as indicated. I 1. Poly-faced Flashing (FMF-1): 0.9 mm (36 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.1 mm (4 mils) of cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene to provide a minimum 1.0 mm (40 mil)thick membrane. a. Basis of Design: Fortifiber Fortiflash (40-mil) or DuPont StraightFlash or other approved proprietary flexible flashing membrane produced by air/water barrier manufacturer. I b. Contractor's Option: If approved by the manufacturer of air/water barrier system, one of the following products may be provided in lieu of basis-of- design: 1) Grace Construction Products,a unit of W. R. Grace&Co.: Perma-A- Barrier Detail Membrane. 2) Henry Company: Blueskin WB. 3) Protecto Wrap Company: BT40XL. c. Location: Membrane used on vertical surfaces. 2. Foil-faced Flashing (FMF-2): 0.9 mm (35 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt I integrally bonded to 0.1 mm (5 mils) of aluminum film to provide a 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick membrane. a. Basis of Design: Grace Construction Products Perm-A-Barrier Aluminum I Flashing. b. Contractor's Option: If approved by the manufacturer of air/water barrier I system, one of the following products may be provided in lieu of basis-of- design: 1) Henry Company, HE200AM,45 mil SBS product. 2) Protecto Wrap Company, PS45 Roof and Gutter Tape, 40 mil butyl hybrid product. c. Location: Membrane on window and door sills, and on other horizontal surfaces where liquid water may deposit prior to drainage. 3. Poly-crepe-faced Flashing (FMF-3): a. Basis of Design: Fortifiber Fortiflex (60-mil bitumen) or DuPont FlexWrap NF (60 mil butyl) or other approved proprietary flashing produced by the air/water barrier manufacturer. b. Location: Conformable membrane for use at curved windows and locations indicated in Drawings. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Flexible Flashing: 07 6500 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 4. High Temperature Poly-faced Flashing (FMF-4): Minimum 25 mil thickness with a maximum service temperature of not less than 240 F. a. Basis of Design: Grace Construction Products: Grace Ultra Roofing Underlayment, 30 mil butyl rubber product. I b. Contractor's Option: If approved by the manufacturer of air/water barrier system, one of the following products may be provided in lieu of basis-of- design: l 1) Henry Company: Blueskin PE 200 HT, 40 mil SBS product. 2) Grace Construction Products: Grace Vycor Butyl Window and Door Flashing,25 mil butyl rubber product. I3) Fortifiber FortiFlash Butyl, 30 mil butyl rubber product. c. Location: Membrane used under exterior metal copings, cap flashings, at fireplace terminations, and as indicated in Drawings. 1 5. Masonry Through-wall Flashing (FMF-5): Not used. 6. Below-grade Flashing (FMF-6): Minimum 40 mil poly-faced composite membrane. Ia. Grace Construction Products: Bituthene 3000 or Bituthene 4000, 1/16 inch rubberized asphalt product. I1) Provide Grace Construction Products, System 4000 Surface Conditioner Primer under FMF-6. b. Location: Membrane used on vertical and horizontal surfaces below grade, as I at base of wall. B. Primer: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. I2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Elastomeric Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9200. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, securely anchored, and ready to receive Work of this Section. IB. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION IA. General: Install flexible, self-adhering sheet flashing in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. IB. Flexible Membrane Flashing: 1. Install flexible membrane flashing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. I 3. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 4. Lap flashing over weather barrier at bottom and sides of openings. ' 5. Lap weather barrier over top edge of flexible membrane flashing. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Flexible Flashing:07 6500 December 11, 2015 Page 4 1 6. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 1 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Review: I 1. Manufacturer Field Inspection:Coordinate with the air/water barrier manufacturer's technical representative to conduct periodic in-progress inspections to verify installation is in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and meets all warranty requirements. The manufacturer shall provide a report of their observations in writing to the Architect. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION i A. Replace flexible membrane flashing that is damaged or that has deteriorated beyond successful repair. END OF SECTION 1 • 1 S 1 1 I 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 I December 11, 2015 PP 9 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Ii. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8443: Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping. I 2. Section 09 9000: Painting,for field finish applied to exposed fire stop materials. 3. Division 22: Plumbing, specifying piping penetrations. 4. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, specifying duct penetrations. I 5. Division 26: Electrical, specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated or proposed to be provided under this I Section. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design I designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for particular penetration firestopping condition, submit I illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment oreequivalent fire- resistance-rated assembly. 2. If more than one installer for penetration firestopping systems, provide a single I submittal of product data and shop drawings,jointly prepared by all installers. C. Qualification Data: For installer(s). If more than one installer, provide a single submittal of documentation indicating qualifications and responsibilities of each installer. I D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for penetration firestopping. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and I methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. 1. It is preferred that a single qualified installer approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors" be assigned for installation of I penetration firestopping systems. If installer, or installers, are not FMG approved, provide documentation that installer(s) is qualified to install Work of this Section. Architect reserves the right to reject installer(s) who does not have a successful Ihistory of installing penetration firestopping systems. B. Source Limitations: Obtain penetration firestopping systems,for each kind of penetration and construction condition required,from a single manufacturer. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Y I Penetration Firestopping:07 8413 Tigard Apartments Page 2 December 11,2015 C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested according to testing standard referenced in"Penetration Firestopping"Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and I inspecting agency. D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems are installed according to specified requirements. E. Coordinate sizing of sleeves,openings,core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. I F. Inspections: Manufacturer's technical representative shall perform random inspection to verify compliance with codes. Document compliance in writing. 1. Do not cover firestop systems installations that will become concealed behind other I construction until each installation has been examined by manufacturer's technical representative,or building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Preconstruction Conference: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100. 1 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the following: I 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on IBC, Section 712, Penetrations, and Section 713, Fire-Resistant Joint Systems. 2. Penetrations:ASTM E 814. 3. Fire-Resistant Joint Systems:ASTM E 1966. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the penetration firestopping systems required for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Firestop Systems, Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 111 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. 3M; Fire Protection Products. 1 B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING I A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,pand original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems stems I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Penetration Firestopping:07 8413 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 shall be compatible with one another,with the substrates forming openings, and with Ipenetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined according to ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure Idifferential of 0.01 inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls and smoke-barrier walls. I 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined according to ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure I differential of 0.01 inch wg. 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling ing membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. I 2. F-Rating:At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating:At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated,except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. ID. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined according to UL 1479. I i. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq.ft. of penetration opening at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. I E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed Iindexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined according to ASTM E 84. G. Accessories: Provide components for each firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with"Penetration Firestopping"Article. I1. Use only components specified by firestop system manufacturer and approved by the testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. IB. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been'corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION IA. Clean surfaces in contact with firestop materials of foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop materials. I B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestop system manufacturer using manufacturer's recommended products and methods. I LRS Architects, Inc. milik I Tigard Apartments Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 December 11,2015 Page 4 I C. Use masking and temporary covering to prevent contact of firestop materials with adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would be permanently I stained or damaged by such contact. 3.3 INSTALLATION I A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with"Penetration Firestopping" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of type required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. I C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings,forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire resistance ratings required. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating materials. I 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work,finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION I A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing enetration firestopping systems with the words, "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER—PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 3/8 inch strokes;contrasting color to background. III Locate in accessible concealed floor,floor-ceiling,or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall in accordance with Chapter 7 of the State Building Code based on the International I Building Code. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's technical representative shall perform random inspection to verify compliance I to codes,and document compliance in writing. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace penetration firestopping systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. I 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with I cleaning materials approved by firestop system manufacturers. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure I firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Repair damaged material as necessary. END OF SECTION 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Tigard Apartments Fire-Resistive Joint Firesto in 07 8443 I December 11, 2015 pp g Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: I1. Joints in or between fire-resistance rated constructions. 2. Joints in smoke barriers. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8413: Penetration Firestopping,for systems installed in opening in walls I 2. and floors with and without penetrating items. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants,for non-fire-resistive joint systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system. IB. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1 1. Where a project conditions require medication to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with I modifications marked approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. I D. Installer Certificates: From installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified I testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors", or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's"Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements". IB. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. l C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements: I 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping: 07 8443 Page 2 I December 11, 2015 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems"Article and comply with the following: I a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing I system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed I according to specified requirements. E. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined I each installation. F. Preconstruction Conference: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Comply with the following: I 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code Amendments based on IBC, Section 713: Fire-resistive Joint Systems. I 2. Fire-Resistant Joint Systems:ASTM E 1966. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fire-resistive joint systems required for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: I 1. Cemco. 2. Grace Construction Products. I 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. 3M Fire Protection Products. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. I 2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist I spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building I movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. I I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping: 07 8443 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 B. Joints in or between fire-resistive-rated construction. Provide fire-resistive joint systems with Iratings determined according to ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls,floor or floor/ceiling assemblies, and roof or roof/ceiling assemblies. I 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join. C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined according to UL 2079. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joints at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and Ielevated temperatures. D. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 1 inch wg or ASTM E 2307. 1. Fire-resistive rating: equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor Iassembly. E. Exposed fire-resistance joint systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined according to IASTM E 84. F. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and I forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION I A. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. I B. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve I 2. fire-resistance ratings indicated. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrate formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the work,finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 111 END OF SECTION I I I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants: 07 9200 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes elastomeric joint sealants for building applications shown or indicated, and I as required to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 04 2200: Concrete Unit Masonry,for preformed joint fillers in masonry. 2. Section 06 4000:Architectural Woodwork ry 3. Section 07 8443: Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping,for fire-resistant sealant used in I firestopping assemblies. 4. Section 08 8000: Glazing,for glazing sealant. 5. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board, for installation of acoustical sealant used in sound control gypsum board partitions. I 6. Section 09 8110:Acoustic Insulation and Sealant,for acoustical sealants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each joint sealant product indicated, including manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. I B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1. Upon request of Architect, submit physical samples of each sealant, backing material, 1 primer, and bond breaker proposed for use. C. Warranties: Copies of special installers and manufacturers warranties. ID. SWRI Validation: Evidence that each exterior elastomeric sealant has been validated by the Sealant Weatherproofing Restoration Institute's(SWRI) Sealant Validation Program. IE. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Joint substrates and sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint materials. I 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Field Test Report Log: For each exterior elastomeric sealant application. I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Applicator Qualifications: Use workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. I B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) requirements for I materials and installation. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 , I Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants: 07 9200 Page 2 I December 11, 2015 D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below,samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. I 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. I 2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 3. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 4. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with,joint substrates. I E. Provide products that have been tested according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified within a 36 month period preceding commencement of the Work. I F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Section 01 3100. I 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to job site in their manufacturer's original containers,with labels intact and legible, and maintain intact until time of use. I B. Do not retain material that has exceeded shelf life recommended by manufacturer. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS I A. Do not install sealant when joint substrates are wet, or ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits recommended by manufacturer. I 1`.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Provide warranty in which installer agrees to repair or replace ' elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure. I 1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: 5 years. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide warranties in which manufacturer agrees to repair I or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure. 1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: I a. 20 years for exterior use Silicones. b. 20 year non-stain warranty for exterior sealants. 111c. 5 years for Polyurethane sealants. • I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants:07 9200 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 MATERIALS-GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible I with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Stain Characteristics: Provide elastomeric joint sealant products that are nonstaining to I porous substrates and have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 1. In exposed installation, use color of approximate color of adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise approved. I2. In concealed installation use standard gray or black sealant. 2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS I A. Silicone—Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus): 1. Single-Component, nonsag, neutral curing,ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, I Class 100/50 (Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression). 2. Products: One of the following, or approved. I a. Dow Corning DC 790. b. GE SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora 890. IB. Silicone-Class 25 (Medium Modulus): . 1. Single-Component, non-sag,ASTM C 920,Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 25, (Joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in compression). I2. Products: One of the following, or approved. a. Dow Corning DC 758 Weather Barrier Sealant. I C. Polyurethane -Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus): 1. Single-Component, nonsag,ASTM C 920,Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 100/50 I (Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression). 2. Products: One of the following, or approved. a. Sika Sikaflex— 15LM Low Modulus Sealant ID. Polyurethane Sealant- Class 25 (Medium Modulus): 1. Single-Component, non-sag,ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 25, I 2. (Joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in compression). Products: One of the following, or approved. I a. BASF Sonneborn Sonolastic NP1. b. BASF Sonneborn Sonolastic TX1. • c. Pecora Dynatrol I-XL. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants: 07 9200 ' December 11, 2015 . Page 4 E. Latex Sealant: 1 1. Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex,ASTM C 834,Type OP, Grade NF. 2. Products:One of the following,or approved. I a. BASF Sonneborn Sonolac. b. Pecora AC-20+. F. Traffic-Grade Polyurethane Sealant—Class 25: I 1. Single-Component, non-sag or pourable as applicable, neutral curing,ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS or P, Uses T and I, Class 25, (Joint movement range 25 percent in I extension and 25 percent in compression). 2. Products: One of the following, or approved. a. BASF Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 1. I b. Pecora Urexpan NR-201. c. Sika Sikaflex- 1 a or Sikaflex- 1 CSL. G. Silicone Mildew-Resistant Sealant: I 1. Single-Component; mildew-resistant, neutral curing,ASTM C 920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, Use related to joint substrates, G, A, and 0; I and complying with FDA Regulation No. 21 CFR 177.2600. 2. Products: One of the following, or approved. a. Dow Corning DC 786. I b. GE Silicones Sanitary SCSI 700. c. Pecora 898. H. Foam Air-Infiltration Sealant: I 1. Product: Kwik Foam by DAP, or approved. I. Preformed Foam Sealant: I 1. Preformed, precompressed,open-cell foam sealant of high-density urethane foam, permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining,with pressure I sensitive adhesive backing, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealant;joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in compression. I 2. Products:One of the following, or approved. a. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., Emseal 25V. b. . Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc., Polyseal. I 2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS A. Use only those backup materials that are non-absorbent, non-staining, and specifically I recommended by manufacturer for installation with type of sealant used. B. Sealant Backer Rod: Provide one of the following Type B backing rods (bicellular material with a surface skin)unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer: I 1. Nomaco Inc.: "Sof Rod." 2. BASF Sonneborn: "Soft Backer Rod." I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants: 07 9200 1 December 11, 2015 Page 5 I C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS IA. Primer: Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on surfaces to be sealed, and are specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer for adhesion of joint sealant substrates, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field I tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to sealant and backing material manufacturer,formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealant with joint I substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealant and surfaces I adjacent to joints. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. I B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Surface clean joints immediately before installing sealant complying with manufacturer's instructions, and the following: I1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of sealant, including dust, oil, grease, rust, lacquer, laitance, loose mortar, ice and frost. IB. Concrete and Masonry: 1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, or mechanical abrading; remove loose particles from cleaning operations by vacuuming I2. or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Where surfaces have been treated, remove surface treatment by sandblasting or wire brushing. I 3. Remove laitance and mortar from masonry joint cavities 4. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. C. Metal surfaces: I1. Scrape steel surfaces with metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust. 2. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaner which leaves no residue to remove oil and grease, and protective coatings, wiping surfaces with clean rags. ID. Prime joints substrates where recommended by sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. I1. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants:07 9200 I December 11,2015 Page 6 E. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods I required to remove sealant smears. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install joint sealers in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 1. Do not paint silicone sealants. 2. Where painting-of sealants is a concern, obtain approval of Architect prior to application where use of polyurethane sealants is allowed. I B. Sealant Backings: 1. Install material to uniform depth below sealant. 2. Using tool,smoothly and uniformly place backup material to depth of approximately 1/2 joint width (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch), compressing backup material 25 percent to 50 percent and securing a positive fit. 3. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 4. Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. C. Install bond breaker tape behind sealant where sealant backing is not used between sealant and back of joints. I D. Install sealant by proven techniques at the same time backings are installed. 1. Thoroughly fill joints to recommended depth with sealant in direct contact with joint substrates. 2. Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3. Prevent three-sided adhesion of sealant to substrates. E. Tool joints to profile shown in Drawings, or as indicated below if such profiles are not shown in Drawings. I 1. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface,flush at edges with adjacent surface,according to ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. I 2. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer. 3. Leave sealant surface neat and smooth. F. Install preformed foam sealant according to manufacturer's instructions, taking care not to pull or stretch material. I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants: 07 9200 December 11, 2015 Page 7 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL IA. Field Adhesion Testing: Test completed joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Test joint sealant after sealant has cured (usually within 7 to 21 days). I 2. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of sealant and joint substrate, and 1 test each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter. 3. Test Method:Test according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in ASTM C 1193,Appendix X1. I4. Record results in a field-adhesion test log. Include the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to Ijoint substrates or tore cohesively. 1) Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. I 2) Compare results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. I c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Include in test log, dates when sealants were installed, names of installers, test dates, I test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test areas by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. a. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. IB. Evaluation of Field Test Reports: 1. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. 2. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. 3. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated I requirements. 3.5 CLEANING,ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION IA. Clean adjacent exposed surfaces free from sealant as installation progresses, using cleaning agent recommended by manufacturer of sealant used. I1. Repair damaged surfaces. 3.6 SEALANT SCHEDULE IA. Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Includes joints in concrete, masonry, metals,at perimeter of building exterior door and window frames, and at other openings and joints in exterior walls: I a. Silicone-Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus), unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific application and approved by Architect. b. Color:As selected by Architect. ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Joint Sealants: 07 9200 December 11, 2015 Page 8 2. Includes joints in air/water barriers and flexible membrane flashings at exterior door and window frames, and wall penetrations: a. Silicone-Class 25 (Medium Modulus), unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific application and approved by Architect. b. Color:As selected by Architect. 3. Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces in Wood, Fiber-Cement Siding, and where painting of sealant is allowed by approval of Architect: a. Polyurethane Sealant-Class 25 (Medium Modulus). B. Interior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Nontraffic Surfaces: I 1. At building interiors except at perimeter of door and window frames in exterior walls: a. One of the Following Types: 1 1) Latex. 2) Polyurethane Sealant-Class 25 (Medium Modulus). I b. Color:As selected by Architect. 2. At building interiors at perimeter of door and window frames in exterior walls: I a. Polyurethane Sealant—Class 100/50 (Ultra Low Modulus). b. Color:As selected by Architect. Ili ii C. Interior Horizontal Traffic Surfaces: 1. Polyurethane Traffic-Grade Sealant-Single-Component, Class 25. I D. Around electrical boxes, between framing and openings at other locations where insulation in exterior walls is interrupted: Foam Air-infiltration Sealant. E. At Toilet Fixture Joints: Silicone mildew-resistant sealant. I END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 i December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8: 1 1. Hollow metal steel doors. 2. Hollow metal welded steel frames. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware 2. Section 09 9000: Painting,for painting of hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance,fire-resistanceratings, and finishes for each type of hollow metal door and frame specified. I B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of hollow metal door and frame, elevations of door designs, details of openings, dimensions, and anchorage. C. Door and Frame Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in I Contract Drawings. D. Submit evidence that doors, and door and frame assemblies, have been tested and approved by governing jurisdiction for the following labeled construction: I 1. Fire protection rating label for doors and frames. 2. Smoke control"S" label for door and frame assemblies. IIE. Certification: Submit certification that work of this Section complies with ANSI/SDI A250.8, or equivalent standards of HMMA 861 (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association). 1. Submit a separate certification by manufacturer of steel doors and frames that 11, preparation of metals and factory applied primer is as specified in Section 09 9000. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE iA. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper installation of work of this Section. I B. Provide doors and welded frames from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise specifically approved by Architect. I C. Minimum Quality Standards: Comply with latest edition of following standards of ANSI and the Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and I 2. Frames. SDI 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 3. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. SDI 112,Zinc-Coated Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 6. SDI 118, Basic Fire Door Requirements. I • LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized,wrapped,or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Store in protected dry area, in a vertical position with heads up, on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking, spaced 1/4 inch minimum between each stacked door to permit air circulation. C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames,tack welded to jambs and mullions. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames,and as required with other 111 trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Welded Frames: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by any manufacturer that can provide and certify to fabrication of products that meet or exceed requirements of ANSI, SDI (Steel Door Institute), or HMMA (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association), and requirements of these specifications. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Comply with Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, or Warnock Hersey requirements,and attach acceptance label permanently to each fire door and frame assembly. B. Smoke and Draft Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B, suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet:ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B;free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B; with minimum G60 zinc(galvanized) or A60 zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed) metallic coating. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanize according to ASTM A 153. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur Icomponents, and other deleterious impurities. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6 to 12 lb/cu.ft. density; with maximum I flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide hollow metal doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces,without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless I otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical performance level. B. Exterior Doors: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1, Embossed 1 Panel Design. 1. Material: Minimum 0.042 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness, cold-rolled, metallic I 2. coated sheet steel. Core:ASTM C 578 Type 1, Polystyrene or polyurethane foam bonded to both face skins with minimum U-value rating of 0.41. 3. Design: Provide embossed panel design as indicated in Drawings. C. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Size:As required to fit frame opening indicated in Door Schedule. II E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. IF. Fire-Resistance and Smoke Control Rating:As indicated in Door Schedule. 2.5 HOLLOW METAL WELDED FRAMES A. Provide hollow metal welded steel frames for doors, and other openings according to ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. IB. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners,full profile welded. 1. Fabricate frames installed in drywall partitions with backbend r eturn (double backbend). C. Exterior Frames: Minimum 0.067 inch (14 gage) uncoated thickness metallic coated cold- rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with integral nail flange welded to frame. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as frames. 1 E. Provide frames with steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 December 11, 2015 Page 4 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate hollow metal door and frame units to be rigid,free of defects,warp, or I buckle. 1. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from only cold-rolled steel sheet. 2. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and molding from either cold or hot-rolled steel sheet. 3. Close top and bottom of doors flush, except where approved by Architect for an inverted U channel to accommodate specified hardware. 4. Bevel lock and hinge side edges of doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches. B. Exterior Doors: i 1. Provide weep hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. 2. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. C. Welded Frames: I 1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind,fill, dress, and make smooth,flush, and invisible. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. 3. Plaster Guards:Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames installed in concrete or masonry. 4. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or 11 joints;fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 5. Floor Anchors:Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Locate anchors appropriate for substrate not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame.Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. a. Stud-Wall Type: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c II 7. Door Silencers: Except on frames to receive weatherstripping or gasketing, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single leaf door openings,and 2 silencers on heads of double leaf door openings. II D. Clearances: Fabricate with following clearances, except for fire doors provide clearances according to NFPA 80. 1. Between doors and frames: 1/8 inch. 2. Between door bottoms and thresholds: 1/4 inch. • 3. Between door bottoms and floor:3/4 inch. 4. - Between meeting edges of non-fire rated pairs of doors: 3/32 inch J E. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 I December 11, 2015 Page 5 F. Fabricate galvanized steel doors and frames according to SDI 112. IG. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare doors and frames to receive hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. II 1. Comply with requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 2. Provide space, cutouts, reinforcing for concealed overhead door closers and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. I 3. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings, or, if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2.7 FINISHES 1 A. Preparation: Clean surfaces and apply pretreatment of conversion coating typesuited to organic finish coating. IB. Hollow Metal Steel Doors and Welded Steel Frames: Factory Prime for Field-Painted Finish: 1. Apply manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive shop primer complying with ANSI/SDI I A250.10 immediately after surface and pretreatment that is compatible with finish paint systems specified in Section 09 9000 and suited to substrate. C. Factory Primed Hollow Metal Steel Doors and Frames: Field apply finish coats of paint as I specified in Section 09 9000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. I1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify flexible membrane flashing has been installed at all exterior door wall openings as 111 specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6526. 3.2 INSTALLATION IA. Install hollow metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. I B. Placing Frames: Comply ANSI/SDI 250.11, and the following: I 1. 2. Where possible, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls. Set frames accurately into position, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. It a. Frames in final position to be plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum from squared and plumbed alignment. 3. After frames have been installed and wall construction is completed, remove I 4. temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. At in-place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and suitable anchorage devices. Provide "Z"fillers at each screw location. 5. Provide sealant between frame and adjacent wall material. 111 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 December 11 2015 Page 6 6. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 7. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. I C. Installing Doors: 1. Set doors flush with frame face and plumb to hold in any position. 2. Fit doors accurately in frames within specified clearances. 3. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 4. Install smoke control doors according to NFPA 105 with frames that have been constructed and tested as an assembly in accordance with UL 1784 and approved for "S" label. 3.3 CLEANING,ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION / A. Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. I 1. During warranty period,check and adjust operating finish hardware items for smooth and quiet operation. B. Immediately after erection,sand smooth rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touch up of compatible,air-drying primer. C. Clean exposed surfaces of Work of this Section and repair as required. I END OF SECTION I I II I 1 II I I LRS Architects, Inc. 111 I ITigard Apartments ' Wood Doors: 081400 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL i1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 111 1. Interior solid core flush wood swing doors. 2. Interior hollow core bi-fold wood doors. 3. Interior solid core molded panel wood doors. I B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 06 4000:Architectural Woodwork,for wood door frames. 2. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware. 3. Section 08 8000: Glazing for glass in wood doors. 4. Section 09 9000: Painting,for finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction,trim for Iopenings,fire-resistance ratings, and factory finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations of each kind of door, location and extent of hardware blocking, and details of door construction not included in Product Data. I C. Door Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in Contract Drawings. 1 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and other finish requirements. 1 3. Indicate locations and dimensions of cutouts. 4. Indicate fire rating for fire doors. D. Samples:Approximately 8 by 8 inches in size, of each door face material with each type of Ispecified finish. E. Submit evidence that doors, and door and frame assemblies, have been tested and approved by governing jurisdiction for the following labeled construction: 1. Fire protection rating label for doors and frames. 2. Smoke control"S" label for door and frame assemblies. 111 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following: I1. Architectural Woodwork Institute's(AWI)and Woodwork Institute's (WI)"Architectural Woodwork Standards" (AWS). IIB. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door through one source from a single manufacturer. I , 1 ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Doors: 08 1400 a December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 and tested according to NFPA2 i that are listed and labeled for fire protection indicated, and for smoke control with"S" label where indicated and required by current Building Code,when tested according to UL 1784 for smoke control door assemblies. 1. Comply with Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, or Warnock Hersey requirements,and attach acceptance label permanently to each fire door and frame assembly. II B. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Protect doors during transit,storage,and handling to prevent damage,soiling, and deterioration. I 1. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Deliver doors individually packaged in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 3. Deliver doors clearly marked with manufacturer's name, size, and thickness. 4. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used in Shop Drawings. 5. Immediately open, but don't remove,wrap at Project site to ventilate. B. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another; lift doors and carry them into position. I 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed,wet work is complete, and HVAC I system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of construction period. 1.7 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate with or trades as required to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 0 1. Coordinate fabrication of doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 7100. 1.8 WARRANTY 1 A. Special Warranty: Signed by manufacturer, installer,and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials and workmanship, and do not meet specified fabrication tolerances. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion. a. Interior Solid Core Doors: 5 years. _. b. Hollow Core Interior Doors: 2 years. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Doors: 08 1400 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Flush Wood Doors:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the Ifollowing: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. BJ Doors. I 3. Cenco. 4. Eggers Industries. 5. Graham. 6. Lynden Door, Inc. I 7. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 8. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. 9. VT Industries. I10. Western Oregon Door. B. Molded Panel Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. CraftMaster Door Designs. 2. Lynden Door, Inc. IC. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 FLUSH DOORS IA. Interior Solid Core Doors: 1. Types: Flush face. I2. Construction: a. Non-Rated Doors: PC-5. b. Fire-Resistant Rated Doors: FD-5. I3. Sizes and Relites: See Door Schedule. 4. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 5. Core: I a. Non-Rated and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Particleboard;ANSI A208-1 Grade 1, LD-2. b. Fire-Resistant Rated Doors: Non-combustible mineral composite without I asbestos. 6. Side Stiles: 1-3/8 inch minimum width. I 7. Fire and Smoke Control Rating:As indicated in Door Schedule. 8. Finish: Opaque. B. Interior Hollow Core Doors: . 1 1. Type: Flush face bi-fold 2. Construction:SHC-7. 3. Sizes and Relites: See Door Schedule. I 4. Thickness: 1-3/8 inches. 5. Core: Cellular hollow core. 6. Side Stiles: 1-3/8 inch minimum width. 7. Finish: Opaque. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Doors: 08 1400 December 11, 2015 Page 4 C. Doors for Opaque Finish: 111• 1. Faces: Medium density overlay over standard thickness hardwood face veneers. 2. AWl Grade: Custom. D. Glass:As specified in Section 08 8000. 1 1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201,for CategoryII materials. 2.3 MOLDED PANEL DOORS A. Interior Solid Core Molded Panel Doors: 1 1. Type: Single Panel. 2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard molded overlay construction. 3. Sizes and Relites: See Door Schedule. 4. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches 5. Core: Particleboard. 7. Finish: Opaque. 8. Design Standard: CraftMaster Door Designs; Colonist Commercial Smooth. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Comply with the following AWS Quality Standards: Il 1. AWS Section 9, "Doors." B. Bond door faces to cores, stiles and rails with adhesive. Bond edge banding to core. C. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard core doors as indicated to eliminate through- bolting hardware for hardware items listed below. Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for fire-rated doors. 1. Closers: 5 inch top rail blocking. 2. Kick, Mop, or Armor Plates: 5 inch bottom rail blocking. 3. Exit Devices:5 inch midrail blocking. D. Machine and hand sand exposed surfaces. I E. Light Openings: 1. Provide wood frames for light openings same species as door faces with recessed I tapered beads. F. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated with uniform clearances and bevels per requirements of referenced quality standard. II G. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. I2.5 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between 2 diagonal measurements. B. Maximum warp: 1/4 inch space measured from horizontal,vertical, or diagonal straight edge 111 to point of maximum bow, cup, or twist. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Wood Doors: 08 1400 I December 11, 2015 Page 5 C. Maximum stile, rail and core telegraphing show-through at door face:0.01 inch in any 3 inch I span. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish; Field finish door indicated to receive opaque finish. 1. Comply with requirements of AWS Section 5, "Finishing." IB. Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish system specified in Section 09 9000. PART 3 EXECUTION 111 3.1 EXAMINATION , A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. I1. Verify that frames comply with specified requirements for type, size, location, and swing, and have been installed plumb and level. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. I 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: Installed under provisions of Section 08 7100. B. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. I1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke control doors according to NFPA 105 with frames that have been constructed and tested as an assembly in accordance with UL 1784 and approved for IS" label. C. Factory Fitted Doors:Align in frame for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Fitting and machining: 1. Tolerances: Ia. Bottom: 1/4 inch clearance maximum. b. Top: 1/8 inch clearance maximum. c. Lock edge and hinge edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches maximum. I2. Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recommendations of hardware Manufacturers. 1 i 3.3 COMPLIANCE A. Owner may employ a representative of reference organization to inspect and determine that Work of this Section has been performed in accordance with specified standards. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Wood Doors: 08 1400 Page 6 December 11,2015 3.4 ADJUSTING A. During warranty period, check,adjust and service moving parts to operate smoothly and quietly. 1. Adjust as necessary weatherstripping, gaskets,and door bottoms for correct clearance. 2. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and show no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Fiberglass Doors: 08 1613 111 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1 1. Fiberglass in-swinging doors with adjustable steel frames and sidelites. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry, for wall framing. I 2. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal 3. Section 07 6500: Flexible Flashing III 4. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants 5. Section 08 8000: Glazing,for glass in fiberglass doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door assembly specified, including details of construction relative to materials, components, profiles,finishes, and fire protection ratings. I1. Include manufacturer's specifications and or data needed to show compliance with specified requirements. I B. Shop Drawings showing elevations of door design,and details of interface to adjacent construction, specific for this Project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. I1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with State Building Code accessibility requirements for the disabled for thresholds. RB. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201,for Category II materials. I1.5 CERTIFICATION A. Provide certificates listing AAMA tests affirming doors meet, and comply with performance standards required. I1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver with each unit bearing AAMA label certifying compliance. 2. Deliver doors in Manufacturer's original protective covering clearly marked with IManufacturer's name, brand name, size,thickness, and identifying symbol. B. Storage: Protect from damage; storage area to be dry, not wet or damp. I1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Fiberglass Doors: 08 1613 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard commercial 10 year warranty for fiberglass doors. 1. Replace, rehang and refinish without additional cost to Owner failures due which include, but not limited to,the following: I a. Failures in operation of operating component or components. b. Water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard. c. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to unaided eye. I. d. Defects that contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or potential untimely failure of Work of this Section or Work as a whole. B. Warrant insulating glass for 10 years against leakage at seals. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Basis-of-Design Product:The design for fiberglass doors is based on the following: 1. Masonite; Fiberglass Patio Doors with Adjustable Steel Frame. I B. . Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers are the following: 1. Therma-Tru Doors with Fast-Frame Adjustable Steel Frame. 2. ProVia with Redi-Flex Adjustable Steel Frame. C. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements or Section 01 2500. I 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide door assemblies with overall U-value of 0.35 or less. 1 B. Provide door assemblies with overall solar heat gain coefficient of 0.40 or less. C. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system,to exterior. 2.3 MATERIALS I A. Construction: Pultruded-fiberglass, 0.050 inch to 0.070 inch nominal wall thickness. B. Sizes: Refer to Door Schedule. I C. Face Texture: Smooth. D. Finish: Factory prime for field paint finish specified in Section 09 9000. 1 E. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard. F. Threshold Ramp:Where height of threshold exceeds State Building Code accessibility I requirements for the disabled, provide access ramp at threshold to comply with Code. G. Screen Door: Manufacturer's standard for specified unit. I 1. Color: Match fiberglass door. 2. Screen Mesh: Fiberglass; 16 by 16 maximum size mesh opening. i LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Fiberglass Doors:08 1613 IIDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 IH. Hardware: Provide hardware from manufacturer. 1. Provide manufacturer's full range of options for Architect's selection. II. Glass: Minimum 1 inch insulated glass,GL-1 specified in Section 08 8000. 1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201,for Category II materials. I J. Flashing at Exterior Wall Openings: Flexible membrane flashing specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6500. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 1 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify flexible membrane flashing has been installed at all exterior door wall openings as specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6500. I 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with or trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. B. Protect work of others from damage. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install work of this Section in accordance with Drawings, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacture's and referenced standard's recommended II installation procedures. 1. Where required by State Building Code accessibility requirements for the disabled, I provide threshold ramp. B. Coordinate placement of fiberglass doors in wall openings with installation of flexible membrane flashing installed in wall openings prior to placement of doors. I 3.4 CLEANING,ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION IA. Check, adjust and service moving parts to operate smoothly and quietly. 1. Adjust as necessary weatherstripping, gaskets, and door bottoms for correct clearance. IB. Clean exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section,and repair as necessary. IEND OF SECTION I IlLRS Architects, Inc. , Tigard Apartments Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 111 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for blocking out openings in wood framing. 2. Section 09 9000 Painting, for field applied finish. 3. Division 22: Plumbing,for access panels for valves. 4. Division 23: Heating,Ventilating,Air Conditioning,for access panels for dampers. 5. Division 26: Electrical,for access panels for electrical equipment. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit data for eacha of tYP product indicated. I1. Include construction details,fire ratings, components, materials,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. I1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS • A. Record actual locations of all access units on record drawings. I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 1.5 COORDINATION IA. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS UNITS -WALLS AND CEILINGS iA. Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit in Drywall Walls or Ceilings: 1. J. L. Industries Inc.: Model FD or FDWB. 2. Karp Associates, Inc.: Non-insulated Type KRP-250FR. I 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company: L-FRAP. 4. Milcor Inc.: Universal Fire-Rated Access Door (UFR). 5. Nystrom, Inc.: Standard IW. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 Page 2 December 11,2015 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for I installation. B. Access Doors and Frames for Walls and Ceilings: 1. Fabricate frames of 16 gage steel. 2. Fabricate door panels of manufacturer's standard gage for fire rated panels. 3. Hardware: a. Hinge: 175 degree steel hinges with concealed constant force closure spring type. b. Furnish number of latching mechanisms required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. c. Lock: Manufacturer's standard universal turn ring and key lock. C. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 1 D. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to type of supports indicated 2.3 FINISHES A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with baked on primer. I B. Finish: Field paint exposed door and frame surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000 "Painting." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Review locations where access doors are required. B. Verify clearance for door swing and door access to required equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units according to manufacturer's instructions. I B. Set frames accurately in position and attach to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting Defective Work: Repair scratched door surfaces to match factory prime finish. B. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. C. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. D. Clean door and frame surface prior to field painting. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sectional Doors: 08 3613 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of sectional overhead doors: 1 1. Steel sectional overhead doors. 2. Operating hardware, electric operation. 3. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to door operator to control station. I B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications,for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants. 3. Division 26: Electrical,for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories. i1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses $ without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: For each type and size of door and accessory, and including the following: 1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. I 2. Motors:Show nameplate data and ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements. B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in Imanufacturer's product data. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available for factory applied finishes. ID. Samples for Verification:Two 6 by 6 inch metal samples for each type of exposed finish required, illustrating color and finish texture. I E. Maintenance Data: Including lubrication requirements and frequency,and periodic adjustments required,for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. IB. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 4 1. Overhead Door Corp. 2. Raynor. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sectional Doors:08 3613 December 11, 2015 Page 2 3. Wayne Dalton. B. Substitutions:Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Basis-of-Design:Wayne Dalton, Model 8000, steel prefinished garage doors with Colonial Panel Design. 2.3 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS 1 A. Fabricate door sections including face sheets and frames from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold- rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653, G60 coating designation. 1. Exterior Section Face: Manufacturer's standard gauge. 2. Exterior Section Face Surface: Embossed. B. Panel Thickness:2 inches. I C. Center and End Stiles: Minimum 20 gauge uncoated thickness. 2.4 TRACKS, SUPPORTS,AND ACCESSORIES 111 A. Tracks: Galvanized steel, sized for door size and weight, complying with ASTM A 653for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. 1. Track Configuration: Standard. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel, complying with ASTM A 36. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag,sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. C. Weatherseals: Replacable,adjustable, continuous,compressible weather stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of door. 1. Provide motor operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. 111 2. Provide continuous flexible seals at door jamb for a weathertight installation. D. Hardware: Heavy-duty,corrosion resistant,with hot-dip galvanized, stainless steel, or other corrosion resistant fasteners,to suit door type. 1. Power Operated Doors: Provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. E. Counterbalance Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard counterbalanced torsion springs. 2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS I A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation cycle requirements specified,with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls,starter,gear-reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. B. Comply with NFPA 70. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Sectional Doors: 08 3613 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 C. Disconnect Device: Hand operated device or mechanism for automatically engaging chain I and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. 1. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when Iemergency operator is engaged. D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. IE. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc. I F. Door-Operator Type: Trolley-type door operator units, as recommended by manufacturer to suit applications. G. Electric Motors: UL 325, Polyphase, medium-induction type. I 1. Motor Enclosure: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof. 2. Motor Rating:As recommended by manufacturer to suit applications; continuous duty. 3. Motor Voltage: 230/460 volt three phase, 60 Hz.;verify with Division 26. I 4. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2,full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 5. Motor Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1. 6. Brake:Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. IH. Operator Controls: 1. Remote-Control Station: Provide exterior key switch control unit with standard two or I three button (Open-Stop-Close) momentary contact,surface mounted. I. Safety Edge: Manufacturer's standard safety edge and weatherseal located at door bottom, full width, sensitized type,wired to stop and reverse door upon striking object. I J. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. IK. Radio Control:Three-channel, universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door; one per operator. I2.6 FINISHES A. Steel Doors: Manufacturer's standard two coat baked-on polyester paint. 1 B. Other exposed steel surfaces: One coat of rust inhibitive paint. 1. Finish Coat: Field paint as specified in Section 09 9000. I2.7 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials as required for a complete and proper installation. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 111 A. Verify existing conditions are ready to accept installation of work of this Section. 1. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. I LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Sectional Doors: 08 3613 December 11, 2015 Page 4 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install door,track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,jamb and head molding strips,anchors, inserts, hangers,and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified. B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing,spaced not less than 24 inches apart. C. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with hangers fastened to framing. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing,and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment. D. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Division 26 Work. 1 1. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. E. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter specified in 1 Section 07 9200. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust door to operate easily,free from warp,twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter. 1. Operate door through at least ten operating cycles. B. Clean door assembly of dirt, oils, and foreign materials. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION 111 A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional overhead doors. END OF SECTION I I 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Vinyl Windows: 08 5313 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes vinyl-framed windows. B. Related Sections: I 1. 2. Section 01 4500: Quality Control,for independent testing requirements. Section 07 6500: Flexible Flashing,for flexible membrane flashing at window openings. 3. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants,for perimeter sealant at windows. 1 4. Section 08 8000: Glazing,for glass in windows. 1.2 DEFINITIONS IA. The following are based on AAMA/W DMA for defining Performance Class: 1. LC: Light Commercial. I1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified in this Section. I1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for vinyl windows. IB. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations,sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor,flashing, and sealant installation. IC. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. D. Manufacturer's operating/maintenance instructions. E. Manufacturer's certification that windows provided are in compliance with performance standards specified. IF. Field test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. I 1. Installer must be acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1.5 CERTIFICATION IA. Provide certificates listing AAMA tests affirming that windows meet, and comply,with performance standards specified. I1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Design windows to withstand wind loads according to provisions of State Building Code. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Vinyl Windows: 08 5313 December 11,2015 Page 2 B. Comply with State Building Code for clear open area required for egress from sleeping areas. IIIC. Provide window units labeled as certified by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). 1. Manufacturer's label shall list the window U-value or U-value Class. 2. Calculations for U-factors and shading coefficients for windows shall be taken from Chapter 29, 1997 edition of ASHRAE"Handbook of Fundamentals", or rated or certified according to the NFRC 100 and NFRC 200, 1997 edition. 3. FRC Fenestration product ratings shall be for the entire fenestration product including glazing, sash,and frame. Product samples used for rating determinations shall be production line units or representative of units as purchased by the Contractor. 4. Maintain labels on window units until Building Inspector has verified labeling. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver with each unit bearing NFRC and AAMA labels certifying compliance. B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. I 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard commercial 10 year warranty for plastic windows. 1. Replace, rehang and refinish without additional cost to Owner failures due which include, but not limited to,the following: a. Failures in operation of operating component or components. b. Water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard. c. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to unaided eye. d. Defects that contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or potential untimely failure of Work of this Section or Work as a whole. B. Warrant insulating glass for 10 years against leakage at seals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1 1. CertainTeed Corp.: Insulate Slimline Series Windows. 2. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc.: Styleline Series. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements or Section 01 2500. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide windows of the performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMANVDMA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Performance Class: LC. 2. Performance Grade: 30. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Tigard Apartments Vinyl Windows: 08 5313 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 IB. Overall U-value of Window Assemblies: 1. Operable and Fixed Windows: Provide window assemblies with overall U-value of 0.35 or less. IC. Overall Shading Coefficient of Window Assemblies: 1. Operable and Fixed Windows: Provide window assemblies with overall Shading Coefficient of 0.40. D. Sound Transmission Class (STC)for Window Assemblies: I1. Operable and Fixed Windows: Provide window assemblies with overall STC rating of 35 where indicated in the Drawings. II E. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS IA. Vinyl Window Types: Fixed.Ii. 2. Vertical Sliding; Single hung. 3. Horizontal Sliding. 4. Casement. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Frame and Ventilators: 1 1. Material: Impact-resistant, UV-stabilized, Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 0.070. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard, with nailing flanges. I 3. Shape and size:As shown. 4. Color: Bronze. I B. Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal and meets performance requirements specified in PART 2. 1. Minimum 3/4 inch thick insulating glass units, GL-1 specified in Section 08 8000. I2. Provide fully tempered where indicated or required by State Building Code. C. Laminated Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard laminated factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal and meets performance requirements specified in PART 2. I 1. Minimum 7/32 inch thick laminated glass units. 2. Provide laminated glazed windows as indicated in the Drawings. I D. Weatherstripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. 1 E. Glazing stops: Matching screw-applied or snap-on. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Vinyl Windows:08 5313 December 11, 2015 Page 4 F. Insect screens: Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. I 1. Frame:Aluminum 2. Screening: 18 x 14 mesh. 3. At each operator, removable screen panel,with mesh replaceable by means of retainer spline. F. Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate,tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Horizontal Sliding and Hung Window Hardware: I a. Locks and Latches:Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. I 2. Snap locks for ventilators to meet AAMA forced entry resistance test. 3. Ventilators to remain in any position set. 4. Ventilators to be removable for cleaning. 5. Window Opening Control Devices(WOCD's)to comply with ASTM F 2090 Standard Specification for Window Fall Prevention Devices with Emergency Escape (Egress) Release Mechanism for operable windows above the first story. 6. Adaptable Resident Units: Comply with State Building Code reach range requirements for operable hardware. 7. Finish of hardware as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of fasteners to match hardware finish. 1 a. Finish of fasteners to match hardware finish. G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members,trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. H. Flashing at Wall Openings: Flexible membrane flashing specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6500. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Complete fabrication, assembly,finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory I to greatest extent possible. 1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Allow for scribing,trimming,and fitting at Project site. B. Glaze vinyl windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weather-tight installation. D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, compatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. 1. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. 2. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Tigard Apartments Vinyl Windows: 08 5313 December 11, 2015 Page 5 E. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion- Iresistant reinforcement. F. Reglazing: Permitted without disassembly of sash frame. 2.6 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Dimensions 6 ft. or less: 1/16 inch +. B. Dimensions over 6 ft.: 1/8 inch±. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Ii. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify flexible membrane flashing has been installed at all window wall openings as specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6500. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of / those trades with work of this Section. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square,true to line,without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weather-tight construction. C. Coordinate placement of windows in wall openings with installation of rubberized membrane flashing installed in wall openings prior to placement of windows. 1. Install windows with a continuous bead of sealant between back of window frame flange and flexible membrane flashing, except at sill flange. D. Make provision for expansion and contraction and for deflection of existing adjoining building components. E. Conform to State Building Code requirements for access and means of egress facilities and emergency escape at windows serving sleeping areas. F. Upon completion of installation, put each operating component through at least 10 complete operating cycles, adjusting as needed to secure optimum operating level. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Vinyl Windows: 08 5313 December 11,2015 Page 6 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Services:Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: I 1. Testing Methodology: Field water tests shall be performed to ASTM E 1105 Procedure B in 3 cycles of 5 minutes each. Each test shall include the window unit and interface with surrounding construction. a. Water Penetration: In addition to the definition of water penetration in the ASTM standard, any water other than condensation that is visible on the111 interior of the window unit that is not fully contained within drained gutters or flashings, shall constitute a failure of the field test. 2. Testing Extent:Test on typical bay of mulled unit at Apartments as selected by I Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Test windows after perimeter sealants have cured. 3. If any installation fails the performance tests, correct observed deficiencies in and re- test at Contractor's own expense. Incorporate corrective measures into all final window installations. 4. If any of the units fail the performance tests, at Architect's discretion, one additional window shall be tested at Contractor's expense. If these installations also fail performance tests, correct observed deficiencies and re-test at Contractor's expense. At Architect's discretion, for each additional unit that fails the testing, one additional unit shall be tested. All additional testing shall be conducted at Contractor's expense. 5. Test Reports: Prepare according to ASTM E 1105. 3.5 CLEANING,ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Labels: Leave required AAMA and NFRC labels in place, intact and legible, until reviewed and approved by Architect and building inspector. B. During warranty period, check, adjust and service moving parts for smooth and quiet operation. C. Prior to completion of work thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of windows and screens. 1. Use only cleaning materials and techniques recommended by manufacturer of I material being cleaned. 2. Do not scratch or otherwise damage glass, screen, or PVC finish. D. Clean exposed surfaces and repair imperfections in finish. E. Do not store materials close enough to glass to create a heat trap and cause breakage. END OF SECTION I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware: 08 7100 III December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes finish hardware for doors. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 4000:Architectural Woodwork,to be provided templates for door frame I hardware. 2. Section 08 1313: Hollow Metal Doors,to be provided templates for hardware. 3. Section 08 1400:Wood Doors,to be provided templates for hardware. I4. . Section 12 3530: Residential Casework,for cabinet hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product data including manufacturer's technical data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. I B. Finish Hardware Schedule coordinated with doors,frames,and related work to ensure proper size,thickness, hand,function, and finish of door hardware. C. Keying Schedule: Indicate clearly how Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been I fulfilled. D. Templates: For doors,frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the Iinstallation of door hardware. 1. Verify with shop drawings and other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. IE. Samples: Of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule. 1 1. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged may after final check of operation may be incorporated in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services of an AHC or DAHC member of Door Hardware Institute to: 1. Be available for consultation with Architect/Owner at no additional cost to Owner during progress of construction. I 2. Be available to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. B. Hardware consultant may be an employee of supplier. IC. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer. , D. Hardware supplier shall have and maintain a factory direct status with all manufacturers I specified or approved during the course of the project to insure quality product knowledge and quick lead-tie response. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware: 08 7100 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide door hardware for fire rated openings complying with NFPA Standard No. 80 and current requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide only hardware that is listed and identical to products tested by U.L. or other testing and inspection agencies acceptable to governing authorities. B. Provide hardware tested according to NFPA 252 and UL 1784 for fire door assemblies labeled for fire resistance and smoke control ("S" label). C. Provide electric equipment with U.L.approved listing for complete assembly. D. Comply with requirements of ANSI A117.1.,The Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA), and I State Building Code accessibility requirements for the disabled. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper fastenings and appurtenances, clearly marked on outside to indicate contents and specific locations in Work. B. Provide an experienced employee designated to receive,take charge of, and distribute hardware at building site. C. Provide locked secure area for storage of hardware on site. I D. Protect from damage. Store above ground and under cover. 1.6 KEYING INFORMATION I A. If required provide keying and bitting information to Owner at no cost. 1.7 WARRANTY I ' A. Warrant operation of locksets and panic hardware for 3 years;closers for 10 years. 1.8 CERTIFICATION I A. Prior to Substantial Completion Date, provide written certificate that hardware is complete and conforms to Specifications and approved submittals. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL I A. Fasteners: 1. Furnish necessary flat head screws, bolts,and other fasteners of suitable size and I type to anchor hardware in position for long life under hard use. 2. Where necessary,furnish fasteners with expansion shields, sex bolts, and other anchors as required. Provide material to which hardware is to be applied, and I recommended by hardware manufacturer. a. Provide Glass Bead Kit if necessary for proper installation of exit devices. b. Toggle bolts are not permitted. 3. Provide fasteners that harmonize with hardware as to finish and material. I LRS Architects, Inc. 111 I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware: 08 7100 I December 11,2015 Page 3 4. Conceal if possible when door is in closed position; exposed fasteners to have Phillips I head. a. Through-Bolting not permitted. IIB. Locks and Latches:Verify: 1. Operation 2. Hand of doors 1 3. Function for each opening. C. Closers:Verify for each door: I1. Hand of door 2. Degree of opening 3. Frequency of use , I4. Head condition. a. Provide closers that do not limit door swing. b. Furnish drop plates for narrow top rails. c. Furnish manufacturer's standard one-piece cast arm at parallel arm location. d. Furnish closers at fire-resistant rated doors, exterior doors and elsewhere as shown. e. Furnish all necessary adapters, shims or plates for proper installation and I operation. D. Hinges: I1. Furnish hinges of sufficient throw to clear trim where hinges are required to swing 180 degrees. 2. Furnish minimum 1-1/2 pair of hinges per leaf, unless specifically scheduled Iotherwise. E. Furnish silencers for door frames at rate of three for each single door and two for each door or pair of doors, except gasketed doors and doors with light seals or sound seals. IF. Furnish smoke gaskets for fire-resistive rated doors in corridors or other exit ways. G. Furnish door stops in number and type to protect finishes wherever doors or hardware Ithereon could strike adjacent surfaces. 2.2 KEYING IA. Factory or locally key the following: 1. Key into a new Schlage master key system. Schlage SmartKey shall be used at the I 2. unit entries and all tenant accessible doors which can be locked. Meet with Owner to determine specific keying requirements. Produce a written keying schedule for Owner approval within 10 days of meeting. IB. Furnish nickel silver keys for each lock as follows: 1. Provide final key quantities as directed by Owner. IC. Construction keying: 1. Furnish a construction key system with 10 keys for locks and cylinders: 7 for Contractor and 3 for Owner. 111 ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware:08 7100 December 11,2015 Page 4 2. Use only construction keys during construction. 3. Upon Substantial Completion of Work,void construction key system and, in presence I of Architect and Owner, demonstrate specified keying system is operating properly. D. Identification and delivery: a 1. Stamp permanent keys, "DO NOT DUPLICATE". 2. Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to Owner by registered mail or receipted personal delivery. 2.3 TOOLS AND MANUALS A. Deliver to Owner one complete set of adjustment tools and one set of maintenance manuals and installation instructions for locksets, closers, and panic devices. I 2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Single Source: Except as specifically otherwise approved in advance by Architect,furnish for I each items (such as"Door Hinge Type 1") product of a single manufacturer B. Locks and Latches: I 1. Latchbolt:Anti-friction type with curved strike lip. a. Provide extended lip where necessary to protect door frame trim from damage. b. Match hardware finish. 2. Fabricate with 3-3/4 inches backset from door edge where surface applied gasketing at door frame stops and 2-3/4 inches elsewhere. 3. Provide lever handle, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hinges: Mortise type,with non-removable pins at out-swinging doors with locks. I D. Door Closers: 1. Mount on room side, and not corridor or lobby side of doors bordering circulation I system unless otherwise shown. 2. Fasteners to be concealed. 3. Closers shall have extra duty duty arms where specified. I E. Stops: 1. Provide wall stops;do not install floor stops unless specifically approved by Architect. 11 2. If wall stops cannot be installed, provide overhead stop unless a floor stop has been specified. F. Kickplates: I 1. Provide metal kickplates specified in Door Hardware Groups. 2. Anchor kickplates with oval-head full-thread screws,spaced uniformly at a maximum of 5 inches on center at kickplate perimeter. G. Provide hardware in finishes indicated in Door Hardware Groups. 111 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware: 08 7100 I December 11, 2015 Page 5 H. Manufacturer and Acceptable Substitutes: I Acceptable Item: Manufacturer: Substitute: 1 1. Hinges: Ives (IVE) Bommer, McKinney 2. Locks/Latches: Schlage (SCH) Best, Dorma 3. Exit Devices: Falcon (FAL) Dorma, Precision I 4. Cylinders: Schlage (SCH) Best, Dorma 5. Card Locks: Schlage Elec. (SCE) Best 6. Surface Closers: Falcon (FAL) Dorma, Stanley I 7. Stops/Catches: Ives(IVE) Trimco, Hager 8. Weatherstripping/ Seals: National Guard (NGP) Pemko, Reese,Zero 9. Door Bottom: National Guard (NGP) Pemko, Reese, Zero9 I10. Thresholds: National Guard (NGP) Pemko, Reese,Zero PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. I3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work of this Section in accordance with: I 1. Hardware groups specified. 2. Approved Schedule. I 3. Applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 4. Templates. 5. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. I B. Hardware Locations: Mount hardware at locations recommended by manufacturer, requirements of ANSI A117.1,ADA, and State Building Code, as applicable. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. 1 1. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. ID Cut and fit threshold or floor plates to door frame profile with mitered corner joints;weld multiple pieces together. Set in full bead of sealant. I 1. 2. At carpet, install closer floor plates flush with structural substrate under carpet. Secure to substrate with positive anchoring devices. E. After fitting mortised hardware to surfaces to be painted, remove and store hardware in original Ipackage in a secure place, and permanently reinstall after painting has been completed. 1. Properly wrap installed hardware subjected to hand usage during construction for protection; Replace hardware units at no expense to Owner where finish has been I damaged by construction activities. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware: 08 7100 December 11, 2015 Page 6 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of Work, and as a condition of acceptance, provide inspection, and adjustment I of operating hardware,to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. 1. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 2. Clean operating units as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. B. After ventilation system has been balanced, manufacturer's representative to adjust closers as necessary to meet ADA and State Building Code requirements for time required for closing operation and opening force. C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation and repair damaged surfaces. D. Six Month and One Year Adjustment:Approximately six months, and prior to one year, after date of Substantial Completion,the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: 1. Examine and adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore proper operation and function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 3. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the performance of the hardware. 3.4 DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS I HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA SPRING HINGE 3SP1 4.5 X 4.5 646 IVE I 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 646 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK CS210TD JAZ PLY 10-121 619 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH i 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8"X 2" LDW B4E 619 IVE 1 SET SEAL 5050B BRN NGP III 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 112V AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PROVIDED BY FLOORING SUPPLIER 1 EA DOOR VIEWER U698 626 IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO.02 1 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 646 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET F10 JAZ 619 SCH 1 EA DOOR STOP 061 652 IVE 1 3 EA SILENCER SR66 BRN IVE FURNISH F40 PRIVACY LATCH AT ALL BATHROOMS AND AT BEDROOMS WHERE THIS IS MORE THAN (1) BEDROOM PER UNIT. LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware: 08 7100 1 December 11, 2015 Page 7 IHARDWARE GROUP NO.03 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: IQTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 619 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD JUP 619 SCH 1 EA DOOR STOP 061 652 IVE 1 SET THRESHOLD/WS PROVIDED BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER IHARDWARE GROUP NO. 04 I PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET BIFOLD TRACK BFC50 STA I 2 EA PULL 562-4 619 TRI HARDWARE GROUP NO.05 I PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR I6 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 646 IVE 1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB457 619 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK F40 JAZ 619 SCH I4 EA SILENCER SR66 BRN IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06 I PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 619 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK CS210TD JAZ PLY 10-121 619 SCH 1 EA DOOR STOP 061 652 IVE 1 SET THRESHOLD/WS PROVIDED BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER IHARDWARE GROUP NO. 07 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: IQTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET BIFOLD TRACK BFC50 STA 1 EA PULL 562-4 619 TRI I I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Door Hardware: 08 7100 December 11, 2015 Page 8 HARDWARE GROUP NO.08 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 619 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD JUP 619 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 619 IVE 1 SET THRESHOLD/WS PROVIDED BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09 I ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10 1 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 646 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK AL50PD JUP 619 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 619 IVE i 3 EA SILENCER SR66 BRN IVE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11 1 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 646 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK AL50PD JUP 619 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8"X 2" LDW B4E 619 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 619 IVE 1 SET SEAL 5050B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 158A AL PEM HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12 PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: a QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 3.5 X 3.5 646 IVE 1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB457 619 IVE , 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70PD JUP 619 SCH 2 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 619 IVE 4 EA SILENCER SR66 BRN IVE I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments I December 11,2015 Door Hardware: 08 7100 Page 9 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13 I PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 111 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 1 EA KEYED REMOVABLE KR4023 619 IVE MULLION USP FAL I 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-R-EO 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-R-NL-OP 628 FAL 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 628 FAL 2 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH I 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 12"0 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 619 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 689 FAL Ii SET SEAL 5050B 619 IVE 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 95WH BRN NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 158A AL NGP AL PEM IHARDWARE GROUP NO. 14 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: i QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5881 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4"X 16" 646 IVE 619 IVE Ii EA PULL 1147 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 619 TRI 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8"X 2" LDW B4E 689 FAL Ii EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 619 IVE 619 IVE 1 SET SEAL 5050B BRN NGP IHARDWARE GROUP NO. 15 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER I FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-L-QUA 646 IVE 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 FAL 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8"X 2" LDW B4E 689 FAL Ii EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 619 IVE 1 SET SEAL 5050B 619 IVE BRN NGP I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Door Hardware: 08 7100 Tigard Apartments Page 10 December 11, 2015 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 16 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: FINISH MFR QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 619 NE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-EO 619 628 FALSE 1 EA ELEC EXIT DEVICE TRIM CO-200-993R-70-KP-ATH-RD 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 689 FAL 111 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8"X 2" LDW B4E 619 IVE IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX BRN INGP 111 VE 1 SET SEAL 5050B AL NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 95WH AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 158A HARDWARE GROUP NO. 17 PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S)WITH THE FOLLOWING: FINISH MFR QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 646 IVE 8 EA P 8200 4"X 16" 619 IVE I 2 EA PUUSHSH PLATE 2 EA PULL 1147. 619 TRI 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 689 TFAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8"X 2" LDW B4E 619 IVE IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 619BRN IVE 4 EA SILENCER SR66 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 18 1 PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: FINISH MFR QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 646 IVE 8 EA HINGE 1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK M452P 628 SCE8 SCE 1 EA TJ BRACKET TJ452 66230 IVE 2 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4"X 16" TRI 2 EA PULL 1147 68 619 9 R 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 68 9 IVE L 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 6AL1PEM 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 412CRL EM 1 EA THRESHOLD 158A AL PLT ' 1 EA TIMER PT2724 LGR SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-BBK FA900 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER POWER SUPPLY REQUIRES 110VAC AND NORMALLY CLOSED FIRE ALARM CONNECTION. 11 MAGNETIC R O SIDE.KS TO RELESE ON FIRE ALAM. MOUNT MAGNETICLOCKS ARE ONLYAVAILABLE NAGNETIC LOCKS TOP AMB AT INTERIOR AN ALUMINUM FINISH. I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Door Hardware:08 7100 December 11, 2015 Page 11 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 19 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 646 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE AL50PD JUP 619 SCH LOCK 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8"X 2" LDW B4E 619 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 619 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR66 BRN IVE END OF SECTION i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 i i LRS Architects, Inc. t Tigard Apartments Glazing: 08 8000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following applications: 1. Windows 2. Doors B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors 2. Section 08 5313:Vinyl Windows 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture,fabrication,and installation;failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimum and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses indicated in Glass Product Schedule by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass in lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: I1. Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300 according to design wind loads applicable to Project according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." a. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. ' 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. b. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm, except where window system is shop glazed and tested by manufacturer of window to perform as specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples:With each product data submitted, other than monolithic clear fjoat glass, include: 1 1. Glass: 12 by 12 inch samples of each type. 2. Sealants and Gaskets: 12 inches long of each type installed between samples of material to be glazed,fully cured. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated in Drawings, listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Glazing: 08 8000 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts, I familiar with specified requirements and methods of installation for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Source Limitations: Provide glass materials from one primary glass manufacturer for each Il type of glass specified. 1. Insulating Glass: Obtain components for each type of unit from same source as used I in other applications for same components. 2. Provide glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. C. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in the following publications, unless more stringent requirements are indicated: 1. GANA Publications: GANA's"Glazing Manua.l" 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000. "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulated Glass Units." I D. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. E. Insulating Glass Certification: Permanently mark on each unit with appropriate certification I label of Insulating Glass Certification Council. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with safety glazing requirements of State Building Code, Section 2406. 1 B. Comply with wind loading requirements of State Building Code. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions, and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Provide written warranty against failure of glazing products due to defective materials or installation, including water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard,for a period of 2 years after date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranties: Provide the following on manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by manufacturer: 1. Insulating Glass: 10 year labor and materials to warrant units against failure of hermetic seal. 2. Coated Glass: 10 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration including peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I I ' Tigard Apartments Glazing: 08 8000 December 11,2015 Page 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 GLASS MATERIALS A. Products: Provide products that comply with requirements indicated in the Glass Product 1 Schedule at end of PART 3. 1. Overall Glass Thickness: For single pane and insulated glass products that are I factory glazed, overall glass thickness may be less than indicated in the Glass Product Schedule if documentation is submitted that indicate the performance minimum of the lesser overall glass thickness is equal or better than that specified. I B. Annealed Float Glass:ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality Q3 (glazing select), of class indicated in the Glass Product Schedule. C. Heat-Treated Float Glass:ASTM C 1048,Type I, (transparent flat glass) Quality Q3 (glazing Iselect), class, kind, and condition indicated in the Glass Product Schedule. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. I 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened)float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of individual lites and to comply with glass design requirements. I 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered)float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS float glass where safety glass is indicated or required by State Building Code. a. Safety Glass:Where fully tempered glass is used as safety glass, provide I products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201,for Category I or II materials as applicable. D. Sputter Coated (Low E) Float Glass:ASTM C 1376,float glass with metallic oxide or metallic 1 nitride deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment(if any). E. Insulating Glass:ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units or ASTM E 2190, complying with requirements in Glass Product Schedule, and following: I1. Sealing System: Dual Seal. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened)float glass in place of annealed glass where I needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites and to comply with glass design requirements. 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered)float glass in place of annealed of Kind HS glass where safety glass is indicated or required by State Building Code. 2.2 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other I materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. I B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920,Type S (single component), Class 100/50, Grade NS (non-sag); Use NT (nontraffic), M, G,A, and,as applicable to glazing substrates, 0. I I ILRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Glazing: 08 8000 December 11, 2015 Page 4 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types, or approved as recommended by window assembly manufacturer: I a. Dow Corning: 790. b. GE Advanced Materials: SiiPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora: 890. d. Sika Corporation: SikaSil-C990. e. Tremco: Spectrem 1. 2.3 GLAZING TAPE , A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800. 1 B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed cell, PVC foam tape,factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces,complying with AAMA 800,for applications where tape acts as a primary seal or is used in combination with a full bead of sealant. 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material and type recommended by window assembly manufacturer for application, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide other materials complying with referenced glazing standard and requirements of glass manufacturers as required for applications indicated. I B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers:Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore,Type A durometer hardness of 85 plus or 111 minus 5. D. Spacers and Edge Blocks: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of Shore,Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place and to limit glass lateral movement. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings as indicated for Project. 1. Provide edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying 1 with referenced standards and requirements of product manufacturers. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing for compliance with the following: I 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system for exterior glazing. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Glazing: 08 8000 I December 11, 2015 Page 5 I3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 1 3.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of I those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL IA. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. I1. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. 2. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing. IB. Install setting blocks sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise recommended by glass manufacturer. 1. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. C. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches, and as I follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. I 2. Install correct size and spacing of spacers to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances. 3. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant I width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. D. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1 1. Do not install items that are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched, abraded, or damaged in any other manner. 2. Set glass so distortion waves, if present, run in horizontal direction. I 3. Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance l E. Glaze steelwork with closed cell tape bedding and silicone sealant. F. Do not use 2 different glazing materials in same joint system. I G. Miter-cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required. I H. Compress glazing tape or gaskets at least 25 percent of material thickness,with minimum finished thickness of 3/32 inch. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Glazing: 08 8000 IlDecember 11,2015 Page 6 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect glass from damage after installation by attaching crossed streamers or ribbons to framing held free from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. B. Remove excessive glazing compound from glazing and adjacent surfaces without damaging glass or adjacent surfaces. C. Replace broken, cracked, scratched, or otherwise damaged glass. ' D. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. 1. Protect glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces I from build up of dirt, scum,alkaline deposits, or stains. E. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean glass surfaces on both sides no more than four days before date of Substantial Completion. 3.6 GLASS PRODUCT SCHEDULE I A. Glass Type GL-1: Insulating glass units complying with following requirements: 1. Overall Unit Thickness:25 mm (1 inch). 2. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 3. Interspace Content:Air. 4. Uncoated Clear Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. 5. Coated Clear Outdoor Lite: Condition C (other coated glass), Class 1 (clear)float I glass. 6. Low-Emissivity Coating: Sputter coat on second surface. 7. Performance Minimums: Based on Cardinal 272 LE#2 clear. a. Daylight Transmittance: 72 percent III b. Winter U-Value: 0.30 c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient 0.41 I B. Glass type GL-2: Uncoated,single pane glass units complying with following requirements: 1. Thickness of Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 2. Class 1 (clear)float glass. I C. Laminated Glass: Refer to Section 08 5313,Vinyl Windows for STC rated glazing. I END OF SECTION I I I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I ' Tigard Apartments Mirrors: 08 8300 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 111 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes frameless,silvered annealed monolithic clear flat glass mirrors. f1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, sizes, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. C. Warranties: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE " A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this project who are certified under the national glass associations certified glass installer program. B. Source Limitations for Mirrors and Accessories: Obtain mirrors and accessories from one source for each type of mirror and accessory indicated. C. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in the following publications: ' 1. GANA Publications: GANA's"Glazing Manual", unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care:Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from condensation,temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping,storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including ' condensation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Mirrors: 08 8300 December 11, 2015 Page 2 Il 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"Article, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SILIVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS A. Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Select Quality. I 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges B. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation. 2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Mirror Hardware: Provide concealed metal hardware as required to accommodate size and thickness of mirror,and for attachment to substrate. I 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following, or approved: a. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc. B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions,cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge. 1. Seal edges of mirrors in factory after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments ' December 11, 2015 Mirrors: 08 8300 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present,for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. ' C. For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mirror hardware. 1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resultingfrom operations. construction B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture ' from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time D. Replace broken, cracked, scratched, or otherwise damaged mirror glass. ' END OF SECTION I 1 I i LRS Architects, Inc. I ITigard Apartments Louvers and Vents:08 9000 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes louvers and vents. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal 2. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants 3. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning,for louvers that are a part of HVAC equipment, and HVAC ducts connected to louvers. I1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide metal louvers that meet or withstand the following minimum performance ratings or Irequirements: 1. Structural Performance: Gravity and wind loads based on minimum uniform pressure of 25 lbf/sq.ft. I 2. Seismic Performance: ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Load of Buildings and Other Structures. 3. Thermal Movements: Temperature change of 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees material surfaces. IF, 4. Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Wind Driven Rain Ratings:As demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500-L. I1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data,for each type of product specified. Include printed catalog pages showing AMCA Certified Ratings Seals, or evidence that product has been tested according to IAMCA 500-L. B. Shop Drawings,to show plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and interface with adjacent construction. I1. Verify louver and vent openings by field dimensions prior to fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: I1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum. C. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision of work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. I 1. Coordinate location, size, and other necessary requirements for proper connection of mechanical ductwork to louvers and vents. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 I December 11, 2015 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1NUFARE A. Subject toCTUcompliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Fixed Louvers and Wall Vents: a. The Airolite Company. I b. Cesco Products. c. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. Greenheck e. Industrial Louvers, Inc. I f. Nystrom Building Products. g. Ruskin Company;Tomkins PLC. 2. Soffit and Eave Vents: I a. Cor-A-Vent, Inc. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. I 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions:ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5,T-52 or T-6. I B. Aluminum Sheet:ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. C. Fasteners: 300 stainless steel or same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal. I D. Bituminous Paint:ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion. I E. High-density, corrugated polypropylene (PP). 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate frame to fit in openings of sizes indicated,with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. I C. Join metal frame members to each other and to metal louver blades with fillet welds, concealed from view. I 2.4 FIXED ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Type: Drainable head and blade louvers. I B. Basis-of-Design Product: Greenheck ESD-403. C. Components: I 1. Frame:0.081 inch wall thickness. 2. Blades: 0.081 inch thickness. I 3. Frame Depth:4 inches. 4. Size:As shown. 5. Bird Screen: 1/2 inch square mesh with 0.063 inch wire, or 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick flattened, expanded aluminum. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I ITigard Apartments Louvers and Vents:08 9000 December 11, 2015 Page 3 6. Louver Factory Finish: Kynar 500. Ia. Color:As selected from manufacturer's standard. 2.5 SOFFIT AND EAVE VENTS IA. Type: High-density, corrugated polypropylene. I B. Basis-of-Design Product: Cor-A-Vent, S-400 Strip Vent. C. Components: I1. S-400 Strip Vent. a. Profile: 1 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 4 feet. b. Color:As selected from manufacturer's standard. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. IB. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION IA. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb,and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. I B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make weather-tight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as I indicated. 1. Set flanges and flashings in sealant specified in Section 07 9200. D. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. IE. Where HVAC duct meets inside face of louver, provide sheet metal closure between perimeter of louver and perimeter of duct; paint exterior face of closure panel flat black. F. Install soffit and eave vents in accordance with manufacturer's standard installation instructions,and according to type and use as indicated in Drawings. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT IA. Clean exposed surfaces with water. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 I December 11, 2015 Page 4 B. Repair damaged finishes so that no evidence remains of corrective work. 1. Replace items that cannot be refinished in the field, or return to factory for refinishing I of entire unit. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board: 09 2900 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes gypsum board and accessories including the following: I1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood framing that supports gypsum board. I 2. Section 07 8443: Fire-Resistant Joint Firestopping,for fire-resistant sealant. 3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 4. Section 09 9000: Painting,for gypsum board paint, prime and finish. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION A. Acoustic blanket insulation installed in partitions is specified in Section 09 8110, "Acoustic Insulation and Sealant." IB. Acoustical sealant is specified in Section 09 8110, "Acoustic Insulation and Sealant." DEFINITIONS I1.3 A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies. I 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data,for each type of product indicated. I1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with Irequirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. 1. Installer: Company with not less than 3 years experience installing gypsum board I systems in project of similar size, quality and complexity under present name. B. Comply with the following standards: I1. ASTM C 840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 2. Gypsum Association Document GA-216,Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau recommendations for gypsum wallboard finishes. I C. For fire-resistant rated partitions, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 1. Line blockouts in walls for recessed toilet accessories,fire extinguisher cabinets, and Ithe like,with gypsum board as necessary to preserve fire-resistive rating of partition. D. For STC-rated partitions and ceilings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM I E 413 by an independent testing agency. . I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board:09 2900 I December 11,2015 Page 2 E. Mockup: I 1. At an area on site approved by Architect, provide a mockup gypsum wallboard panel. a. Provide one mock-up panel for each gypsum wallboard finish used in work. b. Minimum panel width 8 feet wide by full height of partition. I c. Obtain Architect's approval prior to starting work. d. Approved mockups may be incorporated into finished Work. 2. Maintain mockup panels during construction in a undisturbed condition as a standard I for judging completed work. 3. Demolish rejected mockup panels and remove from job site. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING I A. Store materials inside under cover, dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. I 1. Store gypsum panels flat in a manner to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Environmental Limitations:Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions,whichever are more stringent. I B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet,those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold I damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging,or irregular shape. I 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. D. Maintain sufficient ventilation for proper joint treatment drying. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Gypsum Products: I a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. G-P Gypsum. I c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. 2. Metal and Plastic trim: 1 a. AMICO. b. Beadex. I c. Plastic Components, Inc. d. Vinyl Corp. e. Trim-Tex Drywall Products. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board: 09 2900 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 3. Special Moldings and Reveals: Ia. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon, Inc. IB. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD I A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. IB. Gypsum Board: 5/8 inches thick with long edges tapered; Fire retardant Type X. 1. Gypsum board complying with ASTM C 442 may be used for gypsum backing board for multilayer applications, 5/8 inches thick, Type X. I2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board:ASTM C 1177, Type X, 5/8 inch thickness, unless Iotherwise indicated. 1. "DensGlass Gold Fireguard Exterior Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 2. "GlasRoc Sheathing Type X" by CertainTeed Corporation. I B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board:ASTM C 931, Type X, 5/8 inch thickness, unless otherwise indicated. I2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: Comply with ASTM C 1047. • l1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet or plastic. 2. Shapes: I a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead:J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead:J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. I e. Expansion (control)joint. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Exterior Trim: Comply with ASTM C 1047. I 1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet or plastic. 2. Shapes: Ia. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead:J-shaped: exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and Iremovable strip covering slot opening. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board: 09 2900 December 11, 2015 Page 4 C. Special Moldings and Reveals: 1. Extruded 6063 T5 aluminum alloy in clear anodized finish. 2. Type:As shown on Drawings. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS I A. Steel Drill Screws:ASTM C 1002 and GA-216: B. Acoustic Insulation (Sound Attenuation Blankets): Specified in Section 09 8110. I C. Acoustical Sealant:Specified in Section 09 8110. D. Laminating Adhesive:Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. E. Spot Grout:ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal door frames. F. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: One of the following systems. I 1. RC Deluxe Resilient Channel (RCSD) by Clark Dietrich Building Systems: Minimum 0.022 inch (22 mil),G40 corrosion resistant steel per ASTM A 1003, 1/2 by 2-5/8 inch. 2. RSIC-1 Resilient Sound Isolation Clip by PAC International (866-774-2100). a. Provide with furring channels, minimum 0.0188 inch (25 gage) uncoated thickness, corrosion resistant steel per ASTM A 653, 7/8 inch depth. 2.6 JOINTING SYSTEM I A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: I 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 by 10 glass mesh. 3. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound: I 1. Interior Applications: a. Prefilling:At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. III b. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound or drying-type, taping compound. 1) Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. c. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, topping compound. d. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, • topping compound. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I IITigard Apartments Gypsum Board:09 2900 December 11, 2015 Page 5 2. Exterior Applications: Ia. Exterior Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. b. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board:As recommended by manufacturer. I D. Soffit Board Surfacing: 1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board for Exterior Soffits: Surfacing as recommended I by manufacturer. 2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES IA. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,the following, or approved,for water- based,job-mixed, drying-type texture finish for spray application: 1. Product: SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture, ready-mixed, by USG Corporation. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates and verify conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. I B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION II A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assurero er those trades for interface with work of this Section.P p and adequate provision in work of 1 3.3 SOUND CONTROL PARTITIONS AND CEILINGS A. Install acoustic batt insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions and ceilings designated for I sound control. B. Install acoustic insulation specified in Section 09 8100. IC. Acoustical Sealant: 1. Install acoustical sealant specified in Section 09 8100. 2. Seal construction at perimeters and at openings and penetration with a continuous I bead of acoustical sealant. a. Comply with ASTM C 919 for application of acoustical sealant. I b. Where partitions meet ceilings and floors,Apply a continuous bead of sealant between a maximum gap of 1/2 inch between floor and bottom edge of gypsum board, or between ceiling and top edge of gypsum board. I 1) Provide sealant full depth of gypsum board facings; do not skim coat over sealant. c. Apply acoustical sealant around penetrations, such as electrical boxes, pipes, I and other items penetrating partitions. 3. Apply fire-resistant acoustical sealant at fire-rated acoustical walls. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board: 09 2900 Page 6 December 11, 2015 3.4 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. General: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1 1. Butt panel together for a light contact at edges and ends,with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 2. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Il 3. At internal and external corners, conceal cut edges of boards by overlapping covered edges of abutting boards. 4. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. 5. Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between fastener and board edge. a. Drive specified screws with clutch-controlled power screwdrivers. b. Dimple board surface 1/32 inch with fastener; do not fracture face paper. I 6. Screw Fastener Schedule: a. Panel Perimeter Spacing: 8 inches o.c., unless otherwise noted. I b. Panel Intermediate Support Spacing: 1) Walls: 12 inches o.c.,typical. 2) Walls with Panels as Tile Substrate: 8 inches o.c. 3) Ceilings: 8 inches o.c. 7. Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing partitions at structural abutments, except at floors. a. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joints at these locations. b. Trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum board are exposed. c. Seal joints with acoustical sealant, comply with ASTM C 919. B. Walls: I 1. Install gypsum board with tapered edges vertical, and to within 1/4 inch of floor, unless horizontal application is required by GA or UL listing for wall types. 2. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition. 3. Multi-layer Applications: a. Offset face layer joints at least one stud or furring member from base layer joints. b. Fasten base layer with screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.Temporarily brace or fasten panels until adhesive has set. C. Sound-Control Partitions and Ceilings: I 1. Install resilient furring channels, or resilient sound isolation clips with steel furring channels,for partitions and ceilings,where shown or indicated. a. Apply acoustical sealant at perimeter of furred gypsum board to ceiling,walls and floor; do not apply solid blocking perimeter of furred panel. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board: 09 2900 1 December 11,2015 Page 7 D. Ceilings: I1. Install gypsum board to ceilings with long dimension of board at right angles to supporting members. 2. Board may be installed with long dimension parallel to supporting members that are I 3. spaced 16 inches o.c.when attachment members are provided at end joints. Multi-layer Applications: a. Offset face layer joints at least one stud or furring member from base layer I joints. b. Fasten both base layer and face layer with screws, and with adhesive between layers. I4. Where non-fire-rated recessed lights are installed in fire-rated assemblies, provide taped gypsum panel box around fixture the same fire-rating as the associated assembly. IE. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: 1. Install panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over I 2. supports. Install with 1/4 inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 3. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. I 4. Trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum board are exposed. - 5. Seal joints with sealant. I3.5 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Ceiling Deflection: Provide framing and thickness of gypsum board,fastened as required,to achieve maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. IB. Maximum Deviation from True Plane: 1/8 inch per 10 foot, and 1/16 inch in any running foot. 1. Check trim for conformance to tolerances. 1 3.6 CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by 1 Architect for visual effect. 1. Locate control joints at 30 feet maximum in ceilings, and 50 feet maximum in walls. 1 3.7 CORNER TREATMENT A. Internal Corners:Treat as specified for joints, but fold reinforcing tape lengthwise through Imiddle and fit neatly into corner. B. External Corners and Exposed Edges: I 1. Install square corner specified corner bead,fitting neatly over corner and securing with same type fasteners used for installing wallboard. a. Install trim to provide square corners at window openings. 1 2. Space fasteners approximately 6 inches o.c. and drive through wallboard into framing or furring member. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board: 09 2900 December 11,2015 Page 8 3.8 OTHER TRIM A. Drawings do not show locations and requirements for all trim. 1. Carefully study Drawings and installation, and provide trim normally recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. 2. Install cornerbead and bullnose to wall base adapter at all exposed vertical outside wall corners, unless otherwise noted. B. Install 3/4 inch wide rolled formed profiles at exterior soffits. I 3.9 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects,and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly removed residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or bevel edges, and damaged surface areas. I C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories not requiring tape. I D. Levels of Finish: Comply with GA-214, and recommendations of Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau for gypsum board finishes, as follows: 1. Level 1, One Coat Application:Above ceiling and concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 4, Three Coat Application: Gypsum board surfaces with paint finish. E. Application of Levels of Finish: 1. Level 1 Finish: One coat application. I a. Embed tape in joint compound with surfaces free of excess joint compound. b. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. III c. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound in fire resistive assemblies. 2. Level 4 Finish:Three coat application. I a. Embed tape in joint compound leaving a smooth thin coat of joint compound over tape. b. Apply a separate coat of joint compound over the first coat, leaving a smooth surface free of ridges,tool marks and sanding grooves. c. Apply a final coat of joint compound feathered out over the second coat, leaving a smooth surface flush with gypsum board and free of all marks. Feather finishing compound to not less than 12 inches wide. d. Cover fastener heads with a coat of joint compound followed with separate second and final coats as described above for taped joints. e. When finishing compounds are dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth II surface,taking care to not scuff paper surface of wallboard. f. Wipe gypsum board surfaces with damp cloth. F. Exterior Soffit Board:Tape joints and apply specified surfacing compound over entire exposed surface in accordance with gypsum soffit board manufacturer's instructions, to receive paint finish specified in Section 09 9000, Painting. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Gypsum Board: 09 2900 December 11, 2015 Page 9 3.10 GYPSUM BOARD SURFACE TEXTURE A. Spray-apply texture compound to produce a fine-spray texture finish in accordance with approved mock-up at interior locations to receive paint finish. B. Apply texture compound only after gypsum board joints are taped and dry, and after painter- applied surface primer specified in Section 09 9000, Painting, is applied and dry. C. Gypsum Board Surface Texture Schedule: �{ 1. Walls: Orange Peel. 2. Ceilings: Smooth. 3.11 REPAIRS A. Repair screw pops by installing new screw approximately 1-1/2 inches away from projecting screw and reset projecting screw if face paper is fractured, remove projecting screw,fill damaged surface and finish flush and smooth. B. Fill cracks;finish flush and smooth. 3.12 CLEANING UP A. Clean exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section, and repair imperfections in finish. B. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum board scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces. C. Remove scrap,debris, and surplus material of this Section at completion of each segment of installation and dispose of in legal manner. 111 END OF SECTION C ON I I I 1 I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I ITigard Apartments Tiling: 09 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Ceramic tile for floor and wall applications. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete,for floor substrate. 2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants I 3. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board,for glass-mat,water-resistant backer board. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified, including installation and maintenance instructions. B. Samples for Verification: 1 1. Two full size samples of each type, color and finish of tile required. 2. Two samples of grout for color selection by Owner. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each of the following products specified through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: I 1. Joint sealants. 2. Metal edge strips. IB. Mock-Up: 1. Install 10 square feet of floor tile with joints grouted. I 2. Install 10 square feet of wall tile with joints grouted. 3. Architect will review for correct joint size, profile, and color. 4. Approved mock-up may become part of the finished Work. I1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store package materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels I intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. IProtect from freezing. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Tiling:09 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, I composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified: 1. Tile as indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend. 2. Mortar and Grout Materials: 111 a. Ardex Engineered Cements. b. Bostik Chemical Group c. C-Cure Chemical Company d. Custom Building Products e. Laticrete International, Inc. a f. Mapei Corporation g. Summitville. Ill 3. Cleaning Materials: a. American Olean Tile Co. Division b. AquaMix, Inc. c. Hillyard Chemical Co. d. National Gypsum Co. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 PRODUCTS-GENERAL I A. Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions,and other characteristics indicated. I 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. B. Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards indicated in this Specification. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2.4 MORTAR SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS I A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set):ANSI A 118.4, consisting of prepackaged dry- mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. I 1. Wall Applications: Provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph C-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A 118.4. 2. Glass Tile Applications: Provide white colored mortar where glass is not opaque. B. Latex-Portland Cement Grout:ANSI A188.6/A118.7 with liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix, color as selected. LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Tiling: 09 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 3 C. Liquid-Latex Admixtures: 1 1. Mortar Latex Admixture: a. Bostic: Hydroment Flex-A-Lastic Latex Additive. II b. Laticrete: Laticrete 3701 Mortar Admix. c. Mapei: Planicrete 50. d. Summitville: S-800 Setting Acrylic Latex Additive 1 2. Grout Latex Admixture: a. Bostic: Hydroment 425 Multi-Purpose Acrylic Latex Additive. I b. Laticrete: Laticrete 3701 or Laticrete 1776 Grout Admix Plus. c. Summitville: S-775 Grouting Acrylic Latex Additive. 2.5 TILE BACKER UNITS IA. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Backer Board:As specified in Section 09 2900. 2.6 TILE ACCESSORIES IA. Sealant: Interior nonacid silicone rubber sealant,types as specified in Section 07 9200. B. Leveling and Patching Compounds: I1. Concrete Slab-On-Grade Floors: a. Ardex SD-P Instant Patch or Ardex SD-F Feather Finish, as applicable,or approved. b. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Ardex K-15 or K-55 Self-Drying/Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. IC. Rubber Accessory Moldings: 1. Color and Pattern:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. ID. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's penetrating product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. I 1. 2. Bostik;CeramaSeal Magic Seal. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer. 3. Mapei Corporation; Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. I 4. Summitville Tiles, Inc; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT 1 A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'written instructions. 1. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions I I I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Tiling: 09 3000 December 11,2015 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify substrates, areas,and conditions where tile will be installed comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify substrates are firm, dry, clean,free of oil,waxy films,and curing compounds. 2. Verify flatness of floor slab does exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/16 inch in one foot, noncumulative, in all directions for thin set tile. II B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactoryconditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' I A. Clean and level concrete substrates as recommended in referenced ANSI A 108 Series of tile installation standards. i B. Floor Flatness: Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates, including open joints,and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces. I 1. Build-up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from adjacent floor surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring surfaces. 2. Level subfloor to achieve flatness of 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/16 inch in one foot, ll noncumulative, in all directions for thin set tile. 3. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps and ridges. 3.3 INSTALLATION-GENERAL I A. General: 1. Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic I Tile"that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. 2. Comply with latest edition of TCNA's(Tile Council of North America, Inc.) "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"guidelines for TCNA installation methods indicated. 3. Comply with mortar and grout manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Joints: 1. Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated in Drawings,with aligned joints. 111 2. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or wall area. 3. Provide uniform joints,adjusted to minimize tile cutting. 4. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base,walls, and trim are the same size. 5. Install sealant at joints between tile and plumbing fixtures; comply with requirements of Section 07 9200, "Joint Sealants." 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION I A. Floor Tile—Interior Installation on Concrete Slab-On-Grade (Thin-Set): 1. Comply with TCNA F113;ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A108.10. 1 2. Install tile with latex portland cement mortar bond coat. 3. Install tile with latex-portland cement grout. B. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Install at locations indicated, or where exposed edge of tile 111 meets carpet,wood, or other flooring except tile. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Tiling: 09 3000 December 11, 2015 Page 5 C. Grout Sealer:Apply penetrating grout sealer to grout joints according to manufacturer's instructions.As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Wall Tile—Interior Installation on Coated Glass Mat Backer Board (Thin-Set) 1. Comply with TCNA W245;ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A108.10. 2. Install tile with latex portland cement mortar bond coat. 3. Install tile with latex-portland cement grout. 3.6 ADJUSTING.AND CLEANING A. Adjusting Defective Work: I 1. 2. Replace cracked, chipped, broken, and unbonded tile. Rake and regrout defective grout joints. B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean tile and joints with Tile Cleaner after curing mortar and grout. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Resilient Flooring:09 6500 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Vinyl sheet flooring. 2. Linoleum sheet flooring. 3. Resilient wall base. I B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control,for moisture vapor emission testing for concrete slabs. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast-in-Place Concrete,for substrate affecting work of this Section. 3. Section 09 6800: Carpet,for resilient accessory requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. IB. Shop Drawings: Show location of seams and edges. Indicate location of columns, doorways, built-in cabinets, and cutout locations. I C. Samples: 12 inch by 12 inch for each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring product specified, and 12 inch length for each type and color of wall base and accessory. I1. For heat-welding bead, not less than 12 inches long of each color specified. D. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: Of each heat-welding bead and flooring product, color, and pattern combination required, with seam running lengthwise and in center of a 12 by 12 inch Isample made and applied to a rigid backing by installer for this project. E. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of Resilient Floor Covering Institute: "Standard Specifications and Recommended Work Procedures of Resilient Floor Coverings." B. Installer: Engage installer who is approved by manufacturer, in writing, is competent in technique required for heat-welded seams, and has successfully completed five projects of Isimilar size, quality and complexity. C. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper interface with work of this Section. D. Mockups: Before installing linoleum floor coverings, construct mockups for each type of i. linoleum floor covering and installation method required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Comply with the following requirements, using materials specified for completed work: 1 1. Locate mockups where directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of date and time mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the work. I 4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. Ia. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from project site. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 December 11, 2015 Page 2 b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed work. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of products with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products complying with the following tests: 1. ASTM E 648: Critical Radiant Flux; 0.45 W/sq. cm. or greater. I 2. ASTM E 662: Smoke Density; maximum specific optical density of 450 or less. C. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide floor covering materials in exits and in accesses I to exits complying with the following in accordance with NFPA 101: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Is A. Deliver in unopened packages with Manufacturer's original, legible labels intact. • B. Store products in dry spaces protected from weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 degrees F. I C. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use, and manufacturer's run number for matching floor coverings. D. Store off ground, in dry spaces protected from weather and damage. E. Store planks on flat surfaces. F. Store rolls upright. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Do not start installation of resilient floorings until permanent HVAC system is in complete operation. 1. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F for 48 hours before installation,during installation,and 48 hours after installation. B. Linoleum Flooring: 111 1. Move linoleum floor coverings and related products into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. II 2. Do not install linoleum floor coverings until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. I D. Install resilient floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Resilient Flooring:09 6500 I December 11, 2015 Page 3 • E. Do not install resilient floor coverings over concrete slabs until concrete has cured and is I sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by floor covering manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture tests for the following. 1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Maximum moisture emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 I sq.ft. in 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in accordance with ASTM F 1869, unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific products. 2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions:A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with I potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 3. Conduct tests by an independent testing agency, engaged by the Owner, under provisions of Section 01 4500. IF. Coordination: Coordinate with work of other Sections that require resilient floor accessories. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS IA. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; if differing substantially from Drawings, or approved Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. I1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra stock of each type, color, and pattern of floor covering installed, as follows: I 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet in roll form for every 500 linear feet of linoleum sheet flooring installed. 2. Plank: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof installed. IB. Furnish extra stock of not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet of each type, color, and size of resilient accessory installed. C. Package each type of material separately, identified, and protected against deterioration. D. Deliver to on-site location designated by Owner. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • I A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. I2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS A. Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings(SV): Provide products complying with ASTM F 1913, Type II, Grade 1, and with requirements specified in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. I2.3 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS Linoleum Sheet Floor Coverings (SL):Consisting of oxidized linseed or other vegetable drying I oil and rosin, mixed with ground cork or wood flour, mineral filler, and pigments. Mixture is bonded and keyed to a burlap (jute) or other suitable fibrous backing so that backing is partially embedded in mixture. Patterns and colors extend through entire floor covering thickness. II I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Resilient Flooring:09 6500 December 11, 2015 Page 4 1. Minimum Acoustical Performance Requirements: a. Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC),ASTM C 423:0.05. I b. Sound Absorption Coefficient(SAA),ASTM C 423: 0.05. c. Sound Transmission Class (STC),ASTM C 423: 53 d. Impact Sound Transmission Impact Insulation Class (IIC), ASTM C 492: IIC 53. 2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Wall Base: 1. Provide products complying with ASTM 1861,Type TP, (Rubber,Themoplastic) and with requirements specified in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2. Style: a. Style A, Straight with no toe at carpet. b. Style B,Cove,topset with toe at other locations. 3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch. 4. Length: Continuous. I B. Rubber Accessory Moldings: 1. Product Description: a. Reducer strip for resilient flooring. b. Carpet edge for glue-down applications. c. Carpet nosing. d. Tile and carpet joiner. 2. Color and Pattern:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. I 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Leveling and Patching Compounds: I 1. Concrete Slab-On-Grade Floors: a. Ardex SD-P Instant Patch or Ardex SD-F Feather Finish, as applicable, or approved. b. Self-Leveling Underlayment:ARDEX K-15 or ARDEX K-55 Self-Drying/Self- Leveling Underlayment Concrete. B. Adhesives:Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding I seams. D. Cove Strip: 1 inch radius support for integral cove base provided or approved by floor 111 covering manufacturer. E. Cove Base Cap Strip: Square metal,vinyl, or rubber cap for integral cove base provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. F. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 Page 5 G. Chemical Bonding Compound: Product of floor covering manufacturer for chemically bonding Iseams. H. Rubber Accessory Moldings: 1 1. Product Description: a. Reducer strip for resilient flooring. I b. Carpet edge for glue-down applications. c. Carpet nosing. d. Tile and carpet joiner. e. Cap for coved sheet floor covering. 1 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. I. Sealant: 1 1. Manufacturer: Dow Corning, General Electric, or approved. 2. Type:ASTM C-920,Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; Clear,translucent silicone with mildew inhibitor. IJ. Cleaners: Neutral type provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Examine substrates and surface conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, I hardeners,foreign deposits,and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 2. Verify that concrete slabs have cured for minimum of 28 days prior to application of resilient floor coverings. I 3. Verify moisture vapor emission tests have been performed for concrete substrates. 4. Verify that concrete floor slab finish complies with requirements specified in Section 03 3000 for slabs receiving resilient floor coverings. 5. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, and depressions, and that open joints have been filled. 6. Verify that substrate is smooth and level,with flatness not exceeding 1/8 inch in 10 ft., noncumulative, in all directions. I 7. Verify that bottom of wall surfaces to receive base are within 1/4 inch from top of floor. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with resilient floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions for preparing substrates to receive resilient floor products. I1. Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates, including open joints, and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces. 1. Build-up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from adjacent floor 1 surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring surfaces. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Resilient Flooring:09 6500 December 11,2015 Page 6 2. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps and ridges. C. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with resilient products, using !I mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered. I E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. F. Priming:Apply concrete slab primer as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION I A. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Scribe, cut and fit flooring neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, and around pipes and I penetrations. C. Extend flooring into recesses such as door reveals and toe spaces, closets, under saddles and recesses, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes,and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish floorings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Adhere sheet floor covering to floor substrates in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. F. At horizontal unprotected edges, unless otherwise noted, place resilient reducer strips tightly butted to units and secured with adhesive;where reducer strip occurs at doorway, center strip under door. G. Lay out sheet flooring to maintain uniformity of covering direction. H. Lay out to achieve a minimum number of seams, and place in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, not less than 6 inches from parallel joints in flooring substrates. L Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams according to manufacturer's instructions. I J. Avoid cross and abutt seams. K. Integral Flash Cove Base:Where indicated, cut sheet flooring to form integral base of height indicated at vertical surfaces. Support at juncture of horizontal and vertical surfaces with cove strip. Terminate top of coved base with a cap strip. L. Heat-Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing I sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare,weld,and finish seams according to manufacturer's instructions and ASTM F 1516. M. Chemically Bonded Seams: Chemically bond seams with bonding compound, permanently fusing sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare seams and apply compound according to manufacturer's instructions and ASTM F 693. N. Hand roll sheet floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 7 I3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Install resilient products according to manufacturer's installation instructions. I B. Apply wall base to walls, columns,wall projections, casework and cabinet toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures, in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of Iadjacent pieces aligned. D. Where applied on irregular substrates,fill voids along top edge of wall base with Imanufacturers adhesive filler material. E. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. IF. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove I strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an I inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3. Set toe of base in continuous bead of sealant. Remove excess sealant from exposed surfaces. I 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION IA. Resilient Molding Accessories: 1. Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 1 2. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION IA. Perform the following immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove excess adhesive and other residue from exposed surfaces using neutral I cleaner recommended by manufacturer of resilient materials. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Clean floor surfaces as recommended by linoleum floor covering manufacturer. I B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer. IC. If recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer for specific products installed,apply protective floor polish, using commercially available product recommended by floor covering manufacturer, and coordinated with Owner's maintenance service. I 1. Seal linoleum with not less than 3 coats of floor polish. 2. Use commercially available product acceptable to floor covering manufacturer. 3. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Resilient Flooring: 09 6500 December 11,2015 Page 8 D. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 1. After drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) disappears, cover linoleum floor coverings with non-dyed untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. I E. Clean floor coverings just before scheduled inspection for Substantial Completion. F. Do not move heavy and sharp object directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. END OF SECTION 1 • I I I I I I I 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I I ' Tigard Apartments Carpeting: 09 6800 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: IA. 1. Carpet tile and carpet accessories. 2. Carpet cushion 3. Carpet walk-off mat. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control,for moisture vapor emission testing for concrete I slabs-on-grade. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete,for substrate affecting work of this Section. 3. Section 09 6500: Resilient Flooring,for resilient wall base and accessories. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data and manufacturer's specifications for each type of carpet material, carpet Icushion, and installation accessory specified. 1. Include installation methods for carpet on each type of substrate. I B. Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, locations where cutouts are required in carpet, and the following: 1. Carpet type, color,dye lot,and where dye lot changes occur if applicable. I 2. Seam locations,types, and methods. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation and method. I 5. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color,and location of inserts and borders. 8. Type, color, and location of edge,transition, and other accessory strips, including I 9. transition details to other materials. Type of cushion. C. Samples for verification,from same material to be used in the work: 1 1. Two 18 x 27 inch samples of each type, color,and pattern of broadloom carpet specified. 2. Two full size samples of each type and color of carpet tile specified. I 3. 12-inch samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. 4. 6-inch samples of each type of carpet cushion. ID. Schedule of carpet using same room number designations indicated in Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain removal products and procedures. I I I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Carpeting: 09 6800 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide carpet that comply with Department of Commerce Flammability Standard COC FF 1-70, 1 ASTM D 1335 and ASTM D 2859. 1. Carpet in Exitways:Comply with requirements of National Bureau of Standards Radiant Panel Test 75-950. 2. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. B. Provide carpet that comply with ASTM E 84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials for the following ratings: 1. Flame spread:25 or less. 2. Smoke density:450 or less. C. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. D. Provide carpet of each color/pattern from same dye lot. I E. Coordinate Work of this Section to interface with Work of other trades. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of materials with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). I 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rugs Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver materials in original unbroken mill wrapping,with manufacturer's register number labels intact. Labels to include identification of manufacturer, brand name and lot number. C. Store in an area protected from weather and damage in a well-ventilated area. 1. Lay flat,with continuous blocking off ground; do not store rolls on end. I 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2: "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." I B. Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, nominally dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near111 those indicated for final occupancy. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until concrete has cured and is sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by carpet manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture tests. 1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Maximum moisture emission rate of 5 lb of water/1000 sq.ft. in 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in accordance with ASTM F 1869, unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific products. 2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions:A pH range or 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 3. Conduct tests by an independent testing agency, engaged by the Owner, under provisions of Section 01 4500. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Carpeting: 09 6800 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS I A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; If differing significantly from Drawings, or approved Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. I1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide the following warranties: I1. 5 year warranty that carpet shall maintain specified limits of static electricity generating. 2. 10 year warranty that carpet shall not lose more than 10 percent of face fiber by I weight. 3. 10 year warranty that carpet shall not delaminate from substrate, curl, cup, shrink, or deteriorate at edges. 4. Any required restretching during 1 year warranty period shall be done at no additional I cost to Owner. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type, color and pattern indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET I A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2.2 CARPET CUSHION I A. Carpet Cushion: Cascade Pad by Wanke Cascade, Fibertouch 32, or approved. I 1. Fiber: 100 percent recycled synthetic. 2. Weight:32 oz. per sq.yd. 3. Density: 8.9 lbs. per cu.ft. 4. Thickness: 0.32 inch. I 5. Tensile Strength: 450 pound minimum. 6. Comply with the following standards: a. Radiant Panel: Class I. Ib. Smoke Density: less than 450. 2.3 ACCESSORIES IA. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Leveling and Patching Compounds: 1 1. Concrete Slab-On-Grade Floors: a. Ardex SD-P Instant Patch or Ardex SD-F Feather Finish, as applicable, or I b. approved. Self-Leveling Underlayment:Ardex SD-L Self-Drying/Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. I LRS Architects, Inc. , I I Tigard Apartments Carpeting:09 6800 Page 4 1 December 11, 2015 C. Adhesives:Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 1. Products: Provide one of the following with low emissions and odor, or approved. a. W. W. Henry Company: "Henry GreenLine GL 62 High Performance Carpet I Adhesive." b. Mapei: "Ultrabond ECO"product series. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape recommended by carpet manufacturer. 111 E. Edge Strips:Verify use of type as acceptable to Architect. 1. Resilient Edge Strips: Product types to suit application, as specified in Section 09 6500, of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and surface conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete floor slabs comply with ASTM F 710. 2. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners,foreign deposits, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 3. Verify that concrete slabs have cured for minimum of 28 days prior to application of resilient floor coverings. 4. Verify moisture vapor emission tests have been performed for concrete substrates. 5. Verify that concrete floor slab finish complies with requirements specified in Section 03 3000 for concrete slabs receiving resilient floor coverings. 6. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, and depressions, and that open joints have been filled. 7. Verify that substrate is smooth and level,with flatness not exceeding 3/16 inch in 10 ft., noncumulative, in all directions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's installation instructions for preparing substrates to receive carpet. I 1. Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates, including open joints,and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces. 1. Build-up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from adjacent floor surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring surfaces. 2. Level subfloor to achieve flatness of 3/16 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. 3. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps and ridges. C. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with resilient products, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. I LRS Architects, Inc. i I I Tigard Apartments Carpeting: 09 6800 December 11, 2015 Page 5 ID. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered. 3.3 INSTALLATION IA. General: 1. Carpet with Carpet Cushion: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in II Installations." B. Installation: I 1. Install carpet only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 2. Install carpet with pile inclination in one direction. 3. Scribe carpet accurately at edge and fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases,around pipes and penetrations, under saddles and thresholds, and around I 4. permanent cabinets and equipment. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves and similar openings. 5. Align lines of carpet pile, as woven, using no fill strips less than 6 inches wide, laying I carpet pile and seams in same direction unless specifically directed otherwise by Architect. 6. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. I 7. Bind cut edges where not concealed by protective guards or overlapping edges. C. Seams: I 1. Minimize numbers of seams, and locate where shown in Drawings, approved Shop Drawings, or where specifically approved by Architect. 2. Locate seams to minimize number of seams, and to maximum extent possible, out of way of traffic and in direction of traffic. I 3. Fabricate seams by compression method, using a butt joint, and properly bead and seal. 4. Do not stretch seams. 5. Match carpet pattern at seams. 1 6. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION IA. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner I recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. IB. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or Irecommended by carpet manufacturer. 1. Provide heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkways over carpeting in direction of Itraffic, maintaining intact in carpeted space until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 1 i . LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Acoustical Insulation and Sealants: 09 8110 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Acoustical insulation. 2. Acoustical sealant. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 2100: Thermal Insulation,for thermal insulation. I 2. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board,for installation of insulation in wood stud wall framing and installation of acoustical sealant. 1.2 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION IA. Acoustical blanket insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions is installed under provisions of Section 09 2900,"Gypsum Board." I1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide with material of this Section a continuous acoustic barrier at interior partitions and ceilings where indicated in the Drawings when used in conjunction with materials specified in Section 09 2900,"Gypsum Board." 1.4 SUBMITTALS IA. Certified test reports showing compliance with required fire performance values. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Use workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. IB. Surface Burning Characteristics:When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1. Flame Spread: No greater than 25. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50. P2. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, I and other sources. B. Store inside and in a dry location. IC. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION I A. ASTM C 665, Type I, preformed glass-fiber or mineral wool type, unfacedj minimum 3/4 to 1 lb/cu ft. density. I iLRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Acoustical Insulation and Sealants: 09 8110 December 11, 2015 Page 2 B. Acceptable Products: 1. Owens Corning:Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation. t 2. Johns Manville:Sound Control Batts. C. Minimum Thickness:3 inches. I 2.2 SEALANTS A. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-drying, permanently flexible,for use in conjunction with gypsum board conforming to ASTM D 217. 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. ChemRex, Inc.,Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora;AC-20 Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. c. U.S. Gypsum; "Sheetrock"Acoustical Sealant. I 2. Concealed Joints: a. Miracle; 21 b. Pecora; BA 98 Acoustical Sealant. B. Fire-Rated Acoustic Sealant: Single component,silicone penetration sealant capable of stopping passage of fire,smoke, and water when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 and UL 1479, and capable of reducing sound transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 413; Dow Corning; Fire Stop Sealant. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of 1 this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Refer to Section 09 2900 for installation of blanket acoustic insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions. 111 END OF SECTION 1 I I I s 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Painting: 09 9000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of paints and coatings. IB. Related Sections: 1. Sections where factory preparation, priming, or priming and finishing, of painted or I 2. finished surfaces is specified. Section 09 2900: Gypsum Board,for substrate. 3. Section 09 9625: Non-Sacrificial Anti-Graffiti Coatings 4. Division 22: Plumbing,for painting of plumbing work. I 5. Division 23: Heating Ventilating, and Air Conditioning,for painting of HVAC work. 6. Division 26: Electrical,for painting of electrical work. 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces,foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and Iduct shafts. B. Metal surfaces of anodized or painted aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials shall not require painting under this Section, unless Iotherwise noted. C. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts. I D. Do not paint required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. I1.3 REFERENCES A. The Master Painters Institute (MPI):Approved Product List, Latest Edition. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint", as included herein, means coating, systems materials including primers, emulsions, I epoxy,stained enamels, sealers,fillers, and other applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate, or finish coats. B. Gloss/Sheen Parameter(Reflectance based off 60 degree angle reading) based on MPI I (Master Painters Institute): 1. Gloss Leve 1: Maximum 5 units. Flat matte finish 2. Gloss Leve 2: Maximum 10 units Flat, high side sheen;velvet-like finish I 3. Gloss Leve 3: 10-25 units Eggshell like finish 4. Gloss Leve 4: 20 35 units Satin-like finish 5. Gloss Leve 5: 35-70 units Semi-gloss I 6. Gloss Leve 6: 70-85 units Gloss 7. Gloss Leve 7: More than 85 units High gloss I LRS Architects, Inc. I i Painting: 09 9000 Tigard Apartments Page 2 December 11, 2015 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Materials list of required coating materials. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number, general classification, and cross-reference with finish system and application. 2. Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing,and applying each coating material. B. Samples: 1. Stepped Samples,defining each separate coat, of each color and material to be applied. I a. Provide three Samples of each drawdown, approximately 8 x 10 inches in size, each marked with specified color designation. b. If requested by Architect, submit samples during construction representative 111 samples of the actual substrate. 2. Revise and resubmit Samples as requested until required sheen, color, and texture is achieved. Approved Samples become standards of color and finish for accepting or III rejecting Work of this Section. 3. Do not commence painting until approved Samples are on file at job site. C. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations i controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Provide Work in conformance with recommendations in the"Architectural Painting 111 Specification Manual" by The Master Painters Institute(MPI). C. Interior Paint Mock-up: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating 1 and substrate required on the Project,where directed by Architect, and where permanent lighting has been activated. 1. Walls and Ceilings: Provide samples on a minimum of 100 sq.ft. 2. Doors and Frames: One door and frame. 3. Approved mock-ups will be used as standard for Work of this Section. 4. Approved mock-ups may be used as part of the finished Work. I D. Exterior Paint Mock-up: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. See Drawings for locations of mockups. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved by Owner, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Owner at no added cost to Owner. I 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may be used as part of the finished Work. LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Painting: 09 9000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 3 I1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with legible labels intact. I B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum temperature of 45 degrees F. I1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and Isurrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F. IC. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products,as approved,for applications when air temperatures are below 50 degrees F. I D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain,fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces. I 1. Applications may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable during application and drying periods. I1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish and deliver to the Owner extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied equaling 5 percent, but not less than one gallon or more than 5 gallons, of Ieach material, color, and gloss applied. 1. Package paint materials in unopened,factory-sealed containers for storage, clearly labeled describing contents and location where used. IPART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in the Paint Schedule at the end of Part 3. IB. Other products listed in the MPI (Master Painters Institute) Approved Product List, latest edition, are acceptable,subject to compliance with requirements and approval. Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500; include paint manufacturers statement that Iproposed substitution is equal or superior to product listed. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL I A. Material Compatibility: Provide fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Painting:09 9000 December 11, 2015 Page 4 B. Undercoats and Thinners: 1. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coat. 2. Use only thinners recommended by paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits. 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat,finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish, except where material is factory primed. 4. Where accent colors are scheduled or indicated, provide appropriate and sufficient undercoats accordingly. C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. 2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of paint materials, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of particular paint by manufacturer of that paint, and as approved by Architect. B. Prior to use of application equipment,verify proposed equipment is compatible with material I to be applied,and integrity of finish will not be jeopardized by use of proposed equipment. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS I A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions,with the Applicator present, under which painting 111 will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not proceed with application of paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been I corrected and surfaces are receiving paint are thoroughly dry. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. I 1. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers, or remove primer and reprime as required to achieve compatibility with finish coatings. 2. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems using materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION 11 A. General: 1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to painted. If removal is impractical or impossible, provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. 2. After completion of painting operations in each space or area, reinstall removed items by using workers who are skilled in trades involved. B. Cleaning and Preparation: 1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations for each substrate condition, and as specified. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Painting: 09 9000 1 December 11,2015 Page 5 2. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity and flash I3. point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet painted surfaces. IC. Preparation of Cementitious Surfaces: 1. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. Use mechanical methods for surface preparation if I hardeners or sealers have been used. 2. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. 3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. I Correct alkaline conditions,and do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted by paint manufacturer. 4. Clean concrete floors with a 5 percent solution of an etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to remove cleaner, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and Ivacuum before painting. D. Preparation of Wood Surfaces: I 1. 2. Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil,and other foreign substances. Smooth finished surfaces exposed to view with sandpaper. 3. Do not proceed with painting of wood surfaces until the moisture content of the wood I is 12 percent or less as measured by a moisture meter. E. Preparation of Metal Surfaces: I 1. Ungalvanized, Uncoated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease, and loose mill scale. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer I and according to requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 1 2. Ungalvanized, Coated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease, and touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. Touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. I 3. Galvanized surfaces: Remove oil and surface contaminants with nonpetroleum-based solvents. Use mechanical methods to remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock. IF. Materials Preparation: 1. Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. I 2. 3. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition,free from foreign materials and residue. 4. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density. Ia. Do not stir surface film into material; remove surface film and, if necessary, strain material before using. I ILRS Architects, Inc. • I Tigard Apartments Painting:09 9000 111December 11, 2015 Page 6 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: I 1. Apply paint materials in accordance with manufacturers and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. 2. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide a lighter shade in III each undercoat to distinguish each separate coat. 3. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint backsides to match exposed faces. 5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 6. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch up painted. 7. Apply additional coats where undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until paint finish is uniform in color, appearance, and opacity. B. Drying: I 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying period as recommended by material manufacturer to suit weather conditions. 2. Consider oil-base and oleo-resinous solvent-type paint as dry for recoating when paint feels firm,does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of thumb, and when application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat. C. Brush Applications: 1. Brush out and work brush coats onto surface in an even film. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, and other surface imperfections to be repaired. D. Spray Application: 1. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide hiding equivalent of brush coats. 2. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. E. For completed Work, match approved Samples as to texture, color,sheen. I 1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system specified, but in no case less than recommended by the manufacturer. G. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures: 1. Exposed Mechanical and Electrical Items: I a. Finish electric panels,access doors, conduits, plug mold, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers,vents,and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces in finished spaces. b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black. c. Wash galvanized metal with solvent, prime, and apply 2 coats of specified enamel. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Painting: 09 9000 I December 11, 2015 Page 7 2. Hardware: a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces. b. Paint metal portions of head seals,jamb seals, and astragal seals to match color of door frame, unless otherwise directed by Architect. 1 3. Wet Areas (Toilet Rooms, Showers, Kitchens,Janitors, and the Like): a. Add an approved fungicide to paint. I b. For oil base paints, use 1 percent phenylmercuric or 4 percent tetrachlorophenol. c. For water emulsion and glue size-sized surfaces, use 4 percent sodium Itetrachloropenate. 4. Exposed Vents:Apply two coats of heat-resistant paint. 5. Plywood at Walls for Mounting Electric,Telephone and Data Equipment: Paint gray or Iblue as directed by Owner. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to engage an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being applied, and test for minimum coating thickness. B. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in I the presence of the Contractor. C. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used Idoes not comply with specification requirements. 1. The Contractor shall pay for testing, and repaint surfaces found to be coated with noncomplying paints. If the noncomplying paints are incompatible with specified I paints,the Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from painted surfaces. 3.5 CLEANING IA. Remove from the site each day, empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded refuse created by Work of this Section, and dispose of in a legal manner. I 1. Do not dump waste materials, including thinners, on site. 2. Do not use sanitary or storm drains. 3.6 PROTECTION I A. Protect Work of other trades against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. 1 B. Provide"Wet Paint"signs at newly painted finishes. C. Touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces caused by other trades. 1 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case less than recommended by paint Imanufacturer, or as otherwise noted. B. Provide gloss/sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise indicated in Color Schedule. I ILRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Painting:09 9000 December 11,2015 Page 8 C. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products,as approved,for applications when air temperatures are below 50 degrees F. D. Paint products followed with an *are acceptable products not MPI listed. E. Primer:Wood -Opaque Finish: I 1. First Coat: Exterior Latex Wood Primer MPI #6 Benjamin Moore: Super Spec Latex Exterior Primer 169/K169. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start All-Purpose 100%Acrylic Primer 023/N023/F023. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start 100%Acrylic Superior Primer 046/K046. Coronado Paint: Crylicote Gold 100%Acryic House Paint Primer. Coronado Paint: Supreme Acrylic Bonding Primer. Kelly-Moore: Professional Color Shield Exterior Acrylic Primer/Sealer 250-100. Kelly-Moore:Stain Lock 11 Stain Resistant Acrylic Primer 255-100. Miller Paint Co:Acri-Lite 100%Acrylic Primer 7052. PPG: Seal Grip Universal Primer Sealer 17-921. Rodda Paint Co: First Coat Exterior Interior Latex Primer 501601. Sherwin Williams: Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W8041. Sherwin Williams: Multi-Purpose Latex Primer B51 W8020. Sherwin Williams: Multi-Purpose Zero VOC Primer/Sealer B51 W00450. Sherwin Williams: PrepRite ProBlock Interior/Exterior Latex Primer Sealer B51 W20. F. Primer: Fiber-Cement Siding; Delete if siding is preprimed: 1 1. First Coat: 100 percent Acrylic Primer: Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start All-Purpose 100%Acrylic Primer 023/K023;* 1 Kelly-Moore: Chem-Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer 247.* Miller Paint Co: Kril Primer Sealer 6040.* PPG: Perma-Crete Concrete and Stucco and Primer.* Rodda Paint Co: First Coat Primer 501601.* Sherwin Williams: Loxon Acrylic Primer A24W300.* G. Primer: Gypsum Board Soffits: 1 1. First Coat:Alkyd or Acrylic primer sealer, as indicated. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start All Purpose Alkyd Primer 024/K024.* Miller Paint Co: Miller Paint Acri-Light Primer 7052.* PPG: Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal Primer Sealer 17-9212.* Rodda Paint Co: First Coat Exterior Interior Latex Primer 50 1601* Sherwin Williams:A-100 Exterior Oil Wood Primer Y24W20.* H. Primer: Ferrous Metal: 1. First Coat: Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water Based) MPI #107. 1 Benjamin Moore: Super Spec High Performance Acrylic Metal Primer PO4/KPO4. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP D.T.M.Acrylic Low Lustre P25/KP25. Coronado Paint: Rust Scat Acrylic Metal Primer 36-11.* Kelly-Moore: DTM Metal Primer/Finish 5725-100. Miller Paint Co:Acrimetal DTM Acrimetal Primer/Finish Velvet 5000. 111PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer 90-908/909/912. Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Metal Master Primer 508901. Sherwin Williams: Industrial &Marine DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1.* Sherwin Williams: Prolndustrial Pro-CryI Universal Primer B66W310. LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Tigard Apartments Painting:09 9000 1 December 11, 2015 Page 9 II. Primer and Pretreatment: Galvanized Metal: 1. Pretreatment(Metal Conditioner): Clean and acid etch. Benjamin Moore: Oil &Grease Emulsifier P83.* Coronado Paint;a Benjamin Moore Company: Sur Prep 1 Oil &Grease Emulsifier.* Devoe Coatings Devprep 88.* Keeler and Long 6235.* Oakite 33.* Porter 571.* PPG Prep 88.* Rodda Paint: Cloverdale ClovaClean 78100. ZRC Metal Conditioner.* 2. First Coat: Galvanized Primer(Water Based) MPI#134. ' Benjamin Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer PO4/KPO4. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec DTM Acrylic Low Lustre P25/KP25. Carboline: Galoseal WB Wash Primer. Coronado Paint: Rust Scat Acrylic Metal Primer 36-11.* Kelly-Moore: Premium Acry-Shield 100%Acrylic Metal Primer 1725-100. Miller Paint Co:Acrimetal DTM Primer/Finish 5000. ' PPG: Pitt Tech Plus 100%Acrylic DTM Industrial Primer 90-912. Rodda Paint Co: Metal Master Primer White 508901. Sherwin Williams: Protective&Marine DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1. Sherwin Williams: Prolndustrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66W310. J. Primer:Aluminum-Mill Finish: 1. First Coat:Vinyl Wash Primer MPI#80. Carboline: Galoseal WB Wash Primer. Coronado Paint;a Benjamin Moore Company: Corrobond Super Etch Gray 317-200.* Miller Paint Co:Vinyl Wash Coat Primer 9172. ' PPG: Polyclutch Vinyl Wash Primer 97-687/688. Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Vinyl Wash Coat 709700X.* Sherwin Williams: Industrial &Marine Wash Primer P60G2/R7K44. K. Finish Coats:Wood with Opaque Finish, Fiber-Cement Siding, Ferrous and Galvanized Metals, Gypsum Board Soffits: 1. Second and Third Coats: Exterior Latex Flat MPI #10. Benjamin Moore:Aura Waterborne Ext. Paint Flat Finish 629/K629. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec 100%Acrylic Exterior Flat 183/K183. Benjamin Moore: MoorLife 100%Acrylic Flat Latex House Paint N105/K105. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec Latex Exterior Flat Paint 171/K171. Coronado Paint: Coronado Crylicote Latex Flat House Paint 10-1. Coronado Paint: Coronado Supreme Latex Flat House Paint 8-1. Kelly-Moore: Kelly-Moore Premium Acry-Shield 100%Acrylic Exterior Flat Paint 1240-121. Kelly-Moore: KM Professional Colorshield 100%Acrylic Exterior Flat Paint 1200-100. ' Miller Paint Co: Miller Paint Krill 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat 5900. PPG: Sun-Proof Exterior House &Trim Paint 72-110. PPG: Speedhide Exterior 100%Acrylic Latex Flat 6-601X1 Line. Rodda Paint Co:AC-911 Exterior Velvet Flat 511101. Rodda Paint Co: pHLEX-TITE 512301. • LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Painting: 09 9000 December 11,2015 Page 10 Rodda Paint Co: Protector 100%Acrylic Flat 512201. Sherwin Williams:A-100 Exterior Latex Flat A06W00151. Sherwin Williams:Weatherclad 100%Acrylic Exterior Flat B02WF0851. Sherwin Williams: Loxon Acrylic Coating A24W0035. Sherwin Williams: Loxon XP Waterproofing System A24W00451. 2. MPI Gloss Level 1: Flat; maximum gloss of 5 units at 60 degrees. L. System for Wood—Stained Transparent Finish: 1. First and Second Coats: Exterior Semi-Transparent Stain MPI #13 (solvent based). Benjamin Moore: Premium Exterior Alkyd Translucent Finish 326/K326. Benjamin Moore: Premium Exterior Stain Alkyd Semi-Transparent Deck &Siding C328/K328. Columbia Paint:Woodtech Semi-Transparent Oil/Alkyd U.V. Stain CX08700 Series. PPG: Sun-Proof Deck, Fence, Sliding Semi-Opaque Stain 77-1260. Rodda Paint Co.: Rural Manor Semi-Transparent Exterior Stain 714103. Sherwin Williams: Exterior Alkyd Semi-Transparent Stain Al 4T00005. M. System for Concrete Unit Masonry and Manufactured Stone Masonry-Transparent Finish: I 1. Non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coating specified in Section 09 9625. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE ' A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case less than recommended by paint Manufacturer, or as otherwise noted. B. Provide gloss/sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise shown in Color Schedule. C. Paint products followed with an * are acceptable products not MPI listed. ' D. Primer:Wood-Opaque Finish: 1. First coat:Acrylic Primer Sealer MPI #39. ' Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start 100%Acrylic Superior Primer 046/K046. Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start All-Purpose 100%Acrylic Primer 023/N023. Columbia Paint: Masterpiece Acry-Prime Int/Ext Primer 05-200-PP. Coronado Paint:Grip&Seal Stain Killing Primer 116-11. Kelly Moore: Uni-Prime 295. Kelly Moore: KM Professional Kel-Aqua Interior 2680-100. PPG:Seal Grip Int/Ext Stain Blocking Primer 17-921. PPG: Porter Paints STA-KIL WB Primer Sealer 184. Rodda Paint Co: Unique II 100%Acrylic Enamel Undercoat 502001. Sherwin Williams: Multi-Purpose Zero VOC Primer/Sealer B51 W00450. Sherwin Williams: PrepRite Multi-Purpose Latex Primer B51 W8020. Sherwin Williams: PrepRite ProBlock Int/Ext Latex Primer/Sealer B51W20. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Painting: 09 9000 December 11, 2015 Page 11 E. Primer: Gypsum Board: 1 1. First coat: Interior Latex Primer Sealer MPI#50. Benjamin Moore: Natura Waterborne Interior Primer 511/K511. ' Benjamin Moore: Fresh Start 100% Acrylic Superior Primer 046/K046. Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer N372/F372-00. Benjamin Moore: Super Spec Premium Interior .Latex Primer 253/K253. ' Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer Sealer N534/K534. Benjamin Moore: Profinish Interior latex Primer Sealer PF05. Columbia Paint: Premium Pro Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater CX02735. Coronado Paint: Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer 40-11. ' Kelly-Moore:Acry-Plex Int. PVA Primer/Sealer Low Odor/Low VOC 971-100. Kelly-Moore:Acry-Plex Zero VOC Int.Wall Primer& Undercoat 973-10. Miller Paint Co: MPI #50 Primer-Sealer MPI #50. Miller Paint Co: Super Seal Primer 4740.* Miller Paint Co:Acro Pure Interior Primer 6440.* PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Sealer Quick-Drying 6-2. PPG: Speedhide zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Sealer 6-4900. Rodda Paint Co: Roseal Primer 507701. ' Rodda Paint Co: Scotseal Primer 507801. Rodda Paint Co: Roseal II Ultra Low VOC Primer 502701. Sherwin Williams: Drywall Latex Primer B28W08100. Sherwin Williams: Harmony Interior Latex Primer B11W00500. Sherwin Williams: ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W00600. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Int. Latex Primer B28W8200. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Zero Interior Latex Primer B28W02600. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 400 Primer Interior Latex Primer B28W08400. Sherwin Williams: Quali-Kote Interior Latex Primer B28WB1. F. Primer: Ferrous Metal: Same as specified for exterior applications. G. Primer and Pretreatment: Galvanized Metal: Same as specified for exterior applications. H. Primer:Aluminum-Mill Finish: Same as specified for exterior applications. I. Finish Coats:Wood with Opaque Finish, Gypsum Board-Dry Areas: (Acrylic) ' 1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Eggshell MPI #52 Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell N374/F374. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Eggshell N538/K538. ' Columbia Paint: Premium Pro Plus Acry-Plus Interior Latex Eggshell CX02255. Coronado Paint: Super Kote 5000 Interior Eggshell Enamel 30 Line.* Kelly-Moore:Acry-Plex Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel 1610-121. Kelly-Moore: Dura-Poxy 100% Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 1686-121. Kelly-Moore: KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel 1010-121. Kelly-Moore: KM Professional Green Coat Zero VOC Int. Latex Eggshell Enamel 2010-121. Miller Paint Co: MPI #52 Premium Satin Latex MPI #52. Miller Paint Co:Acrylic Satin 6200.* Miller Paint Co:Acro Pure Interior Eggshell 4650. PPG: Speedhide Interior.Satin Acrylic Latex 6-3511. Rodda Paint Co: Rodda Paint Lasyn EggShell 533001. 111 Sherwin Williams: Builder Solution Interior Latex Eg-Shel A62W00051. Sherwin Williams: ProGreen 200 Low Odor Low VOC Interior Eg-Shel B20W00651. Sherwin Williams: ProGreen 200 Low Odor Low VOC Interior Eg-Shel B20W00651. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC interior Latex Eg-Shel B20W02651. LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Painting: 09 9000 December 11,2015 Page 12 2. MPI Gloss Level 3: `Eggshell-like'finish; gloss of 10-25 units at 60 degrees. I J. Finish Coats: Gypsum Board—Wet Areas, Ferrous and Galvanized Metals: (Acrylic) 1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Semi-Gloss MPI#54 1 Benjamin Moore:Aura Semi-Gloss Water Borne Interior Paint 528. Benjamin Moore: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish N376/F376. Benjamin Moore: Natura Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss 514/K514. Benjamin Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Gloss N540/K540. Columbia Paint: Premium Pro Plus Acry-Plus Interior Latex Semi-Gloss CX02252. Coronado Paint: Super Kote 3000 Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel 74-1. Coronado Paint: Super Kote 5000 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. Kelly-Moore: Kelly-Moore Premium Enviro Coat Zero VOC 100%Acrylic Int. Semi- gloss Enamel 1520-121. Kelly-Moore: Kelly-Moore Green Coat Zero VOC Int. Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 2020- 121. Kelly-Moore:Acry-Plex 100%Acrylic Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel 1650-121. Kelly-Moore: KM Professional Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel 1050. Miller Paint Co: MPI#54 Premium Semi-Gloss Latex MPI #54. Miller Paint Co:Acrinamel Semi-Gloss 7200.* Miller Paint Co:Acro Pure Interior Semi-gloss 2850.* PPG: Pittsburgh Paints Interior Semi-Gloss Latex CP-5751. PPG: PPG Speedhide Pro-EV Int. Enamel Latex Semi-Gloss 12-510 line. PPG: PPG Speedhide zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss 6-4510. PPG: Speedhide Interior Enamel Latex Semi-Gloss 6-500. Rodda Paint Co: Master Painter Enamel 543101. Rodda Paint Co: SR Ultra Coat Enamel 543301. Sherwin Williams: ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31W00651. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss B21 W00251. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 400 Interior Latex Gloss B21W00451. Sherwin Williams: Ouali-Kote Interior Latex Semi-Gloss A26WO8151. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Zero VOC semi-gloss B31-2600 Series.* 2. MPI Gloss Level 5: Semi-Gloss; gloss of 35-70 units at 60 degrees. I K. Specialty Paint: Sherwin Williams, Krylon,Chalkboard Paint 1. Primer: Sherwin Williams recommended primer. , 3.9 PAINT AND COLOR SCHEDULE A. Provide gloss/sheen indicated in this schedule meeting parameters of gloss/sheen indicated in Paragraph 1.4B, of products, or equivalent products, specified in Paint Schedules above. B. Match the colors and sheens indicated in the Drawings and Finish Legends. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Tigard Apartments Non-Sacrificial Anti-graffiti Coatings: 09 9625 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Non-sacrificial anti-graffiti system applied to exterior concrete and masonry surfaces. 2. Testing of anti-graffiti system. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2200: Concrete Unit Masonry,for substrate. I 2. 3. Section 04 7300: Manufactured Stone Masonry,for substrate. Section 07 9200:Joint Sealants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Provide details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating, cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical properties including ' percentage of solids. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring I special attention. Indicate initial coating coverage rate for each type of substrate, and for coverage rate for each subsequent coating. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Use skilled applicators who are trained and experienced in application of anti-graffiti coating systems similar to those indicated for Project, and whose work has a record of successful in- service performance. IB. Verify that non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coating product proposed is acceptable to manufacturer of manufactured stone for application on manufactured stone product specified. 1 1.4 ANTI-GRAFFITI TEST PANEL A. Apply proposed anti-graffiti system to a minimum 100 SF area of each type of exterior I surface to receive anti-graffiti coating. B. Test anti-graffiti system according to manufacturer's written instructions in presence of Architect and Owner for effectiveness, and retest. "Test" means to apply graffiti to surfaces I of test area, and remove graffiti. 1. Testing of non-sacrificial system and should not require replacement of coating for I 2. retesting. PROSOCO, Inc., "Blok-Guard&Graffiti Control II:" Use PROSOCO: Defacer Eraser Graffiti Wipe"for removal of graffiti. ' C. If testing is unsuccessful for proposed anti-graffiti system, remove coating from test area, and repeat testing procedure in a different area, using products of a different manufacturer than initially proposed. ID. After successful test has been completed, as approved by Architect and Owner, test area may be incorporated in the final work. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Non-Sacrificial Anti-graffiti Coatings: 09 9625 December 11,2015 Page 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products according to manufacturer's instructions. I B. Protect coating liquid from freezing. I 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply coating when ambient temperature is lower than 45 degrees F or higher than 85 degrees F. B. Do not apply coating when temperatures are expected to fall below 32 degrees F within 12 hours. I C. Do not apply coating when rain is expected within 24 hours, or substrate has been wet or rained on during the prior 24 to 72 hour period. I 1.7 WARRANTY A. System Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship. Defects are defined to include failure to withstand complete graffiti removal, ghosting, shadowing, chemical staining, yellowing, and normal environmental effects. I 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one full case of graffiti removal materials in upopened,factory-sealed containers for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. PROSOCO, Inc: One coat application of Sure Klean Weather Seal"Blok-Guard &Graffiti Control II." B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. , B. Verify any loose mortar has been repointed and cured. C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter I detrimental to application of coating. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Do not apply anti-graffiti coatings until masonry mortar substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Non-Sacrificial Anti-graffiti Coatings: 09 9625 ' December 11, 2015 Page 3 B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. C. Remove oil or foreign substances with a cleaning agent recommended by manufacturer of anti-graffiti coating. ' D. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply number of coatings at recommended coverage rates for each coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions for each type of substrate. ' 3.4 PROTECTION TO FINISHED AND ADJACENT WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive anti-graffiti coating. B. Protect landscaping, property, and vehicles from overspray of anti-graffiti coating. C. If applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by a method instructed by coating 111 manufacturer. END OF SECTION 11 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal toilet compartments and urinal screens: I1. Compartment Style: Floor mounted, overhead braced. 2. Urinal Screen Style: Overhead braced. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wall framing, blocking and support backing. I 2. Section 10 2813: Toilet Accessories,for toilet accessories mounted in Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data,for each type and style of toilet compartment and urinal screen specified. 1. Include details of construction details, material description,fabrication, and installation I 2. requirements. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. B. Shop Drawings, showing fabrication and dimensional installation of toilet compartment 1 assemblies. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. I 2. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show layout of toilet compartments in relationship to entire room including fixtures and counters. Ia. Show and indicate that clearances to walls and fixtures are in compliance with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for Accessibility. IC. Samples: Of each compartment color and finish required, prepared on 6-inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and I familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." I1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility I requirements for the physically disabled. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 I December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceiling,and other construction in areas of installation I by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made before fabrication without delaying the I Work, establish dimensions and coordinate wall,floor, ceiling and other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.6 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with.work of this Section. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. I 2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 4. Knickerbocker Paritions Corp. I B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS 111 A. Stainless Steel Units: Facing sheets and closures fabricated from ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, stainless steel sheet, leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness. 1. Facing Sheet Thicknesses:Minimum thicknesses as follows: I a. Panels:0.031. b. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: 0.038 inch. I c. Door Panels: 0.031 inch. d. Urinal Screens:0.31 inch. 2. Compartment Style: Floor mounted,overhead braced. 3. Urinal Screen Style: Overhead braced. 4. Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish. a. Protect exposed surfaces from damage with application of strippable, I temporary protective covering before shipment. B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to I core material with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge closures. Seal corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth. 1. Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness with I exposed surfaces free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks,stains,discolorations, or other unacceptable imperfections. 2. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin- I impregnated kraft paper. 3. Door and Panel Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Pilaster Thickness: 1-1/4 inches. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I ITigard Apartments Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 December 11, 2015 Page 3 5. Grab Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars I mounted on units. 6. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. 7. Urinal Screen Construction: Similar to panels,with integral full-height flanges for wall Iattachment,and maximum thickness of 1-1/4 inches. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeve Caps: Stainless steel,ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than 0.031 inch thickness and 3 inches high,finished to match hardware. ID. Brackets (Fittings): I1. 2. Compartment Panels: Stirrup type ear or U-brackets, chrome-plated or zamac. Urinal Screens: Full height(continuous)type, manufacturer's standard design. 2.3 FABRICATION IA. General: Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated I B. Floor Mounted, Overhead Braced Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant supports, leveling mechanism,fasteners,and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each I pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Urinal Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated. ID. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments, and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening for disabled accessible compartments. I1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch with combination stop and I latch keeper, designed for emergency access and complying with disabled accessibility requirements. 3. Coat Hook: Combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. I 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Comply with accessibility requirements at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at disabled accessible compartments. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Verify areas and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for Accessibility. B. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Secure units in position with manufacturer's I recommended anchoring devices. ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 December 11, 2015 Page 4 C. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. D. Secure compartment panels to walls and panels with not less than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. ' E. Floor Anchored Overhead Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb,and tighten. 1. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. F. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. G. Urinal Screens: Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturers written instructions for proper operation. B. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. C. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens ' are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ' 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Plastic Tub and Shower Enclosures: 10 2117 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 111 1. Floor mounted fiberglass tub/shower enclosure, with accessories as required for a complete installation. I 2. Floor mounted fiberglass shower enclosure,with shower doors and accessories as required for a complete installation. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for substrate and wood concealed in-wall blocking. 2. Section 10 2813:Toilet Accessories I 3. Division 22: Plumbing, for shower floor drains, plumbing fixtures, and connections to water supply and drains. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: For enclosure, and accessories. Include manufacturer's installation instructions B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and dimensions, anchorage and mounting details, and I finishes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. 1 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and show Imeasurements on Shop Drawings. 1.5 COORDINATION IA. Coordinate the Work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Shower/Tub Enclosure(B-1): MAAX Bath, Inc, Model TSEA62, unit height 74 inches, 16-3/4 I inch threshold height with built-in shelf and all walls reinforced for future grab bars, or approved. B. Shower Enclosure (B-2): Fiber-Fab, Inc: Model 60T with seat (55-3/4 inch by 36 inch clear I floor space), or approved. 2.2 SHOWER AND SHOWER/TUB ENCLOSURE IA. Marine grade gelcoat finished fiberglass poly-core composite sandwich unit, with floor supports, and other items and accessories as required for a complete installation; standard color as selected. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i Tigard Apartments Plastic Tub and Shower Enclosures: 10 2117 December 11, 2015 Page 2 2.3 SHOWER ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing for Future Grab Bar: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing at all three walls. B. Built-in Shelves: Manufacturer's standard. C. Shower Door Units at Shower Enclosures: Holcam Bath and Shower Enclosures, a division of Hartung Glass Industries; Model F-9, Semi-frameless sliding door with double towel bars, 3/16 inch tempered glass with polished edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify correct location of floor recess, built-in framing,anchorage, bracing,and plumbing. 111 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. B. Install enclosure and components secure, plumb and level. 3.3 CLEANING 1 A. Clean exposed surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION I A. Protect finished installation from damage. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 I November 2, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes toilet room accessories. . IB. Related Sections: I 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wall framing, blocking and support backing for wall mounted accessories. 2. Section 10 2113: Metal Toilet Compartments,for mounting reinforcement in toilet compartments for accessories. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. I 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included in Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. I B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Comply with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. Grab Bars: Ii. a. Comply with structural strength requirements for grab bars and mounting of grab bar fasteners as stated in Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. I b. Coordinate placement of wall reinforcement for grab bars of sufficient length to meet the above requirements and capable of supporting at least a 250 pound point load. c. Coordinate same wall reinforcement for future grab bars where indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate with placement of internal wall reinforcement, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments for work of this Section. B. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances I required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning and servicing of accessories. 1 I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 • November 2, 2015 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the Schedule of toilet accessories at the end of PART 3, as manufactured by one of the following: 1 1. Community Building: a. • Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. I b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation. d. Gamco. e. McKinney/Parker. 2. Residential Units: a. Pamex Bath Accessories; Seal Beach Series. I b. Medicine Cabinets:Zaca, Inc.; SpaceCab Series. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet:ASTM A 666,Type 304, 0.031 inch minimum nominal thickness, 11 unless otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Steel:ASTM A 1008, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036 inch minimum nominal thickness. I C. Chrome Plating:ASTM B 456,Service Condition SC 2 (moderate service). D. Mirrors:ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I E. Fasteners, Screws,and Bolts: Stainless steel. Provide tamper and theft resistant where exposed. I F. Expansion Shields:As recommended by manufacturer for suitable for application. 2.3 FABRICATION I A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock,free of joints. I C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. I E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters,and anchor components for installation. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING I A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. 2.5 LOCKS AND KEYING 1 A. Provide tumbler locks for all lockable access doors and panels. ' LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 I November 2, 2015 Page 3 I B. Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of 6 keys to Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify location and placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement in toilet I partitions to receive anchor attachments for work of this Section. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's installation I instructions and Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for , accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. B. Install each item in its proper location, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to wall Iframing. 3.3 CLEANING 1 A. Clean exposed surfaces. 3.4 SCHEDULE IA. Community Building Toilet Accessories: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., or approved. 1. TPD Surface Mounted Toilet Paper Dispenser,Multi- To be I Roll determin ed (TBD) 2. SCD Surface Mounted Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser TBD 3. PTD/W R Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste TBD I Receptacle 4. SNR Partition Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal TBD I 5. GB Grab Bars, bar lengths as shown B-6806 Series, or equal 6. SD-1 Recessed Soap Dispenser TBD I 7 Bottle Filling Station Wall mounted,ADA compliant bottle filling station. Elkay, or 20 inch width. equal B. Resident Unit Toilet Accessories: Pamex Bath Accessories, Seal Beach Series products are I listed as standard;Zaca, Inc. listed as standard for medicine cabinets: 1. TP Surface Mounted Toilet Paper Holder TBD I 2. TB Towel Bars, 12 and 24 inch TBD 3. MC Recessed Medicine Cabinets, 16 x 26 inches TBD IEND OF SECTION I ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Manufactured Fireplaces: 10 3100 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes prefabricated fireplaces, including chimney flues and roof caps. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood framing. I 2. Division 26: Electrical,for connection to power source, and wiring and conduit not included with work of this Section. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data,for each product and accessory specified in this Section, including manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. IB. Shop Drawings: Elevations, sections,dimensions, installation clearances, anchorage and interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades. IC. Operating and maintenance instructions. D. Evidence of compliance with certification standard, and UL listing. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products with UL listing, and complying with governing codes and regulations. 1 1. Certification Standard:ANSI Z21.50 and CGA2.22. B. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers that have been in satisfactory use in similar Iservice for three years. C Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts that are familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. I1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 A. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Gas Fireplaces (FP-1): 1 1. Design Standard: Heat and Glo, Primo 72. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, equivalent I products from one of the following may be provided with approval: 1. Majestic. 1 2. Heatilator ILRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Manufactured Fireplaces: 10 3100 December 11,2015 Page 2 C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. I 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS—GAS FIREPLACES A. Prefabricated Fireplaces: I 1. Type: Direct Vent 2. Fuel: Natural Gas. 3. Construction: Sheet metal,firebrick lined. 4. Finish Package: Clean Face Finish with Black Glass Interior 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fireplace Trim: 1. Facing and Hearth:As selected by Owner. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. I B. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. 3.3 CLEANING,ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION. I A. Repair damaged finishes. B. Test for proper operation. , C. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION TION I I I I LAS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 1 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Cabinets for fire extinguishers. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood wall framing, blocking and support I backing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data,for each type product and accessory specified or required. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. I 2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Include rough-in dimensions, mounting methods,trim style, door hardware, cabinet type, and panel style. B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable I Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Provide fire extinguishers that are UL listed and labeled for type, rating, I and classification, or other independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Rated Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of IASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire extinguisher cabinets with wall depths. B. Coordinate size of fire extinguisher cabinets to ensure they are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers. 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in Manufacturer's original containers with original labels intact I and legible. B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. I 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 December 11, 2015 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1. Fire Extinguishers and Mounting Brackets: I a. Amerex Corporation. I b. J.L. Industries. c. Larsen Manufacturing. 2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: a. J.L. Industries. b. Larsen Manufacturing. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide extinguishers of type,size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher cabinet and at other locations indicated. B. Mounted in Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (FEC): I 1. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type in Steel Container: U.L. rating:3A-40B:C. 2. Capacity: 5 lbs. 3. Color: Red. 4. Mounting: One per cabinet. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. - Construction: Manufacturer's standard box,with trim, frame, door, fire extinguisher mounting bracket, and hardware to suit cabinet indicated.Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. I B. Non-Fire rated Cabinet: 1. Basis-of-Design:J.L. Industries Semi-recessed:Ambassador No. 2018V10. 1 a. ADA Pull:J.L. Industries Semi-recessed:Ambassador No. 2012V10. C. Fire-rated Cabinet: UL listed with fire-resistive rating equal to that of wall assembly that cabinet is installed. 1. Basis-of-Design:J.L. Industries Semi-recessed:Ambassador No. 2018V10 FX. 111 a. ADA Pull:J.L. Industries Semi-recessed:Ambassador No. 2012V10 FX D. Mounting: Semi-recessed,with 4-1/2 inch rolled edge return trim. I 1. ADA Pull: Semi-recessed,with 4 inch rolled edge return trim. E. Materials: Steel cabinet with steel door. I 1. Door style:Vertical Duo Panel. 2. Door glazing: 1/4 inch clear acrylic. LRS Architects, Inc. I ITigard Apartments Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 December 11, 2015 Page 3 F. Minimum inside cabinet dimensions: 12 inches wide by 27 inches high by 7-3/4 inches deep. G. Exterior and interior cabinet and door finish: Manufacturer's white, unless otherwise indicated. I2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Manufacturer's standard steel, size as required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated or baked enamel finish. I 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets, and on walls for extinguishers not located in cabinets. I 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Factory Applied Baked Enamel Finish:Two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat Iand thermosetting topcoat, minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify walls and partitions have suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets or wall brackets will be installed. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with regulations of governing authorities having I jurisdiction and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. B. Location: Refer to Drawings(Fire extinguisher cabinets are designated as"FEC"), or comply Iwith requirements of NFPA 10. C. Install fire-rated cabinets in partitions that are required to be fire-rated. I D. Mount cabinets and wall brackets at height to comply with requirements of Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. IE. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. F. Apply sealant between cabinet flange and wall surface. I G. Fill and service each fire extinguisher prior to Date of Substantial Completion; attach certificate of service, including date. I3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces and cabinet interiors. I B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace cabinets that cannot be restored to factory finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire extinguisher cabinet manufacturer. IEND OF SECTION I ILRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Postal Specialties: 10 5500 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. USPS-approved Front loading mailboxes. 2. USPS-approved mail collection box. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood wall framing, blocking and support Ibacking. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data, for each product specified in this Section, including manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. B. Shop Drawings,with elevation of units illustrating number and layout of postal boxes, and I interface to adjacent construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify that items provided under this Section comply with applicable regulations of postal authorities having jurisdiction. I B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING IA. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original containers with original labels intact and legible. 1 1. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. B. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of I each corresponding lock and key number PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:. I1. 2. American Postal Manufacturing Co. Auth-Florence Manufacturing. 3. Salsbury Industries. 4. Security Manufacturing Corporation. I B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. I2.2 USPS-APPROVED HORIZONTAL MAILBOXES A. Type: Front loading. 1 1. Mail Delivery: USPS; Comply with USPS-STD-4C. ILRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Postal Specialties: 10 5500 December 11, 2015 Page 2 B. Receptacle Compartment Sizes: Number as indicated in the Drawings. I 1. Size A: 3 inches H x 12-1/2 inches W x 15 inches D. 2. Size B:5 inches H x 12-1/2-inches W x 15-inches D. 3. Size C: 10-1/2 inches H x 6 inches W x 15 inches D. 4. Size D: 10-1/2-inch H x 12-1/2 inches W x 15 inches D. II 5. Size E: 16 inches H x 12-1/2 inches W x 15 inches D. C. Compartment Configuration:As indicated in the Drawings. I 1. Provide one outgoing mail compartment. 2. Provide one parcel compartment for every 10 receptacle compartments. ' a. Parcel Compartment Size: 15 inches H x 12-1/2 inches W x 15 inches D. D. Front-Loading Master Door: Extruded aluminum braced and framed to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master door lock. 1. Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. E. Compartment Doors and Locks: Extruded aluminum. Equip each with lock and tenant I identification. Provide mail slot in the compartment with master door lock. 1. Door Identification:As required by USPS standard I 2. Door Locks: Comply with USPS-L-1172C, PSIN 0910,for locks and keys, or equivalent as approved by USPS;with 3 keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. II F. Exposed Aluminum Finish: 1. Anodic Finish:Clear. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify substrates,areas and conditions for compliance with roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section. B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to the applicable requirements of postal authorities having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 1. Protect surfaces of dissimilar metals by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against I corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. 3. Final acceptance of postal specialties served by USPS depends on compliance with USPS requirements. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Postal Specialties: 10 5500 December 11, 2015 Page 3 B. Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Install with center of tenant door lock cylinders and bottom of compartments at the maximum and minimum heights above finished floor established by USPS and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Collection Boxes: Install with centerline of mail slots 36 to 48 inches above finished floor. t 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test postal specialties served by USPS after they have been installed according to USPS regulations. B. Obtain written approval of postal specialties to be served by USPS; Obtain approval from ' USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any. B. Adjust doors, hardware, and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. Touch up marred finishes or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal ' specialty manufacturer. D. Upon completion of installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 1 1 i 1 1 I t 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 ITigard Apartments Residential Appliances: 11 3100 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes residential appliances for kitchen and laundry applications. IB. Related Sections: 1. Division 22: Plumbing,for domestic water, and waste and vent piping connections. 111 2. Division 23: Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning,for venting duct connections. 3. Division 26: Electrical,for electrical service and connections. I1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: For each type of appliance indicated; include operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance. IB. Submit operating and maintenance instructions to include in maintenance manuals. C. Samples illustrating standard and optional colors available. ID. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated in Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals. I F. Warranties: Copy of special warranties specified in this Section. I1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: I 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, and marked for intended use. 2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA I 3. standards. NAECA: Provide appliances that comply with National Appliance Energy Conservation Act(NAECA) standards. I 4. Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements comply with"Americans with Disabilities Act" (ADA)and State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on the IBC, Chapter 11. I B. Provide appliances that comply with the following Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (AHAM) standards. 1. Dishwashers:AHAM DW-DW 1. I 2. Electric Ranges:AHAM ER-1. 3. Refrigerators:AHAM HRF-1. 4. Freezers:AHAM HRF-1. 5. Clothes Dryers:AHAM HLD-1. I6. Clothes Washers:ANSI/AHAM HLW-1. C. Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that carry labels indicating energy cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade I Commission (FTC)Appliance Labeling Rule. D. Source Limitations: Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance required. 111 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Residential Appliances: 11 3100 December 11, 2015 Page 2 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store appliances in their original containers,with labels intact and legible. 111 B. Do not deliver until finishes in areas of installation are complete and casework or cabinetry I has been installed. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Coordinate the work of this Section with location and placement of utilities. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Resident Unit Appliances: Provide written manufacturer's standard warranty for replacement or repair of appliances or components that fail in materials and workmanship within specified warranty period, including disconnection and removal of defective unit, and connection of III replacement appliances. 1. Electric Range: 5 year limited warranty for surface burner elements. 2. Microwave Oven: 5 year limited warranty for defects in the magnetron tube. I 3. Refrigerator/Freezer:5 year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system. 4. Dishwasher: 10 year limited warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub and door liner. 5. Clothes Washer: 10 year limited warranty for inner wash basket and outer tub and 5 year limited warranty for the balance suspension system and drive transmission. PART 2PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Residential Appliances: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated I in the Residential Appliance Schedule at the end of PART 3. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 UTILITY SERVICE A. As available for building; refer to Work of Divisions 22, 23, and 26 and the Drawings. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify existing conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Verify roughing-in for piping systems,ventilation outlets, and service connections are correct I and in required location. C. Verify that electric power of correct characteristics is available. I 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I I Tigard Apartments December 11, 2015 Residential Appliances: 11 3100 Page 3 B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with I concealed fasteners.Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in Ieach area.Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Refer to Divisions 22 plumbing requirements, Division 23 for vent duct requirements, and Division 26 for electrical power requirements. I 3.3 ADJUSTMENT IA. Test each residential appliance to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. IC. Remove and replace appliances creating excessive noise or vibration. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION IA. Remove packing material and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. 1. Wash and clean appliances, polish glass, plastic, hardware,accessories,fixtures, I and fittings. 3.5 DEMONSTATION A. Train Owner, or Owner's personnel, to adjust, operate, and maintain all appliances. 3.6 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SCHEDULE A. Standard Unit: 1. Range:Whirlpool WFE361 LVS; Free standing 30 inch electric range with standard cleaning oven. I a. Color: Stainless Steel. 2. Refrigerator/Freezer:Whirlpool W8RXEGMWS; 18 c.f.top freezer refrigerator. I a. Color: Stainless Steel. I3. Dishwasher:Whirlpool DU1055XTVS; Energy Star qualified tall tub dishwasher. a. Color: Stainless Steel. I 4. Microwave/range hood:Whirlpool WMH1163XVS; 1.6 c.f. microwave-range hood combination. a. Color: Stainless Steel. I 5. Clothes Washer/Dryer Combination Unit: General Electric GTUP270EM; 27 inch unitized spacemaker, 3.3 c.f. washer,5.9 c.f. dryer. Ia. Color:White. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Residential Appliances: 11 3100 I December 11, 2015 aptable Unit: Page 4 B. ADA Ad 1. Range:Whirlpool WDE150LVS; 30 inch drop-in electric range with standard cleaning I oven. a. Color: Stainless Steel. I 2. Refrigerator/Freezer:Whirlpool GB9FHDXWS; 198 c.f. bottom freezer refrigerator. a. Color: Stainless Steel. I 3. Dishwasher:Whirlpool GU3100XTVS;Tall tub ADA height compliant dishwasher. a. Color: Black-on-Stainless I 4. Microwave:Whirlpool MT4155SPS; 1.5 c.f. countertop microwave oven. a. Color: Stainless Steel. 5. Range Hood:Whirlpool UXT4230AYS; 30 inch convertible under-cabinet hood, 225 cfm. Provide switch on wall for type'A' units. I a. Color: Stainless Steel. C. Community Building: I • 1. Refrigerator/Freezer: Bosch, B361T800NP; 19.5 c.f., 36 inch, French door bottom freezer. I a. Color: Custom Panel, Benchmark Series. 2. Wall Oven: Bosch; Benchmark Series, HBLP451 UC, 30 inch single wall oven. I a. Color: Stainless Steel. 3. Cooktop: Bosch, Benchmark Series, NGMP055UC, 30 inch gas cooktop, I 4. Microwave: Bosch; Built-In microwave oven 500 Series, 2.1 c.f., 24 inch width. a. Color: Stainless Steel. ' b. Trim Kit:27 inch, HMT5751 UC 5. Dishwasher:Asko, D5536XLF, panel ready,ADA compliant dishwasher. I a. Panel: To be selected. D. Workroom: I 1. Side-by-Side Refrigerator:Whirlpool WRS325FNAM, 25 c.f. 36 inch wide refrigerator. a. Color: Stainless Steel111 END OF SECTION 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Tigard Apartments Window Shades: 12 2400 I December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually operated sunscreen roller shade system 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated. IA. 1. Include construction details, dimensions and profiles,features,finishes, and operating instructions. p g IB. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials,their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. IC. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. IB. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1. 1.4 WARRANTY IA. Manufacturer's standard warranty for the following components: 1. Shade Cloth: 10 years. I2. Hardware Components: 10 years. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS I A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I 1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units. PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.1 VERTICAL SHADES (WNCV-1) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vertical shades meeting Irequirements indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings, or approved. B. Light-Filtering Shade Fabric: Single sunscreen shadeband, Fire resistant, openness factor as specified and required by orientation and glazing, stain and fade resistant. IC. Mounting: Between jamb mounted. D. Shadeband Orientation: Reverse-roll, shade cloth falls at room side of roller. E. Configuration: Single band shades. I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Tigard Apartments Window Shades: 12 2400 December 11, 2015 Page 2 F. Accessories:Without exposed fastening. 1. Double Fascia: One-piece extruded aluminum. , PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. ' 1. Position shade band not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. 3.2 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust roller shades to operate smoothly,easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions, and protect installed shades from damage. END OF SECTION 1 1 • 1 t 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. s I ITigard Apartments Residential Casework: 12 3530 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: I1. Community building cabinets. 2. Plastic laminate countertops. IB. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry,for wood wall framing and concealed in-wall I 2. support framing for cabinets. Section 06 4000:Architectural Woodwork,for countertops not included in this Section. 3. Section 11 3100: Residential Appliances,for appliances installed in casework. I 4. Division 22: Plumbing,for plumbing work incorporated in casework. 5. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating,and Air Conditioning,for ventilating ductwork incorporated in casework. 6. Division 26: Electrical,for electrical work incorporated in casework. I1.2 DEFINITIONS I A. Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semi-exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, I including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottom of wall cabinets are defined as"semi-exposed." • C. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including I sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as"concealed." I1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cabinets, countertop material, and cabinet hardware. IB. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials,finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing and electrical Ifixtures. C. Samples: I1. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: 8 by 10 inches for each color, texture and pattern of plastic laminate specified. 2. Solid surfacing materials:6 by 6 inches. 3. Exposed Hardware: For each type of item. I 4. One full size, 16 inches wide,finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and drawers but without countertop. 5. One full size, 12 inches wide,finished wall cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and adjustable shelves. I6. One full size plastic laminate countertop, 8 by 10 inches, in configuration specified. 7. One full size stone countertop, 8 by 10 inches, or construction and in configuration specified. I I LRS Architects, Inc. ., I Tigard Apartments Residential Casework: 12 3530 December 11, 2015 Page 2 I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Source Limitation: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated,comply with the following standards: 1. Cabinets: Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (KCMA)A161.1. I 2. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A161.2. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed,wet- work is complete,and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative I humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Established Dimensions:Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual I dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements for Countertops:Verify dimensions by field measurements after base I cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.6 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework. B. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. I PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide residential casework meeting I requirements indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers are the following: 1. Huntwood Industries I 2. Lemons Millwork C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 CABINET MATERIALS I A. General: I 1. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 3. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. I 4. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1. 5. Particleboard:ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 6. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I A I . Tigard Apartments Residential Casework: 12 3530 IDecember 11, 2015 Page 3 B. Exposed Materials: I1. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGL. I a. Where edges of solid color plastic laminate sheets are visible after fabrication, provide through-color plastic laminate. b. For doors and drawer fronts faced with plastic laminate, provide plastic laminate edges of same grade, pattern, color, and texture of plastic laminate I as for faces. c. Color, Textures, and Patterns:As indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. I2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard finished with thermally fused, melamine impregnated decorative paper. I a. b. Provide material finished on both sides for doors and drawer fronts. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding on components with exposed or semi-exposed edges. c. Color,Textures, and Patterns:As indicated in the Finish Legend in the IDrawings. 3. PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions,through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick I at doors and drawer fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere. a. Color, Textures, and Patterns:As indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. IC. Semi-exposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard finished with thermally fused, melamine Iimpregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. a. Provide material finished on both sides for shelves, dividers, drawer bodies, and other components with two semi-exposed surfaces. I b. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with semi-exposed edges. c. Color:As indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. ID. Concealed Materials: 1. Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects I affecting strength or utility; particleboard; or hardboard. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE I A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish as selected from manufacturer's full range. Door and Drawer Pull:A7096 BNI. I1. B. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or Type B05091. 1 I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Residential Casework: 12 3530 December 11, 2015 Page 4 I 2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. I 1. Grade: HGS. I 2. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL. 3. Colors, Textures, and Patterns:As indicated in the Finish Legend in the Drawings. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. I C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Cantilevered Counter Support Brackets: Hafele, Cat. No. 287.72.200;finish as selected by I Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 CABINETS A. Face Style: Full overlay. I B. Face Frames: Frameless I C. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2 inch particleboard with plastic laminate faced particleboard. D. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Plastic laminate. I F. Shelves: 3/4 inch thick particleboard or 5/8 inch thick plywood. G. Joinery: I 1. Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. 2. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets wand bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. I 3. Rabbet tops, bottoms,and backs into end panels. H. Factory Finishing: Finish casework in factory to greatest extent possible. 2.6 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS I A. Provide countertops with the front, backsplash, and end-splash style as shown in Drawings, or if not shown, as selected by Owner from manufacturer's options. I B. Plastic Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 3/4 inch thick. 1. For countertops at sinks or lavatories, use Grade M-2 Exterior Glue particleboard or I exterior grade plywood. a. Seal raw-edge of plywood or particleboard adjacent to sinks and lavatories I with water-resistant sealant. 2. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back,and ends with additional layers of particleboard laminated to top. I C. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop substrate. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Residential Casework: 12 3530 December 11, 2015 Page 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. I1. Where cabinets abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. 2. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. B. Install cabinets without distortion so door and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. I 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom,at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1 inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. 1. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and I concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. IB. Clean casework exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. 1. Touch up factory applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 2. Replace cabinets and countertops with damaged finishes that cannot be repaired. END OF SECTION I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. ITigard Apartments g p Bicycle Racks: 12 9313 December 11, 2015 Page 1 IPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY I A. Section includes bicycle racks. I1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's published product data, including installation instruction:a. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original containers, with labels intact and legible. I B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS IA. Subject to requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Dero. IB. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 FLOOR MOUNTED BICYCLE RACKS IA. Material: 1. Centerbeam:2-3/8 inches OD by 2 inch ID by 1.54 inch Wall,ASTM 53 Schedule 40, Steel Pipe. I 2. Ring: 1-1/2 inch OD 11 gauge tube. B. Model: Dero, Bike Hitch. IC. Mounting: Surface mount. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory finish; Black. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION IA. Install work of this Section in accordance with Drawings, and manufacturer's installation procedures. g ers recommended I3.2 CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces and repair as necessary. IA. END OF SECTION I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 ' Tigard Apartments Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 December 11, 2015 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes subsurface systems for building foundations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS ' A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene B. NPS: Nominal pipe size. ' C. PE: Polyethylene. D. PP: Polypropylene. E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For drainage piping and geotextile fabrics. ' 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic pipe in direct sunlight. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate piping termination with storm drainage system, and location of other utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORATED-WALL DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings:ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings:ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends,for loose ' joints. 2.2 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS ' A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings:ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heave classes, hub-and spigot ends, gray,for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, of thickness matching class of pipe. B. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings:AASHTO M 252,Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway,for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 I December 11, 2015 Page 2 C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings:ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell-and-spigot ends,for gasketed joints. I 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS I A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric,sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling,for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined I and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Unshielded Flexible Couplings:Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end I 2. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full- length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end I 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:ASME A112.36.2M; with round-flanged, cast-iron housing; and secured, scoriated, Medium-Duty Loading class,cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout plug. B. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. I 2.5 SOIL MATERIALS A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill,and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Civil I Documents. 2.6 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS I A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq.ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m)when tested according to I ASTM D 4491. 1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament or woven, monofilament or multifilament: 2. Style(s): Flat and sock. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating,trenching, and backfilling are specified in Civil Documents. I 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. NPS 4 and NPS 6 Piping: I 1. Perforated, PE pipe and fittings,couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. I 3.3 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS A. At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I 1 Tigard Apartments Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 December 11, 2015 Page 3 IB. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. 3.4 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION I A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footings have been cured and forms removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide. IB. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides C. Place supporting layer of drainage couse over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter Ifabric,to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches. D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock Isections with adhesive or tape. . Install drainage piping as indicated in PART 3"Piping Installation"Article for foundation subdrainage. IF. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. I G. After satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade. I H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4inches. IJ. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away from building I 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION I A. Install piping beginning at low points of system,true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. I1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches, unless I otherwise indicated. 2. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 3. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe where applicable. Lay pipe with bells facing upsiope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. IB. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. IC. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. D. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. I 11 LRS Architects, Inc. I Tigard Apartments Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 1 December 11,2015 Page 4 3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot,with rubber compression gaskets according to CISPI's"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings I B. Join PE pipe,tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties." I C. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. • D. Join perforated, PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3212, with loose, bell-and-spigot, push-on joints. E. Special Pipe Couplings:Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both pipe materials and dimensions. 3.7 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at I changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. B. In vehicular traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. I 1. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches in depth. 2. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. 111 3. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular traffic areas. C. In nonvehicular traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and I riser extensions to cleanout. 1. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches in depth. I 2. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above grade. 3.8 CONNECTIONS I A. Drawings indicated general arrangement of piping,fitting, and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of foundation drainage system to solid storm drainage system. I C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation subdrainge to stormwater sump pumps. I 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping,test drain piping with water to I ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. I LRS Architects, Inc. Tigard Apartments Foundation Drainage:33 4613 ' December 11, 2015 Page 5 3.10 CLEANING ' A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. 111Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc.